project manual
for
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
City of Lewiston
Lewiston, Idaho
VOLUME 2 of 2
d a t e : March 9, 2016
s e t n o . ______________
p r o j e c t n o. 15025
SECTION 15010 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
1.03
1.04
SCOPE OF WORK – GENERAL
A.
This section specifies general requirements for mechanical installations and includes
requirements common to more than one section of Division 15. It expands and
supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division 1.
B.
Provide materials, labor, transportation, tools, permits, fees, inspections, utilities and
incidentals necessary for the complete installation of mechanical work indicated and
described in the Contract Documents.
C.
It is the intent of the Contract Documents to provide an installation complete in every
respect. In the event that additional details or special construction is required for work
indicated or specified under this section of work or work specified in other sections,
provide material and equipment which is usually furnished with such systems in order to
complete the installation, whether mentioned or not.
SEQUENCE OF WORK
A.
Conduct work in sequence to provide least possible interference to the activities of the
Owner, and to permit orderly transfer of activities and equipment to completed areas.
B.
Work shall be substantially complete by the dates listed in Division 1 Section,
“Summary”.
ALTERNATES
A.
1.05
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
Refer to Division 1 Section, “Alternates” for description of alternates. Review Contract
Documents for additional information.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Provide: Furnish and install complete and ready for intended use.
B.
Indicated: Indicated on drawings.
C.
Noted: Noted on Drawings or in Specifications.
D.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above
ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15010-1
15025
1.06
E.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished
occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
F.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
G.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical
contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
H.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
Code Compliance: Comply with most current adopted edition of following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.07
SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
A.
1.08
Comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations of any public authority
for the safety of persons and property, including the Occupational Safety and Health Act
(OSHA) and Division 1, General and Supplementary Conditions.
PERMITS AND FEES
A.
1.09
International Building Code (IBC), Standards and Amendments.
International Mechanical Code (IMC), Standards and Amendments.
International Fire Code (IFC), Standards and Amendments.
Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC),Standards and Amendments.
International Energy Conservation Code (IECC).
International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
National Electrical Code (NEC); NFPA 70.
Applicable State and local codes, laws and ordinances.
Obtain and pay for required permits and fees necessary to fully complete work included
in the Contract Documents.
INTENT AND INTERPRETATION
A.
Drawings and Specifications supplement each other and any details contained in one and
not the other shall be included as if contained in both. Items not specifically mentioned
in the specifications or noted on the drawings, but which are obviously necessary to
make a complete working installation shall be included.
B.
Drawings are partly diagrammatic and do not necessarily show exact location of new
piping and existing utilities, unless specifically dimensioned.
C.
Riser and other diagrams are schematic only and do not necessarily show the physical
arrangement of equipment. They shall not be used for obtaining quantities or lineal runs
of piping.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15010-2
15025
1.10
D.
Grilles, fixtures or other pieces of equipment shall be centered on windows, wall spaces,
or other items, unless specifically dimensioned otherwise.
E.
Location of piping and ductwork shall be checked to determine that it clears openings
and structural members; that it may be properly concealed; and that it clears cabinets,
lights and equipment having fixed locations.
F.
Mechanical drawings shall serve as working drawings for Division 15 work. Refer to
Architectural, Structural, Civil, Landscape and Electrical drawings for additional detail
affecting the installation of work. Architectural drawings shall take precedence over the
Mechanical drawings if any dimensional discrepancies exist.
G.
Approximate location of each item is indicated on the drawings. These drawings are not
intended to give complete and exact details in regard to location. Exact locations are to
be determined by actual measurements at the building. Not all pipe and duct offsets are
indicated on the drawings.
SUBMITTAL OF EQUIPMENT FOR APPROVAL
A.
Refer to Division 1 Section, “Submittal Procedures” for submittal definitions,
requirements and procedures. Additional requirements are listed below.
B.
Shop drawings, catalog information, and material schedules shall be submitted for
approval on materials and equipment prior to ordering.
C.
Submittals not meeting the following requirements will be returned for revision:
1.
2.
3.
1.11
Provide a cover page for each item or group of items (schedule group, single
fixture plus trim group, etc.). Cover page shall provide a 3” x 5” space for
Engineer’s review stamp
Each cover page must be clearly identified with the project name, specification
number and paragraph number.
Submittal package must be accompanied by an itemized index listing
specification section, paragraph number, item and manufacturer; larger projects
will be index tabbed by specification section with index for each section.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Furnish to the Engineer, a breakdown of the Contract for work in Division 15 within 30
days of Notice to Proceed.
B.
The breakdown shall list cost for materials and labor as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Miscellaneous Overhead Expenses
Selective Demolition
Plumbing Rough-in:
a.
Underground Piping
b.
Aboveground Piping
c.
Pipe Insulation
Plumbing Finish:
a.
Fixtures
b.
Plumbing Equipment
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15010-3
15025
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
1.12
c.
Final Connection
Plumbing Rainwater capture and distribution system.
HVAC Ductwork:
a.
Ductwork
b.
Insulation
HVAC Equipment:
a.
Air Moving
HVAC Finish
HVAC Instrumentation and Controls:
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
Project Closeout:
a.
O & M Manuals
b.
Record Documents
c.
Owner Training
GUARANTEE
A.
Guarantee satisfactory operation of material and equipment installed under Division 15.
Repair or replace any defective materials, equipment, or workmanship which may show
itself within one year from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
GENERAL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
A.
Where more than one manufacturer is listed, provide products of only one manufacturer
for each type of product.
B.
Materials used under this Contract, unless specifically noted otherwise, shall be new and
of the latest and most current model line produced by the manufacturer. Outdated “new”
equipment is not acceptable.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
D.
Fuel-fired equipment shall be listed by a nationally recognized testing agency.
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Throughout these Contract Documents, various materials, equipment, apparatus, etc., are
specified by manufacturer, brand name, type or catalog number. Such designation is to
establish standards of desired quality and construction and shall be the basis of the bid.
B.
Where more than one manufacturer is listed, and only one manufacturer's catalog number
is indicated, that standard of quality and construction shall be maintained by materials
supplied by other manufacturer(s).
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15010-4
15025
C.
Substitutions of equipment or materials shall be made only with written prior approval.
Prior approval requests must be received at least ten (10) days prior to bid date unless
otherwise instructed.
Refer to Division1 Section, “Product Requirements” for
procedures in requesting substitutions.
D.
Acceptance of substitution request signifies manufacturer recognition only. No attempt
has been made to check each item as to special features, capacities, or physical
dimensions required by this project. Verify requirements before submitting for approval.
Acceptance of exact features, sizes, capacities, etc., all of which must meet or exceed
design requirements will be determined when submitted during the construction phase.
E.
The Contractor shall bear full responsibility for substituted equipment and materials,
including, but not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Costs.
Available space requirements
Effect on other trades
Changes in electrical requirements
Changes in structural requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
COORDINATION
A.
Refer to Division 1 Section “Project Management And Coordination”.
B.
Coordinate available space for equipment and systems with other trades. Refer to
Architectural, Structural and Electrical Drawings for additional building details
necessary for coordination.
C.
Cutting, patching, wiring, finishing or any other work required for relocation of work
installed due to interferences between work of the various trades will be at no additional
cost to the Owner.
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A.
3.03
Furnish proper equipment and/or materials required for installation as intended by the
manufacturer, for all work described under Division 15. If needed for proper installation
or operation, request advice and supervisory assistance from the representative of the
specific manufacturer. Manufacturer's published instructions shall be followed for
preparing, assembling, installing, erecting, and cleaning manufactured materials or
equipment. Promptly notify the Architect in writing of any conflict between the
requirements of the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's directions and obtain
the Architect's instructions before proceeding with the work.
EXAMINATION OF SITE
A.
Visit site of proposed work and become familiar with conditions affecting work. Verify
measurements at the building before beginning work.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15010-5
15025
3.04
SITE UTILITY SERVICES
A.
3.05
EXISTING UTILITIES AND PIPING
A.
3.06
Locations of equipment and devices, as shown on the drawings, are approximate unless
dimensioned. Exact locations of such items shall be determined from the Construction
Drawings. Verify physical dimensions of each item of mechanical equipment, ductwork
system and piping system, to fit available space and promptly notify the Architect prior
to roughing-in if conflicts appear. Coordinate equipment to available space and access
routes through construction. Offsets or transitions in ductwork or piping systems
required for proper system operation and/or installation, whether indicated on drawings
or not, shall be provided at no additional cost to Owner.
REPLACEMENT OF PAVING AND CONCRETE
A.
3.08
Locations of existing concealed lines and connection points have been indicated as
closely as possible from available information. Assume that such connection points are
with in a 10-foot (10') radius of indicated locations. Where connection points are not
within this radius, contact the Architect for a decision before proceeding.
LAYING OUT WORK
A.
3.07
Where applicable, make connections to existing permanent cold water service
immediately so as to provide the use of this service by other trades. Comply with
Division 1 requirements.
Existing sidewalks, concrete paving, curbs, or asphalt paving removed or damaged
during period of installation or as a result thereof, shall be replaced with like material in
a manner as directed by and to the satisfaction of the Architect. Comply with Division 2
requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types,
grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications;
adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and
handling.
B.
Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing.
Protect stored equipment and materials from damage.
C.
Coordinate deliveries of mechanical materials and equipment to minimize construction
site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and
quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15010-6
15025
3.09
ACCESSIBILITY
A.
3.10
Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and
maintenance. Coordinate location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access
with location of access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of parts that
require replacement or servicing.
TEMPORARY USE OF NEW EQUIPMENT
A.
New equipment shall not be used for temporary heating, cooling or ventilation unless
authorized in writing by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 15010
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15010-7
15025
SECTION 15015 - MECHANICAL PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK - GENERAL
A.
This section specifies procedural requirements for mechanical installations project
closeout, including but not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.03
Project Record Document submittal.
Operation and Maintenance Manual submittal.
Operation and Maintenance Instruction and Training.
Mechanical Equipment and Systems Start-Up.
Training Session Agenda.
Lubrication.
Final Cleaning.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Record differences between mechanical work as installed and as shown in Contract
Drawings on a set of prints of mechanical drawings furnished by Architect. Return these
prints to Architect at completion of project. Notations made on drawings shall be neat
and legible. Comply with Division 1 Section requirements.
1.
1.04
Division 1 Section, “Submittal Procedures”.
Division 1 Section, “Closeout Procedures”.
In addition, furnish CAD drawing files of as-built record drawings on CD ROM,
AutoCad Release 2010 or later version.
B.
Mark drawings to indicate revisions to piping and ductwork, size and location both
exterior and interior; including locations of coils, dampers, and other control devices,
filters, motors and similar items requiring periodic maintenance; actual equipment
locations; concealed equipment and control devices; mains and branches of piping
systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered; actual inverts and
locations of underground piping.
C.
Revise equipment and fixture schedules on the Drawings to indicate actual installed
manufacturer and model numbers.
D.
Mark specifications to indicate change orders; actual equipment and materials used.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Prepare and submit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals for mechanical systems
provided. Comply with Division 1 Section requirements.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15015-1
15025
B.
Manual binder shall have permanent lettering of a contrasting color. Information to be
included on the binder is as follows:
1.
The front cover shall be lettered as follows:
MECHANICAL
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
(PROJECT NAME)
(CITY AND STATE)
(YEAR)
OWNER:
(NAME)
ARCHITECT:
(NAME
MECHANICAL ENGINEER:
L&S ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC.
GENERAL CONTRACTOR:
(NAME)
MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR:
(NAME)
2.
The spine shall be lettered as follows:
MECHANICAL O & M MANUAL (Year)
(Project Name)
C.
Provide master index at beginning of Manual showing sections and items included. Use
plastic tab indexes for sections of Manual.
D.
Cover section: List name, address, and phone number of Project Architect, General
Contractor, Mechanical Engineer, Mechanical Contractor and all Mechanical
Sub-Contractors. Provide a list of equipment suppliers with address and phone number.
E.
Provide a separate section for each Section of the Specifications. Provide index for each
section listing equipment included. Include all items specified.
F.
Include descriptive literature (manufacturer's catalog data) of each manufactured item.
Literature shall show capacities and size of equipment used and be marked indicating
each specific item with applicable data underlined. Data sheets shall be originals or
clean copies of originals. Copies of faxes are not acceptable.
G.
One copy of the manual shall be submitted for review and approval by the Engineer.
After approval, submit 3 copies of manual to Architect for approval unless otherwise
directed by Division 1 Section requirements. Information to be included in manual:
1.
Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations,
performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and
commercial numbers of all replaceable parts.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15015-2
15025
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
H.
1.05
Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine
and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping shut-down, and
emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.
Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and
troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting
instructions.
Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
Schematic control diagrams for each automatic control system. Mark correct
operating setting for each control instrument on these diagrams.
Valve schedule indicating the valve symbol (tag number), valve location by
room number and description, valve purpose and system served, and valve size.
Provide 1 corresponding set of full size mechanical prints showing these valve
locations for cross-reference. A second complete set of valve schedules (8 1/2 in.
x 11 in.) encased in clear plastic laminate and fitted in an aluminum holding
frame shall be furnished to the Owner.
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Report.
Test records and certifications.
Equipment start-up reports.
Warranty information and letters of guarantee.
Instruction period checklist for each equipment item.
Complete O&M Manual shall be available for use by Owner's representatives during
instruction and training sessions.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING
A.
Instruct Owner's Representative(s) in the Operation and Maintenance procedures
described in Operation and Maintenance Manual. Comply with Division 1 Section
requirements.
B.
Enlist services of qualified personnel, including each sub-trade and factory trained
specialists for each major piece of equipment, to attend training sessions and provide
operation and maintenance instructions.
C.
Submit training agenda, schedule and list of representatives to Design Engineer for
review 30 days prior to training sessions. Confirm attendance by written notification to
all participants.
D.
Prepare checklist of all equipment and systems requiring instruction and maintenance for
verification and agreement by the Owner's Representative of satisfactory start-up and
instruction. Checklist shall include a statement of completion by the Contractor, date
and topic(s) covered in each training session, and an attendance list of all participants at
each training session. Submit a copy of checklist to Design Engineer for review 30 days
prior to training sessions. Include copy of the completed checklist in Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
E.
Minimum instruction time shall be 16 hours, unless otherwise specifically noted. Refer
to individual Division 15 Sections for additional instruction/training requirements.
F.
All mechanical systems shall be properly functioning prior to instruction period.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15015-3
15025
G.
Instruction/training sessions shall be video recorded using a video camera with audio
capability. Furnish copy of all training sessions in DVD format to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS START-UP
A.
Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect unit
installation, provide start-up service and demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance
personnel.
B.
Include certification of factory-authorized representative status as part of equipment
submittal from manufacturer.
C.
Include written start-up reports with test data for equipment in
Maintenance Manual.
D.
Required Equipment items shall include the following:
LUBRICATION
A.
3.03
Operation and
Lubricate all pieces of equipment in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions
prior to project closeout. Include a listing of all equipment with the date of final
lubrication in Operation and Maintenance manual.
FINAL CLEANING
A.
Refer to Division 1 Section general requirements for final cleaning.
B.
At time of final cleanup, clean all fixtures and equipment and leave in condition for use
intended. Vacuum cabinet interiors of control panels, air handling units, etc. to remove
all construction debris including electrical wiring debris.
PART 4 - APPENDIX TO SECTION 15015
4.01
GOALS OF THE TRAINING SESSION
A.
Inform maintenance staff of minimum requirements for maintaining equipment installed
on this project. Minimum training required to satisfy this goal is listed in Suggested
Training Agenda. Additional requirements may apply as appropriate to equipment
installed.
B.
In addition to the general goal stated above, the Owner has the following specific goals
which the training session must satisfy:
1.
2.
3.
Train janitorial staff how to replace filters.
Train janitorial staff how to respond to alarms generated by the controls system.
Train maintenance staff regarding standard operating parameters of equipment.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15015-4
15025
4.
5.
6.
C.
Personnel who will be attending the training session are varied. Contractor should
design the training session as appropriate to audience as listed below:
1.
2.
3.
4.02
Train maintenance staff regarding the potential failure modes of equipment and
appropriate actions to take should such failures occur.
Train maintenance staff how to test status of water treatment.
Train Administrative staff how to adjust temperature settings, where appropriate.
Maintenance Staff
a.
Attending: Head of Maintenance, Assistant Head of Maintenance,
Maintenance Mechanic(s).
b.
These personnel have several years experience in maintaining systems
similar to those used in this project. General training session should be
provided as a refresher course in system maintenance requirements.
c.
Beyond the understanding general system requirements, individuals
should be able to identify specific maintenance requirements of
particular equipment used on this project.
d.
At end of the training session, the maintenance staff should be able to
prepare a maintenance schedule, based on information provided in this
training program.
Janitorial Staff
a.
Attending: Lead janitor, assistant lead janitor, line janitor(s).
b.
These personnel have little experience in maintaining systems of the
kind used on this project.
c.
Training for these individuals should focus on the basic, day to day
maintenance required to keep system in normal operating condition.
d.
At the end of training session, these individuals should be able to
respond to comfort complaints and emergencies by taking corrective
action or by contacting appropriate maintenance personnel.
Administrative Staff
a.
Attending: School Principal, Assistant Principal, Secretaries, other staff.
b.
These personnel have little or no experience operating systems of the
kind used on this project.
c.
Training for these individuals should consist of instruction regarding
normal operating procedures; what systems should be expected to do;
what systems should not be expected to do.
d.
At the end of training session, these individuals should be able to
respond to comfort complaints and emergencies by making minor
adjustments or by contacting appropriate maintenance personnel.
EQUIPMENT DATA SHEETS
A.
The following data sheet sample is for reference only. This sample sets the level of
completeness required for mechanical equipment records.
B.
Furnish data sheet for each piece of mechanical equipment requiring operation or
maintenance or both. Each data sheet be prepared on a single 8.5 by 11 inch sheet
suitable for insertion in a three-ring binder. Data sheets shall be completed to the fullest
extent possible by the Contractor prior to submission for Owner's use.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15015-5
15025
C.
EQUIPMENT DATA SHEET SAMPLE
Equipment Designation
Equipment Description
Location
AHU-1
Air Handling Unit
Mechanical Room 226
Manufacturer
Date of Manufacture
Warranty Term
Carrier Corporation
September 12, 2005
One year
Vendor
Company name
Street Address
City, State, ZIP
Phone
Fax
Start Up By
Company Name
Company Address
City, State, ZIP
Phone
Fax
O&M Instructions
In Manual 
Model Number
Start-Up Date
Performed by
39MXXXXX
Date
Technician name
On Video Tape 
Spare Parts
Filter Size:
Motor:
Fan Belt
Maintenance
Maintenance Items
Change filters
Clean coils
Clean fan wheel
Inspect condensate drain
Inspect damper actuators
Inspect piping for leaks
Date
Frequency
Quarterly
Annually
Annually
Quarterly
Quarterly
Quarterly
Maintenance History
Maintenance Performed
END OF SECTION 15015
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15015-6
15025
SECTION 15020 - MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specifications, apply to work of this section.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.02
1.03
Division 1 Section, “Summary” for phasing requirements.
Division 1 Section, “Execution”.
Division 1 Section, “Selective Structure Demolition” for general demolition
requirements and procedures.
SUMMARY
A.
Include all labor, equipment, and materials necessary to complete demolition of existing
mechanical systems as shown on the drawings and described herein.
B.
Reclaim and properly dispose of refrigerant at existing mechanical equipment.
C.
See architectural demolition sheet A2.0 for mechanical items to be removed.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site,
unless idicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to
Owner.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse,
and reinstall them where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that
are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and
reinstalled.
PART 2 - SALVAGE
2.01
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
The Owner shall have first salvage rights to all removed fixtures and equipment.
Coordinate selection with the Owner's Representative.
B.
Except for items or materials to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled or otherwise indicated to
remain owner’s property, demolished materials shall become Contractor’s property and
removed from Project site.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15020-1
15025
C.
Transport and legally dispose of off site, all materials resulting from demolition not
being salvaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
DEMOLITION
A.
Condition and Premises: The Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to
be demolished. General conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes
will be maintained by Owner.
B.
Partial Removal: Items of salvageable value to Contractor indicated to be removed, may
be removed from structure as work progresses. Salvaged items must be transported from
site as they are removed. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.
C.
Protections: Ensure safe passage of persons around area of demolition. Conduct
operations to prevent injury to adjacent buildings, structures, other facilities, and
persons.
D.
Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition operations
at no cost to Owner.
E.
Existing Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain, keep in service
and protect against damage during demolition operations.
F.
Cut and/or patch and repair all existing floor, wall and roof penetrations not being
re-used. Comply with Division 1 Section requirements.
G.
Previous demolition work at this building removed ductwork and piping within space
back to underside of roof at rooftop units. All remaining mechanical equipment piping
and associated ductwork waste, vent and gas, to be removed. Contractor to review site
before bidding.
H.
Existing boiler to remain, disconnect and remove all associated piping, electrical and flue
ductwork.
I.
All roof penetrations that are re-used shall be inspected and made air and water tight.
J.
Not all piping, ductwork or equipment items are shown on drawings. Other demolition
may be required. See A2.0 for mechanical items to be removed.
K.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components
indicated to be removed.
1.
2.
3.
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and
cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with
same or compatible piping material.
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and
plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15020-2
15025
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
L.
Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
Equipment removal shall include removal of all connecting piping, ductwork,
etc., either to a point below floor behind wall surface, etc.
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
Capture, reclaim and properly dispose of any refrigerant in existing equipment to
be removed.
If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance during construction,
or is rendered unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with
new products of equal capacity and quality.
END OF SECTION 15020
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15020-3
15025
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
1.03
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
Transition fittings.
Dielectric fittings.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
Sleeves.
Escutcheons.
Grout.
Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
Painting.
Concrete bases.
Supports and anchorages.
Access doors.
Drip pans.
Through-penetration fire stop systems.
Roof pipe supports.
Excavation and backfill.
Cutting and patching.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above
ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished
occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical
contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15050-1
15025
F.
The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1.
2.
3.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1,
"Structural Welding Code--Steel."
B.
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
C.
1.07
Transition fittings.
Dielectric fittings.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
Escutcheons.
Access Doors.
Through-Penetration Fire Stop Systems.
Roof Pipe Supports.
Welding certificates.
1.
2.
1.06
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and that certification is current.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through
shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of
dirt, debris, and moisture.
B.
Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and
bending.
COORDINATION
A.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress
of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15050-2
15025
C.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring
access that are concealed behind finished surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1.
2.02
2.03
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
the manufacturers listed.
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A.
Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and
joining methods.
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed
below.
B.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping
system contents.
1.
2.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness
unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
a.
Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze
flanges.
b.
Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel
flanges.
AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and
full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free; 95.6% tin/4% copper/0.4% silver solder;
440-500 deg.F melting range.
F.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP-5, copper-phosphorus alloys, 15% silver,
1190-1480 deg.F melting range.
G.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15050-3
15025
H.
Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1.
2.
3.
2.04
TRANSITION FITTINGS
A.
Plastic-to-Metal Transition FittingsPVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's
Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solventcement-joint end.
B.
Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping:
ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and
corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.
1.
2.05
ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
Manufacturers:
a.
Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
b.
Fernco, Inc.
c.
Mission Rubber Company.
d.
Plastic Oddities, Inc.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded,
solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C.
Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working
pressure at 180 deg F.
1.
D.
Manufacturers:
a.
Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b.
Central Plastics Company.
c.
Eclipse, Inc.
d.
Epco Sales, Inc.
e.
Hart Industries, International, Inc.
f.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
g.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b.
Central Plastics Company.
c.
Epco Sales, Inc.
d.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15050-4
15025
E.
Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225
deg F.
1.
2.06
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A.
Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.07
Manufacturers:
a.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b.
Calpico, Inc.
c.
Metraflex Co.
d.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
e.
PSI/Thunderline Link-Seal.
Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.
Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of
length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for
each sealing element.
SLEEVES
A.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 22 gage (0.0296-inch) minimum thickness; round tube closed
with welded longitudinal joint.
B.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C.
Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with
plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1.
E.
2.08
Manufacturers:
a.
Perfection Corp.
b.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
c.
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d.
Victaulic Co. of America.
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to
closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that
completely covers opening.
B.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chromeplated finish.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15050-5
15025
C.
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1.
D.
Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1.
2.09
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated
finish.
F.
Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chromeplated finish.
G.
One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
H.
Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
GROUT
Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement
grout.
1.
2.
3.
Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
DRIP PANS
A.
Galvanized steel sheet: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M
and having G90 coating designation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.11
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
E.
A.
2.10
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
Minimum thickness: 18 ga. (0.046 inch)
Joints: Sealed water-tight or welded.
Construction: Minimum 2-1/2 inch high with hemmed top edges all four sides.
Drain connection: 3/4 inch diameter outlet at low point. Stub out a minimum of
2 inches for drain line connection.
ACCESS DOORS
A.
Description: Access doors, non-rated and fire-rated for ceiling and wall surfaces.
B.
Related sections include the following:
1.
C.
Division 15 Section “Duct Accessories” for duct-mounting access doors in
HVAC systems.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Acudor Products, Inc.
Cesco Products.
Elmdor/Stoneman; Div. Of Acorn Engineering Co.
Karp Associates.
Milcor .
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15050-6
15025
D.
Flush, Insulated, Fire-Rated Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel
sheet.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
E.
Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel sheet.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Locations: Gypsum board wall and ceiling surfaces.
Door: Minimum 0.060 inch thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange
of frames.
Frame: Minimum 0.060 inch thick sheet metal with 1 inch wide surfacemounted trim.
Hinges: Continuous piano hinge.
Latch: Screwdriver operated cam latch.
Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.12
Locations: Gypsum board wall and ceiling surfaces.
Fire-Resistance Rating: One and a half hours, “B” label.
Temperature Rise Rating; 250 degrees at the end of 30 minutes.
Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal
with a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch.
Frame: Minimum 0.060 inch thick sheet metal with drywall bead.
Hinges: Continuous piano hinge.
Automatic Closer: Spring type.
Latch: Self-latching bolt with interior release.
Locations: Gypsum board wall and ceiling surfaces.
Door: Minimum 0.060 inch thick sheet metal, set flush with surrounding finish
surfaces.
Frame: Minimum 0.060 inch thick sheet metal with drywall bead.
Hinges: Continuous piano hinge.
Latch: Screwdriver operated cam latch.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRE STOP SYSTEMS
A.
General: For the following constructions, provide through-penetration firestop systems
that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements
indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance
rating of assembly penetrated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Fire-resistance-rated load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fireprotection-rated openings.
Fire-resistance-rated non-load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fireprotection-rated openings.
Fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies.
Fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies.
F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated,
as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fireresistance rating of constructions penetrated.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15050-7
15025
C.
T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop
systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814,
where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent
materials in occupiable floor areas:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical
damage, provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these
conditions both during and after construction.
E.
Related sections include the following:
1.
2.
F.
2.
3.
G.
Division 7 sections “Through-Penetration FireStop Systems” or “Firestopping”.
Division 15 sections specifying duct and piping penetrations.
Submittals:
1.
Product Data: For each type of through-penetration firestop system product
indicated.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of through-penetration firestop
system products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating throughpenetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive
testing of current products.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.13
Penetrations located outside wall cavities.
Penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures.
Penetrations located in construction containing fire-protection-rated openings.
Penetrating items larger than 4-inch diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. in
overall cross-sectional area.
Bio-Fireshield
Firestop Systems Inc.
Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc.
International Protective Coatings Corp.
RectorSeal Corporation .
3M Fire Protection Products.
ROOF PIPE SUPPORTS
A.
Freestanding pipe piers:
1.
2.
B.
Closed cell polyethylene AUV Resistant Black@ foam with 14 gauge clamp
channel insert.
Manufacturers:
a.
Erico/Michigan Hanger.
Freestanding Apillow block@ type pipestands:
1.
2.
Constructed of polycarbonate resins, UV stabilized.
Manufacturers:
a.
MIRO Industries.
b.
MAPA Products.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15050-8
15025
2.14
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A.
Bedding and initial backfill material: Clean, sand-gravel mixture free from organic
matter and conforming to the following gradation when tested in accordance with ASTM
D 2940.
U.S. Standard Sieve Size
B.
Percent Passing
1 inch
100
No. 200
0-10
Backfill: Satisfactory soil materials complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification
groups GW, GP, GM, SM, SW, and SP, free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any
dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install
piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment
rooms and service areas.
D.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at
right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
E.
Do not run piping directly over electrical panels or switchgear.
F.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
G.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
H.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
I.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
J.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15050-9
15025
K.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
L.
Cap or seal temporary openings in piping during construction. Remove caps or seals for
final connections.
M.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
N.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the
following:
1.
2.
New Piping:
a.
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deeppattern type.
b.
Chrome-Plated Piping:
One-piece, cast-brass type with polished
chrome-plated finish.
c.
Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
d.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Onepiece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
e.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, castbrass type with polished chrome-plated finish.Bare Piping in Unfinished
Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with concealed or
exposed-rivet hinge andset screw or spring clips.
f.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with
set screw or spring clips.
Existing Piping: Use the following:
a.
Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated
finish.
b.
Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed or
exposed-rivet hinge and spring clips.
c.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Splitcasting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.
d.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate,
stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw.
e.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel
type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips.
f.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with
set screw or spring clips.
O.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
P.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board
partitions where specifically indicated and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1.
2.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment
areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend castiron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring
if ring is specified.
Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15050-10
15025
3.
4.
Q.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1.
2.
3.
R.
Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve.
Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and
make watertight seal.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations:
1.
2.
3.02
Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve.
Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and
make watertight seal.
Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves.
Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1.
S.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a.
PVC or Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b.
Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane
waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install
section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished
floor level.
1)
Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and
location of joint.
Use metallic piping only for fire-barrier penetrations.Transition from system
pipe material to penetration material as required.
Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe
penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.
T.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
U.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughingin requirements.
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15050-11
15025
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated,
to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and
Tube" Chapter.
F.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
G.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt
threads.
I.
Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and
fittings according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.03
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry
seal threading is specified.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number
PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138
Appendix.
J.
Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K.
Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
PIPING CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each threaded valve and
at final connection to each piece of equipment.
Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at
final connection to each piece of equipment.
Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect
galvanized or black steel piping to copper piping and fittings.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15050-12
15025
3.04
3.05
3.06
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights
are indicated.
B.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems
and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or
replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with
minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible
locations.
D.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
PAINTING
A.
Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9
Section "Painting."
B.
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with
materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
CONCRETE BASES
A.
Concrete Bases:
Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment
manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.07
Construct concrete bases of dimensions where indicated, but not less than 6
inches larger in both directions than supported unit and 4 inches minimum
thickness or as recommended by equipment manufacturer.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the
base.
Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through
concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's
setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with
items to be embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
Use 3000-psi 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement .
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
B.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15050-13
15025
3.08
3.09
3.10
3.11
ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and
anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
B.
Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to
view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install
fasteners without splitting wood members.
C.
Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
GROUTING
A.
Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
B.
Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C.
Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D.
Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E.
Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F.
Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G.
Place grout around anchors.
H.
Cure placed grout.
DRIP PANS
A.
Locate drip pans where indicated.
B.
Suspend from structure with threaded rods and building attachments.
C.
Brace to prevent sagging or swaying.
D.
Connect drain line to drain connection, and routed to nearest plumbing drain or
elsewhere as indicated.
ACCESS DOORS
A.
Provide access doors wherever required to service valves, dampers, fire dampers, motor
or any other items of equipment where concealed, unless specifically indicated on the
drawings to be furnished under other Section(s).
B.
Size and locate access doors for service and maintenance of equipment items to allow
adequate access for required service.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15050-14
15025
3.12
C.
Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and
floor door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as
well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices.
D.
Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face
panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.
E.
Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A.
Examination:
1.
2.
B.
Preparation:
1.
2.
C.
Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing throughpenetration firestop systems to comply with written recommendations of firestop
system manufacturer:
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by throughpenetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's
recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not
allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
Through-Penetration Firestop System Installation:
1.
2.
D.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other
conditions affecting performance.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
General: Install through-penetration firestop systems in accordance with
manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for
products and applications indicated.
Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types
required to support fill materials during their application and in the position
needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire
ratings indicated.
Cleaning and Protection:
1.
2.
Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by throughpenetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in
which openings occur.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that
ensure through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration
at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or
deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated throughpenetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce
through-penetration firestop systems complying with specified requirements.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15050-15
15025
3.13
3.14
ROOF PIPE SUPPORTS
A.
Install roof pipe supports in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Verify roofing material and assure compatibility with roofing.
C.
Install at spacing required for pipe size and material. Refer to individual Division 15
Sections for piping system spacing requirements.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A.
Provide necessary excavation, shoring, and backfilling required for proper installation of
mechanical work.
B.
During excavation, stockpile material satisfactory for backfilling in an orderly manner at
a distance from the banks of the trench equal to half the depth of the excavation, but in
no instance closer than 2 feet. Remove excavated material not required or not
satisfactory for backfill from the site and dispose of properly. Grading shall be done as
necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into the excavation. Remove
accumulated water to maintain stability of the bottom and sides of excavation.
C.
Excavate trenches to depth required to establish indicated slope and invert elevations and
to support bottom of piping or conduit on undisturbed soil. Trenches shall be of uniform
width, sufficient to provide ample working room and a minimum of 12 inches of
clearance on both sides of pipe or conduit.
D.
Grade bottoms of trenches to provide uniform bearing and support for bottom quadrant
of each section of pipe. Excavate bell holes to the necessary size at each joint or
coupling to eliminate point bearing. Remove stones of 2 inches or greater in any
dimension, or as recommended by pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller, to avoid
point bearing. Where unyielding material is encountered in the bottom of trench, remove
such material 6 inches below required grade and replaced with materials described below
for bedding.
E.
Bedding and initial backfill material: Clean, sand-gravel mixture free from organic
matter and conforming to the following gradation when tested in accordance with ASTM
D 2940.
U.S. Standard Sieve Size
F.
Percent Passing
1 inch
100
No. 200
0-10
Backfill: Satisfactory soil materials complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification
groups GW, GP, GM, SM, SW, and SP, free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any
dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15050-16
15025
3.15
G.
Place bedding and initial backfill material to a depth of 6 inches over the top of piping.
Bring material up evenly on both sides of pipe for full length of pipe.
H.
Backfill to the required grade in layers not exceeding 4 inches loose thickness for
compaction by hand operated machine compactors, and 8 inches loose thickness for
other than hand operated machines otherwise specified. Compact top 12 inches below
subgrade and each layer of backfill at 95 percent maximum dry density (ASTM D 1557)
under structures, building slabs, steps, pavements and walkways. Compact the top 6
inches below subgrade and each layer of backfill at 90 percent maximum dry density
(ASTM D 1557) under lawn or unpaved areas.
I.
Do not cover underground lines until installation has been approved by the inspector
having jurisdiction and Owner's Representative.
J.
Cut trenches within 5 feet of footings or under footings only after approval of the
Architect.
K.
Provide bracing and shoring where depth of excavation or character of ground render it
necessary for personnel protection. Comply with local and state safety laws and
regulations.
L.
Remove bracing and shoring materials before backfilling except where necessary to
insure against caving.
M.
Provide securely constructed barricades around excavation.
N.
Exercise extreme care while excavating in the area of utilities, carefully check for
location of possible utilities, whether shown on the drawings or not, and establish
location of cutoff valves for ready shut-off of service in case of emergency. Assume
complete responsibility for all damage to any utilities caused in excavating as well as
damage to personnel and property caused by said damaged utilities whether shown on
drawings or not.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Comply with Division 1 Section, “Execution Requirements” for general requirements for
cutting and patching.
B.
Cutting shall be performed with masonry saws, core drills or similar equipment to
provide neat and uniform openings.
C.
Patching shall match adjacent surfaces in materials and finish. Do not endanger or
damage installed work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching.
D.
Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result
of mechanical installations. No extra reimbursement will be authorized for cutting and
patching work that is necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming
installations.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15050-17
15025
E.
No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching work that is
necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations.
F.
Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.
Remove and replace defective work.
Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract
Documents.
Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.
Install equipment and materials in existing structures.
Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore work to
provide for observation of concealed work.
G.
Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and
materials as indicated, including, but not limited to removal of mechanical piping,
heating units, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by
new work.
H.
Protect structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled
to be removed.
I.
Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread
of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
END OF SECTION 15050
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15050-18
15025
SECTION 15054 – ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specifications, apply to work of this section.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.02
1.03
Division 15 Section “Motors”.
SUMMARY
A.
This section specifies basic requirements for field-installed accessory electrical
components specified as a part of packaged mechanical equipment. These components
include, but are not limited to controllers, motors, starters, and disconnect switches
furnished as an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment, but not factoryinstalled.
B.
Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for
mechanical equipment are specified within the individual equipment specifications or
scheduled on the drawings.
C.
Make all required electrical connections from mechanical equipment to accessory
electrical components furnished by manufacturer as a part of equipment but intended to
be field-installed, including pushbuttons, pilot lights, interlocks, speed controllers, and
similar devices.
D.
Provide all required electrical connections of field-mounted float control switches, flow
control switches, and similar mechanical/electrical devices provided for pumps and
similar mechanical equipment.
E.
Provide interconnecting wiring between mechanical equipment shipped in multiple parts
and designed by the manufacturer to have field-installed interconnecting wiring.
F.
All electrical work shall comply with applicable requirements of Division 16.
REFERENCES
A.
NEMA Standard ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies.
B.
NEMA Standard 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
C.
NEMA Standard KS 1: Enclosed Switches. Comply with National Electrical Code
(NFPA 70).
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15054-1
15025
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.05
No separate submittal is required. Submit product data for motors, starters, and other
electrical components with submittal data required for the equipment for which it serves
as required by the individual equipment specification sections.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All electrical components and materials shall be labeled by an approved testing agency
(UL, ETL, CSA, etc.).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with applicable requirements of Division 16 and NFPA 70 (National Electrical
Code).
B.
Install equipment and wiring per manufacturer’s instructions.
END OF SECTION 15054
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15054-2
15025
SECTION 15055 - MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,
horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power
systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped
separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
Division 15 Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor
requirements for motor-driven equipment.
Division 15 Section, “Electrical Provisions for Mechanical Equipment”.
Factory-Installed Motor: A motor installed by motorized-equipment manufacturer as a
component of equipment.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.02
Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A.
Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet
above sea level.
B.
Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate
connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with
indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering
service factor.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15055-1
15025
2.03
POLYPHASE MOTORS
A.
Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B.
Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C.
Service Factor: 1.15.
D.
Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.
E.
Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
F.
Bearings: Greasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
G.
Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
H.
Insulation: Class F.
I.
Code Letter Designation:
1.
2.
J.
2.04
Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for
motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.
POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring
connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in
motor terminal box, suited to control method.
B.
Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.05
Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish,
designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise
pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.
Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F
insulation.
Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
Shaft Grounding Lugs: Factory installed.
Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally
protected motors.
SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A.
Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and
requirements of specific motor application:
1.
Permanent-split capacitor.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15055-2
15025
2.
3.
Capacitor start, inductor run.
Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B.
Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C.
Bearings: Pre-lubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial
and thrust loading.
D.
Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E.
Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to
motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of
motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor
temperature returns to normal range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 15055
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15055-3
15025
SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following hangers and supports for mechanical system piping
and equipment:
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.03
1.04
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" for vibration
isolation devices.
Division 15 Section "Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops" for pipe guides and
anchors.
Division 15 Section(s) "Metal Ducts" and "Nonmetal Ducts" for duct hangers and
supports.
DEFINITIONS
A.
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
B.
Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers
and Supports."
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and
thermal-hanger shield insert indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Pipe Hangers:
a.
Anvil International, Inc
b.
ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
c.
Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
d.
Hubbard Enterprises/Holdrite
e.
PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
f.
Thomas & Betts.
g.
Tolco Inc.
h.
Unistrut Corp.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15060-1
15025
2.
3.
2.02
Channel Support Systems:
a.
Erico/Michigan Co.; O-Strut Div.
b.
Thomas & Betts Corp.
c.
Tolco, Inc.
d.
Unistrut Corp.
Thermal Hanger Shield Inserts:
a.
ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
b.
PHS Industries, Inc.
c.
Pipe Shields, Inc.
d.
Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.
e.
Value Engineered Products, Inc.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Pipe hangers, Supports and Components: MSS SP-58, factory fabricated components.
Refer to “Hanger and Support Applications” Article in Part 3 for where to use specific
hanger and support types.
1.
2.
B.
Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
1.
2.
C.
Coatings: Manufacturer’s standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are
indicated.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic Coating, jacket or liner.
Thermal Hanger Shield Inserts” 100-psi minimum compressive-strength insulation,
encased in sheet metal shield.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket or liner.
Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent
treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier.
Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent
treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate.
For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield cover entire circumference
of pipe.
For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating
below ambient air temperature.
Pipe Stands: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosionresistant components to support roof-mounted piping.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod-roller, pipe
clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without
membrane penetration.
Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic base unit with plastic roller, for
roof installation without membrane penetration.
High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: Assembly of plastic base, two or more protective
coated steel channel vertical members; protective coated steel horizontal
member, galvanized steel, clevis-type pipe hangers, for roof installation without
membrane penetration.
Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe support made
from structural-steel shape, continuous-thread rods, and rollers for mounting on
permanent stationary roof curb.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15060-2
15025
2.03
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-wedge type zinc coated steel, for use in hardened
Portland cement with pull-out, tension and shear capacities appropriate for supported
loads and building materials where used.
B.
Structural Steel:
galvanized.
C.
Plenum Rated Pipe Clamps: ASTM E-84 25/50 plastic clamps. Hubbard Enterprises/
Holdrite or equal.
D.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink
and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1.
2.
ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A.
Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping
systems and equipment.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
C.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment
that will not have field-applied finish.
D.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E.
Use felt, rubber or vinyl padding applied to hangers for piping that is subject to
scratching.
F.
Support of pipe, tubing and equipment shall be accomplished by means of engineered
products, specific to each application.
G.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as
specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated
or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension
of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.
U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15060-3
15025
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
H.
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
I.
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
For vertical mid-span supports of piping 4” and under, use Hubbard
Enterprises/HOLDRITE Stout Brackets™ with Hubbard Enterprises/Holdrite
Stout Clamps or equal, or two hole pipe clamps (MSS Type 26).
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
J.
Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36,
with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt
to retain pipe.
Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30,
from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might
occur.
Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2
to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and
contraction might occur.
Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but
vertical adjustment is not necessary.
Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes,
NPS 2 to NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be
required in addition to expansion and contraction.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy
loads.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to
suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with barjoist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange
of beams, channels, or angles.
Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange
of beams.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required
tangent to flange edge.
Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from
above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a.
Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15060-4
15025
10.
11.
K.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
L.
Support and positioning of piping shall be by means of engineered methods that
comply with IAPMO PS 42-96. Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE support
systems or equal.
Use pipe supports that meet ASTM E-84 25/50 standards. Hubbard
Enterprises/HOLDRITE Flame Fighter TM or equal.
Suspended Water Heaters and similar equipment
1.
3.02
For equipping Type 41 roll
Plenum Installations
1.
O.
Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49):
hanger with springs.
Secondary Pipe Positioning and Supports:
1.
N.
Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids
with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by
manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
M.
b.
Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c.
Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
Overhead pipe runs of 1” and less to utilize Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE
#125, #125-L or #121 Series or equal brackets.
Utilize an engineered and manufactured platform for suspended applications of
water heaters and similar equipment. Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE
Suspended Water Heater Platform or equal.. Weight loading capability shall
include a minimum safety factor of 2.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.
B.
Support of pipe, tubing and equipment shall be accomplished by means of engineered
products, specific to each application. Field devised methods shall not be allowed.
C.
Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturers written instructions.
D.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers,
and other accessories.
E.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15060-5
15025
F.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
G.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, “Building Services Piping,” is not
exceeded.
H.
Pipe Stand Installation:
1.
2.
I.
Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.03
Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and
mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.
Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand
and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 7 Section "Roof
Accessories" for curbs.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project
through insulation.
b.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger
shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power
piping and ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor
barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining
insulation.
a.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel
weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel
weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a.
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b.
NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c.
NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
d.
NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
e.
NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.
Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping
insulation.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Engineered, factory-fabricated, galvanized steel supports shall be used when suspending
equipment from overhead structures or when supporting equipment above the floor.
1.
Suspended water heater installations shall include a drain pan with minimum 21/2” high sidewalls and a minimum ¾” drain connection.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15060-6
15025
2.
3.
4.
3.04
B.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and
equipment supports.
B.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that
cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.05
3.06
Water heaters of 50 gallons or less, suspended from the structure above, shall be
installed with an engineered and manufactured product.
Hubbard
Enterprises/HOLDRITE Suspended Water Heater Platform with integral drain
body or equal.
Water heaters placed on a stand, to elevate them above the floor, shall be
installed using a manufactured galvanized steel stand, engineered to meet the
intended weight load. Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE QuickStand series or
equal.
Water heaters installed in seismic zones shall be supported from the adjoining
structure by the use of DSA approved safety restrain devices. Hubbard
Enterprises/HOLDRITE QuickStrap or equal.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
ADJUSTING
A.
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to
achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B.
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
PAINTING
A.
Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint.
END OF SECTION 15060
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15060-7
15025
SECTION 15071 - MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
1.03
Division 15 Section “Hydronic Piping” for flexible pump connectors and hose
kits.
Division 15 Section “Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops” for metal bellows
expansion joints.
Division 15 Section “General Service Compressed Air Piping” for flexible
connectors.
Division 15 Section “Duct Accessories” for flexible connectors.
Elastomeric isolation pads and mounts.
Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.
Freestanding and restrained spring isolators.
Housed spring mounts.
Elastomeric hangers.
Spring hangers.
Thrust limits.
Restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails.
Seismic snubbers.
Restraining cables.
Steel and inertia, vibration isolation equipment bases.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Equipment Seismic Restraints shall be designed in accordance with Section 16 of the
International Building Code - 2009 (IBC).
B.
Seismic Design Category: “C”
C.
Mechanical Component Importance Factor: 1.0, 1.5 for gas piping systems and connected
equipment.
D.
Selection and installation of seismic restraint devices shall be in accordance with the
most recent edition of the IBC and ASCE-7 (American Society of Civil Engineers),
“Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures”.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15071-1
15025
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
B.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details
indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified Professional Engineer responsible for
their preparation.
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.05
Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration
isolation device.
Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for
each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.
a.
Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report
numbers and rated strength in tension and shear.
b.
Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and
compliance with requirements.
Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment
weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators,
seismic restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases.
Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages
and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights,
equipment static loads, and cantilever loads.
Seismic-Restraint Details:
a.
Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic
restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
b.
Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of
restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment
locations, methods, and spacing. Identify components, list their strengths,
and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure
during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation
devices.
c.
Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint
items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).
Qualification Data: For Professional Engineer
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base.
B.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15071-2
15025
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE
A.
Provide the following vibration isolators and bases for mechanical equipment and
systems:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Equipment: Rooftop Chiller
a.
Base: Steel support base, Type B. Unit integral support base acceptable
in lieu of Type B base if certified by manufacturer for isolator point
loading.
b.
Isolators: Housed spring isolators with integral seismic snubbers, Type 4.
c.
Minimum Deflection (in.): 2-inch.
Equipment: Base-mounted Hydronic Pumps
a.
Base: Concrete-filled inertia base, Type C. Anchor bolt and grout support
base solid to concrete pad.
b.
Isolators: Spring isolators with integral seismic restraint, Type 3R.
c.
Minimum Deflection (in.): 2-inch.
Equipment: Base-mounted Hydronic Pumps
a.
Base: Unit integral support base. Anchor bolt and grout support base
solid to concrete pad.
b.
Isolators: None.
c.
Minimum Deflection (in.): n/a.
Equipment: In-line Pumps
a.
Base: Unit integral hanger supports or field-installed hanger supports.
b.
Isolators: Hangers with elastomeric isolators, Type 2.
c.
Minimum Deflection (in.): 0.35-inch.
d.
Equipment: Rooftop HVAC Units
e.
Base: Steel support base, Type B. Unit integral support base acceptable
in lieu of Type B base if certified by manufacturer for isolator point
loading.
f.
Isolators: Housed spring isolators with integral seismic snubbers, Type 4.
g.
Minimum Deflection (in.): 2-inch.
Equipment: Air-Handling Units with Internal Fan Isolation (floor-mounted)
a.
Base: None required. Unit integral support base acceptable.
b.
Isolators: Isolation pads, Type 1.
c.
Minimum Deflection (in.): 0.25-inch.
Equipment: Indoor Air-Handling Units (suspended)
a.
Base: Steel support base, Type B. Unit integral support base acceptable
in lieu of Type B base if certified by manufacturer for isolator point
loading.
b.
Isolators: Hangers with spring isolators, Type 3.
c.
Minimum Deflection (in.): 1.0-inch.
Equipment: Indoor Air-Handling Units without Internal Fan Isolation (floormounted)
a.
Base: Steel support base, Type B. Unit integral support base acceptable
in lieu of Type B base if certified by manufacturer for isolator point
loading.
b.
Isolators: Restrained spring isolator, Type 3R.
c.
Minimum Deflection (in.): 2.0-inch.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15071-3
15025
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
2.02
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1.
2.03
Equipment: Fan-Coil Units; Fan-Powered, VAV Terminal Units, In-line Exhaust
Fans; Unit Heaters, up to 1500 CFM
a.
Base: Unit integral hanger supports or field-installed hanger supports.
b.
Isolators: Hangers with elastomeric isolators, Type 2.
c.
Minimum Deflection (in.): 0.35-inch.
Equipment: Fan-Coil Units; Fan-Powered, VAV Terminal Units, In-line Exhaust
Fans; Unit Heaters, over 1500 CFM
a.
Base: Unit integral hanger supports or field-installed hanger supports.
b.
Isolators: Hangers with spring isolators, Type 3.
c.
Minimum Deflection (in.): 0.5-inch.
Equipment: Air-Cooled Condensing Unit
a.
Base: Unit integral support base.
b.
Isolators: Isolation pads, Type 1.
c.
Minimum Deflection (in.): 0.25-inch.
Equipment: Packaged Air Compressors
a.
Base: None required. Unit integral support base acceptable.
b.
Isolators: Isolation pads, Type 1.
c.
Minimum Deflection (in.): 0.25-inch.
Equipment: Water Heaters; Tanks, and similar equipment 400 lbs. and greater.
a.
Isolators: None.
b.
Minimum Deflection (in.): n/a.
c.
Seismic Restraints: Anchor bolt to structure if furnished with anchoring
provisions, otherwise strap to structure at points within the upper onethird and lower one-third of its vertical dimension to resist lateral
displacement.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers listed.
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
Mason Industries, Inc.
MW Sausse.
Vibro-Acoustics.
Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
Vibration Mountings & Controls/Korfund.
Elastomeric Isolator Pads (Isolator Type 1): Oil- and water-resistant elastomer; crossed,
double ribbed pads, molded with a nonslip pattern; and factory cut to sizes that match
requirements of supported equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Material: Standard neoprene.
Thickness: 3/8-inch minimum.
Maximum Deflection: 0.09-inches.
Durometer Rating: 45 to 65.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15071-4
15025
5.
C.
Elastomeric Mounts (Isolator Type 2: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant
rubber or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for
bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise
identify to indicate capacity range.
1.
D.
2.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick,
rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor
load to 100 psig.
Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap
screw to fasten and level equipment.
Restrained Spring Isolators (Isolator Type 3R): Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators
with seismic restraint.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Materials: Cast-ductile-iron housing containing two separate and opposing,
molded, bridge-bearing neoprene elements that prevent central threaded sleeve
and attachment bolt from contacting the casting during normal operation.
Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard
for bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
Spring Isolators (Isolator Type 3): Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.
1.
F.
Durometer Rating: 50 Maximum.
Restrained Elastomeric Mounts (Isolator Type 2R): All-directional elastomeric
mountings with seismic restraint.
1.
E.
Number of Layers: 1 unless otherwise noted.
Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due
to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4inch- thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and
adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during
installation.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Housed Spring Mounts (Isolator Type 4): Housed spring isolator with integral seismic
snubbers.
1.
2.
3.
Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic
restraint.
Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.
Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel before
contacting a resilient collar.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15071-5
15025
H.
Elastomeric Hangers (Isolator Type 2): Double-deflection type, with molded, oilresistant rubber or neoprene isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded
connections for hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
I.
Spring Hangers (Isolator Type 3): Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger
with spring and insert in compression.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
J.
Thrust Limits (Isolator Type 5): Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with
spring and insert in compression and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron
brackets for attaching to equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.04
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for
a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding
or reducing isolation efficiency.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washerreinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or
reducing isolation efficiency.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch
movement at start and stop.
RESTRAINED VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF-CURB RAILS (Base Type D with 3R
Isolators)
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
Mason Industries, Inc.
Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
Vibration Mountings & Controls/Korfund.
Description: Factory-assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb rail
designed to resiliently support equipment and to withstand 125-mph wind impinging
laterally against side of equipment.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15071-6
15025
C.
Lower Support Assembly: Sheet-metal "Z" section containing adjustable and removable
steel springs that support upper floating frame. Upper frame shall provide continuous
support for equipment and shall be captive to resiliently resist wind and seismic forces.
Lower support assembly shall have a means for attaching to building structure and a
wood nailer for attaching roof materials, and shall be insulated with a minimum of 2
inches of rigid, glass-fiber insulation on inside of assembly.
D.
Spring Isolators: Adjustable, restrained spring isolators shall be mounted on 1/4-inchthick, elastomeric vibration isolation pads and shall have access ports, for level
adjustment, with removable waterproof covers at all isolator locations. Isolators shall be
located so they are accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of the installation
without interfering with the integrity of the roof.
1.
2.
2.05
Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with
seismic restraint.
a.
Housing:
Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops and adjustable
equipment mounting and leveling bolt.
b.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed
height of the spring at rated load.
c.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at
rated load.
d.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
e.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed,
without deformation or failure.
Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber,
arranged in single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and
galvanized steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad
area, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.
a.
Material: Standard neoprene
b.
Durometer Rating: 50 Maximum.
c.
Number of Layers: 1
E.
Snubber Bushings: All-directional, elastomeric snubber bushings at least 1/4 inch thick.
F.
Water Seal: Galvanized sheet metal with EPDM seals at corners, attached to upper
support frame, extending down past wood nailer of lower support assembly, and
counterflashed over roof materials.
VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES
A.
Steel Base (Base Type B): Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails.
1.
2.
3.
Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary
motor slide bases or rails. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for
pumps.
Structural Steel:
Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported
equipment.
Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation
mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15071-7
15025
B.
Inertia Base (Base Type C): Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails
ready for field-applied, cast-in-place concrete.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.06
Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary
motor slide bases or rails. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for
pumps.
Structural Steel:
Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported
equipment.
Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation
mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.
Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and
anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates
from supported equipment manufacturer.
SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
Loos & Co., Inc.; Cableware Technology Division.
Mason Industries, Inc.
TOLCO Incorporated.
Unistrut Diversified Products Co.; Wayne Manufacturing Division.
Vibro-Acoustics.
Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
Vibration Mountings & Controls/Korfund.
B.
Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: 1-piece, molded, bridge-bearing neoprene
complying with AASHTO M 251 and having a durometer of 50, plus or minus 5, with a
flat washer face.
C.
Seismic Snubbers (Restraint Type R): Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel
shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.
1.
2.
Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and studwedge or female-wedge type.
Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: 1-piece, molded, bridge-bearing
neoprene complying with AASHTO M 251 and having a durometer of 50, plus
or minus 5.
D.
Restraining Cables (Restraint Type C): Galvanized steel aircraft cables with end
connections made of steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two
clamping bolts for cable engagement.
E.
Anchor Bolts (Restraint Type C): Seismic-rated, drill-in. Select anchor bolts with
strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488/E 488M.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15071-8
15025
2.07
FACTORY FINISHES
A.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and tested equipment
before shipping.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Powder coating on springs and housings.
All hardware shall be electrogalvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components
for exterior use.
Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use.
Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to
indicate capacity range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices
for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance.
B.
Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual
locations before installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
3.03
EQUIPMENT BASES
A.
3.04
Install vibration-isolation and seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an
evaluation service member of ICC-ES providing required submittals for components.
Fill concrete inertia bases, after installing base frame, with 3000-psi concrete; trowel to a
smooth finish.
DUCT AND PIPE PENETRATION METHODS
A.
Isolate all ductwork and piping at walls and ceiling penetrations of mechanical rooms as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Provide a sheet metal (22 gauge) sleeve to cover the entire perimeter of a 1 inch
to 1-1/2 inch (1/2 inch to 3/4 inch on each side) oversized penetration cut.
Plaster or caulk sleeve to the wall, ceiling, or floor, to ensure an airtight seal.
If ductwork or piping penetrates a double wall, use a separate sleeve at each side
of the wall (allow no sleeve connection between walls).
Pack the gap between the penetrating duct or pipe and the sleeve with acoustical
insulation and seal airtight on both sides of the wall, floor, or ceiling with an
outer layer of acoustical sealant.
Do not use wall, floor, or ceiling penetrations to support ductwork or piping.
Support pipe or duct just prior to and just after the penetration, so that the pipe or
duct is centered in penetration
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15071-9
15025
B.
3.05
3.06
Use the above penetration treatment regardless of the existence of external duct or pipe
insulation. Size penetration large enough to pack additional acoustical insulation and
apply acoustical sealant between the external insulation and the sheet metal sleeve.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating
weight.
B.
Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating
height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of
contact during normal operation.
C.
Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement
during start and stop.
D.
Adjust active height of spring isolators.
E.
Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
F.
Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of
operation.
G.
Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written recommendations to
resist seismic forces.
CLEANING
A.
After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation and seismic-control
devices. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.
END OF SECTION 15071
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15071-10
15025
SECTION 15075 – MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their
installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.03
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each
identification material and device.
C.
Valve numbering scheme.
D.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted
copies) to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.05
Equipment markers.
Access panel and door markers.
Pipe markers.
Duct markers.
Valve tags.
Valve schedules.
Ceiling tack markers.
Ceiling grid markers.
ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, “Scheme for the Identification of
Piping Systems,” for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of
identification devices for piping.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting
of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
C.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A.
Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type,
permanent adhesive.
1.
2.
Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.
Data:
a.
Name and Plan number.
b.
Equipment service.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15075-1
15025
3.
B.
Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch thick, engraved laminated plastic, with
abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide two, 1/8-inch
holes for attachment.
1.
2.02
3.
4.
5.
Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary
for each application length.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Either full-band pipe
markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location or strip-type pipe
markers.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: Either full-band or
strip-type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for
label.
Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both
directions; or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
B.
Pretensioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semi rigid plastic formed to cover full
circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive.
C.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers:
adhesive back.
Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-
DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A.
Duct Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity
of airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact-type,
permanent adhesive.
VALVE TAGS
A.
Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with ¼-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and
½-inch numbers, with approved numbering scheme. Provide 5/32-inch hole for fastener.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.05
Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent
Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating
service, and showing direction of flow.
1.
2.
2.04
Fasteners:
adhesive.
PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A.
2.03
Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for equipment.
Material: 0.032-inch –thick brass.
Material: 3/32-inch-thick laminated plastic with 2 black surfaces and white inner
layer.
Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain.
Size: 1-1/2 inch diameter (minimum).
VALVE SCHEDULES
A.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve
number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve
(room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations
for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1.
Valve-Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on
masonry walls for each page of valve schedule. Include mounting screws.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15075-2
15025
2.
3.
2.06
CEILING TACK MARKERS
A.
2.07
Frame: Extruded aluminum
Glazing: Single-thickness glass.
Description: Steel with ¾-inch diameter color coded head.
CEILING GRID MARKERS
A.
Description: ¾-inch diameter, removable labels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
3.02
All identification shall use the room numbers assigned by the Owner. Obtain a list of
room numbers from the Owner’s Representative prior to preparing identification.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment.
1.
2.
B.
3.03
Letter Size: Minimum ½ inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and
proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances.
Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following
general categories of equipment.
a.
Meters, and similar units.
b.
Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters.
c.
Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven
units.
d.
Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units,
and similar equipment.
e.
Fans, blowers, mixing boxes, and terminal units.
f.
Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
g.
Tanks and pressure vessels.
h.
Water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.
Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.
PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with
flow indication arrows showing direction of flow.
1.
2.
3.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Pre-tensioned pipe
markers. Use size to ensure a tight fit.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Self-adhesive pipe
markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least ¾ inch wide,
lapped at least 1-1/2 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
circumference of pipe for strip-type pipe markers.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Self-adhesive pipe
markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches wide,
lapped at least 3 inches at both ends of pipe marker and covering full
circumference of pipe.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15075-3
15025
B.
Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces;
mechanical rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums;
and exterior non-concealed locations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
3.04
Non-potable water: Piping shall be designated with colored bands (Purple or as specified
by the authority having jurisdiction), and solid color continuous label "NON-POTABLERAINWATER," with adhesive bands wrapping the entire circumference every 5 feet.
DUCT IDENTIFICATON
A.
Install duct markers with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.05
Letter size: Minimum ½ inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately
larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Locate markers near points where ducts
enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where
ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.
Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves
within factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves;
faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices
and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a
valve schedule.
VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION
A.
3.07
Green: For cold-air supply ducts.
Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts.
Blue: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, and mixed-air ducts.
ASME A13.1 colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.
VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A.
3.06
Near each valve and control device.
Near each branch connection, excluding sort takeoffs for fixtures and terminal
units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run. Reduce intervals in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
Piping above removable acoustical ceilings.
Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room.
CEILING TACK MARKERS
A.
Install ceiling tack markers directly below the location of equipment to be identified.
Coordinate with Owner’s maintenance staff.
B.
Install ceiling tack markers at all locations of the following equipment and valves above
accessible ceilings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
HVAC equipment with filters: Yellow
Fire dampers/smoke dampers: Red
Plumbing valves: Green
Heating/cooling valves: Blue
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15075-4
15025
3.08
CEILING GRID MARKERS
A.
Install ceiling grid markers directly below the location of equipment and valves to be
identified. Coordinate with Owner’s maintenance staff.
B.
Install ceiling grid markers at all locations of the following equipment and valves above
accessible ceilings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.09
ADJUSTING
A.
3.10
HVAC equipment with filters: Yellow
Fire dampers/smoke dampers: Red
Plumbing valves: Green
Heating/cooling valves: Blue
Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually
blocked by other work.
CLEANING
A.
Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.
END OF SECTION 15075
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15075-5
15025
SECTION 15080 - MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes mechanical insulation systems for ductwork, , equipment, and
piping.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.03
1.04
1.05
Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
DEFINITIONS
A.
ASJ: All-service jacket.
B.
FSK: Foil, scrim, kraft paper.
C.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
D.
SSL: Self-sealing lap.
E.
Conditioned Space: A cooled, heated, or indirectly conditioned space within the insulated
building envelope.
F.
Unconditioned Space: A space that is not a Conditioned Space.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, identify thermal conductivity,
thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
B.
For adhesives, sealants and mastics: Documentation including printed statement of VOC
content.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per
ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, and
cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smokedeveloped index of 50 or less.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15080-1
15025
2.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.07
1.08
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smokedeveloped index of 150 or less.
Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with
appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application,
duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment
insulation application.
SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may
begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.
B.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each
area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
1.
2.02
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers specified.
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall
be applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content
of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the
manufacturing process.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15080-2
15025
F.
Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. Thermal
conductivity (k-value) not greater than 0.27 at 75 deg F mean temperature.
1.
G.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factoryapplied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "FactoryApplied Jackets" Article.
1.
H.
Products:
a.
CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.
b.
Johns Manville; Microlite.
c.
Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
d.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
e.
Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.
Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum
applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. For equipment
applications, provide insulation without jacket or with factory-applied ASJ. Factoryapplied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1.
I.
Products:
a.
Aeroflex USA Inc.
b.
Armacell LLC
c.
K-Flex USA.
Products:
a.
CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.
b.
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.
c.
Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.
d.
Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.
e.
Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.
f.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1.
2.
Products:
a.
E-Insulation.
b.
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
c.
Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
d.
Knauf Insulation; 1000 deg. Pipe Insulation.
e.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.
f.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJSSL. Thermal conductivity (k-value) not greater than 0.23 at 75 deg F mean
temperature. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2
"Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15080-3
15025
J.
Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with
ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to
ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity
(k-value) not greater than 0.27 at 75 deg F mean temperature. Factory-applied jacket
requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1.
2.03
FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS
A.
Fire-Rated Board: Structural-grade, press-molded, xonolite calcium silicate, fireproofing
board suitable for operating temperatures up to 1700 deg F. Comply with ASTM C 656,
Type II, Grade 6. UL tested and certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating.
1.
B.
2.05
Products:
a.
Johns Manville; Super Firetemp M.
Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that
is UL tested and certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating.
1.
2.04
Products:
a.
CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap.
b.
Johns Manville; MicroFlex.
c.
Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation.
d.
Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex.
e.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.
Products:
a.
CertainTeed Corp.; FlameChek.
b.
Johns Manville; Firetemp Wrap.
c.
Nelson Firestop Products; Nelson FSB Flameshield Blanket.
d.
Thermal Ceramics; FireMaster Duct Wrap.
e.
3M; Fire Barrier Wrap Products.
f.
Unifrax Corporation; FyreWrap.
g.
Vesuvius; PYROSCAT FP FASTR Duct Wrap.
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for
bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
VOC content of 100 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24).
MASTICS
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
B.
VOC content of 100 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24).
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15080-4
15025
C.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic:
ambient services.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
2.
3.
4.
Joint Sealants:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Fire and water resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
Color:
a.
White for ASJ and PVC.
b.
Aluminum for FSK and metal jackets.
VOC content of 100 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24).
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications.
When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.08
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film
thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F.
Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.
Color: White.
SEALANTS
A.
2.07
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry
film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
Color: White.
Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient
services.
1.
2.06
Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below
ASJ:
White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil
backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive
covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper
backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.
C.
PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354-C; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.
1.
2.
Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
Color: White.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15080-5
15025
3.
4.
D.
Metal Jacket:
1.
2.09
2.10
Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field
fabricate.
a.
Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves,
flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps and mechanical
joints.
Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.
Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H-14; sheet
and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.
a.
Finish and thickness: Stucco embossed; .016-inch thick minimum.
b.
Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded
polyethylene and kraft paper.
c.
Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded
polyethylene and kraft paper.
d.
Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
1)
Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
2)
Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting
covers are not available.
TAPES
A.
ASJ Tape: White vapor-barrier tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic
adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.
B.
FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-barrier tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic
adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.
C.
PVC Tape: White vapor-barrier tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic
adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
D.
Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-barrier tape with acrylic adhesive and UL listed.
SECUREMENTS
A.
Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1.
2.
3.
Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed
for capacitor-discharge welding, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, with
self-locking speed washer.
Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin,
fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, length to suit depth of insulation
indicated with integral galvanized carbon-steel washer.
Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate
welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness
indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place.
Comply with the following requirements:
a.
Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by
2 inches square.
b.
Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15080-6
15025
c.
4.
Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with
demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates
indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle
that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position
indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
a.
Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches
square.
b.
Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
c.
Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.
B.
Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or
Monel.
C.
Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.
D.
Bands: Stainless-steel or aluminum with wing seals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1.
2.
3.
3.02
3.03
Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free
of defects.
Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that
will adversely affect insulation application.
B.
Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even
surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping
including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or barriers, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in
insulation system schedules.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15080-7
15025
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service.
Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in
either wet or dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and
specialties.
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints
with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install insulation continuously through hangers, at supports and around anchor
attachments.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation
on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment
to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier
mastic.
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal
insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended
by insulation material manufacturer.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install
shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger,
support, and shield.
K.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and
wet and dry film thicknesses.
L.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as
insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples
along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive selfsealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 to 6
inches o.c.
a.
For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and
joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15080-8
15025
M.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its
nominal thickness.
N.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and
cracking due to thermal movement.
O.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches
similar to butt joints.
P.
Do not install insulation for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.04
Vibration-control devices.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
Nameplates and data plates.
Manholes.
Handholes.
Cleanouts.
Flexible connector hoses for hydronic coils.
PENETRATIONS
A.
Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof
penetrations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof
surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor
insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor
insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below
top of roof flashing.
Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B.
Insulation Installation at Below-Grade Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation
flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations:
continuously through wall penetrations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Install insulation
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall
surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor
insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor
insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall
flashing at least 2 inches.
Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation at Non-Rated Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install
insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15080-9
15025
E.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation
at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate
damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.
1.
F.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1.
2.
3.
3.05
Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" and Division 15 Section “Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods”.
Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire
rated. For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire
damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match
adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2
inches.
Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies according to Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" and Division 15 Section “Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods”.
FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
2.
D.
Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet
insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface
being insulated.
Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface
being insulated.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
2.
3.
Install reusable valve wrap or preformed valve covers manufactured of same
material as pipe insulation when available.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of
air to surface being insulated.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15080-10
15025
3.06
MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and
protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure
laps with outward clinched staples at 4 to 6 inches o.c.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not
staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended
by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and
flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other
specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-barrier integrity, unless otherwise
indicated.
Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation. Where preformed fitting
insulation is not commercially available, use mitered fittings made from same
material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted
tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation. Where preformed fitting
insulation is not commercially available, use sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to
fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond
pieces with adhesive.
Insulate valves using reusable valve wrap or preformed fitting insulation. Where
preformed fitting insulation is not commercially available, use sectional pipe
insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to
and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts.
Insulate strainers using reusable valve wrap or preformed fitting insulation.
Where preformed fitting insulation is not commercially available, use sectional
pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Insulate strainers so
strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without
damaging the insulation and jacket. For below ambient services, provide a design
that maintains vapor barrier.
Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe
insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible
elastomeric, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges,
and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining
insulation facing using PVC tape.
Install reusable valve wrap or removable insulating fabric fitting covers on
valves, elbows, tees, and flanges, strainers or other irregularly-shaped fittings or
components where fitted PVC covers are not practical or available.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15080-11
15025
C.
Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums:
insulation pins.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Secure with adhesive and
Where required or recommended by manufacturer, apply adhesives according to
recommended coverage rates per unit area for duct and plenum surfaces. Apply
adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,
capacitor-discharge-weld pins on bottom of rectangular or square ducts as
follows:
a.
On duct bottoms with dimensions 18-inches and larger, place pins spaced
3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 18-inches o.c. Install
additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
Apply insulation with edges tightly secured with staples at 6-inch maximum
spacing. Tape secured seam with 3-inch wide pressure-sensitive aluminum foil
tape or seal joints with two coats of vapor barrier mastic reinforced with one
layer of open weave glass fabric as recommended by manufacturer.
Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers. Cover exposed pins
and washers with tape matching insulation facing to maintain vapor barrier seal.
Insulation Installation on Equipment, Tank and Vessels: Secure insulation with adhesive
and insulation pins.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Where required or recommended by manufacturer, apply adhesives according to
recommended coverage rates per unit area of tank and vessel surfaces.
Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment,
including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight
joints. Stagger end joints.
Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers
on sides of tanks and vessels as follows:
a.
Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.
b.
Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service
temperature and with substrate.
c.
On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from
insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions.
d.
Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e.
Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of
tanks and vessels.
f.
Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.
g.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend
parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with
tape matching insulation facing.
Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select
band material compatible with insulation materials.
Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches.
Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,
handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and
inspection.
Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and
nameplates.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15080-12
15025
9.
10.
3.07
3.08
FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated or scheduled, secure system to ducts and
duct hangers and supports to maintain a continuous UL-listed fire rating.
B.
Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.
C.
Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are
specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" and Division 15
Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods”.
FINISHES
A.
Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket
Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 9
painting Sections.
1.
3.09
For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open
ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.
Install removable insulating fitting covers on equipment, tanks and vessels where
scheduled.
Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket
material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew
proof.
a.
Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B.
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats
of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C.
Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
D.
Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Indoor, supply and outdoor air.
Indoor, conditioned ventilation supply air from energy recovery units.
Indoor, exhaust/relief air from energy recovery units to discharge louver or
termination.
Outdoor, supply and return.
Items Not Insulated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Fibrous-glass ducts.
Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code
and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
Indoor, exposed ducts specifically indicated not to be insulated.
Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
Flexible connectors.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15080-13
15025
7.
8.
3.10
Vibration-control devices.
Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A.
If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor’s option.
B.
Service: Supply-air ducts, within conditioned space.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Service: Conditioned Ventilation Supply-air from energy recovery units, within
conditioned space.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Material: Mineral-Fiber Board or Mineral-Fiber Blanket.
Minimum R-value: R-7.
Field-Applied Jacket: None.
Vapor Barrier Required: Yes.
Service: Boiler Combustion Air Intake Ducts.
1.
2.
3.
4.
H.
Material: Mineral-Fiber Board or Mineral-Fiber Blanket.
Minimum R-value: R-7.
Field-Applied Jacket: None.
Vapor Barrier Required: Yes.
Service: Supply-air, Return-air, Conditioned Ventilation Supply-air ducts from energy
recovery units, and Exhaust/Relief-air ducts from energy recovery units, not in
conditioned space.
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Material: Mineral-Fiber Board or Mineral-Fiber Blanket.
Minimum R-value: R-3.3.
Field-Applied Jacket: None.
Vapor Barrier Required: Yes
Service: Outside-air ducts, within conditioned space from penetration of building
exterior to automatic shut-off damper in duct or at HVAC unit.
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Material: Mineral-Fiber Board or Mineral-Fiber Blanket.
Minimum R-value: R-3.3.
Field-Applied Jacket: None.
Vapor Barrier Required: Yes.
Service: Exhaust/Relief-air from energy recovery units to discharge louver or
termination, within conditioned space.
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Material: Mineral-Fiber Board or Mineral-Fiber Blanket.
Minimum R-value: R-3.3.
Field-Applied Jacket: None.
Vapor Barrier Required: Yes.
Material: Mineral-Fiber Blanket.
Minimum R-value: R-3.3.
Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum.
Vapor Barrier Required: Yes.
Service: Type I Grease Hood ducts.
1.
2.
Material: Fire-Rated Insulation System (2-hour rating).
Minimum R-value: N/A.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15080-14
15025
3.
4.
3.11
EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
Insulate indoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated. If more than
one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor’s option.
B.
Domestic hot-water storage tank:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.12
Operating Temperature: 55 to 180 deg. F
Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches thick.
Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum.
Vapor Barrier Required: None.
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Items Not Insulated:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.13
Field-Applied Jacket: None.
Vapor Barrier Required: None.
Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the
Fire-suppression piping.
Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
Below-grade piping.
Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is
Contractor’s option.
B.
Pipe insulation to be in accordance with the 2009 IECC, or the following schedule,
whichever is more stringent.
C.
Service: Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Operating Temperature: 60 to 140 deg F.
Insulation Material: Mineral-Fiber.
Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a.
Pipe, 1-1/4 inch and less: 1.0 inch
b.
Pipe, 1-1/2 inch and larger: 1.5 inch
Field-Applied Jacket: PVC for piping exposed in public spaces to 9 feet above
floor level.
Vapor Barrier Required: None.
Service: Domestic Cold Water.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Operating Temperature: 35 to 60 deg F.
Insulation Material: Mineral-Fiber.
Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a.
Pipe, 1-1/4 inch and less: 1.0 inch
b.
Pipe, 1-1/2 inch and larger: 1.5 inch
Field-Applied Jacket: PVC for piping exposed in public spaces to 9 feet above
floor level.
Vapor Barrier Required: Yes.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15080-15
15025
E.
Service: Non-Potable Rainwater.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Service: Storm Drainage (Rainwater) and Overflow Conductors.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Operating Temperature: 32 to 100 deg F.
Insulation Material: Mineral-Fiber.
Insulation Thickness: 1.0 inch
Vapor Barrier Required: Yes.
Service: Refrigerant Suction, liquid.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.14
Operating Temperature: 32 to 100 deg F.
Insulation Material: Mineral-Fiber.
Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a.
All pipe sizes: 1.0 inch
Field-Applied Jacket: PVC for piping exposed in public spaces to 9 feet above
floor level.
Vapor Barrier Required: Yes.
Service: Roof Drain Bodies.
1.
2.
3.
4.
H.
Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F.
Insulation Material: Mineral-Fiber.
Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a.
Pipe, 1-1/2 inch and less: 0.5 inch
b.
Pipe, 1-1/2 inch and larger: 1.0 inch
Field-Applied Jacket: PVC for piping exposed in public spaces to 9 feet above
floor level.
Vapor Barrier Required: Yes.
Operating Temperature: 35 to 50 deg F.
Insulation Material: Flexible Elastomeric.
Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a.
All pipe sizes: 0.5 inch
Field-Applied Jacket: None.
OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is
Contractor’s option.
B.
Service: Domestic Cold Water.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Operating Temperature: 105 deg F or greater.
Insulation Material: Mineral-Fiber or Flexible Elastomeric.
Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a.
Pipe, 1-1/4 inch and less: 1.0 inch
b.
Pipe, 1-1/2 inch and larger: 1.5 inch
Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum.
Vapor Barrier Required: Yes.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15080-16
15025
C.
Service: Refrigerant Suction, Liquid.
1.
2.
3.
Operating Temperature: 35 to 50 deg F.
Insulation Material: Flexible Elastomeric.
Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a.
All pipe sizes: 0.5 inch
b.
Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum.
c.
Vapor Barrier Required: None.
END OF SECTION 15080
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15080-17
15025
SECTION 15110 - VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following general-duty valves:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.03
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags and charts.
Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control valves
and actuators.
Division 15 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections
only.
DEFINITIONS
A.
The following are standard abbreviations for valves:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.04
Ball valves.
Butterfly valves.
Swing check valves.
Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.
Gate valves.
Globe valves.
WOG: Non-shock Water-Oil-Gas working pressure rating, psig.
SWP: Steam working pressure rating, psig.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.
TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.
NRS: Non-rising stem.
RS: Rising stem.
OS&Y: Outside stem and yoke.
MSS: Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry.
PPS: Polyphenylene sulfide.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim
materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections;
arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances.
B.
Maintenance Data: For each type of valve indicated to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15110-1
15025
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
ASME Compliance: ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
B.
ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10.
C.
ASME Compliance for Bronze Valves: ASME B16.24.
D.
MSS Compliance:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
SP-67: Butterfly Valves.
SP-70: Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
SP-71: Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
SP-80: Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.
SP-85: Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
SP-110: Ball Valves, Threaded and Solder Joint Ends.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.02
Anvil International.
Conbraco/Apollo Industries
Hammond Valve
Milwaukee Valve Company
NIBCO, Inc.
Stockham
Tyco/Grinnell
Victaulic Company of America
Viega
VALVES, GENERAL
A.
Valve Type/Manufacturer: Valves of same type shall be of same manufacturer.
B.
Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.
C.
Bronze or Brass Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded or solder-joint ends, unless
otherwise indicated.
D.
Iron Valves: NPS 2-1/2 and larger with flanged ends or grooved ends, unless otherwise
indicated.
E.
Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for
system pressures and temperatures.
F.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15110-2
15025
G.
Valve Actuators:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.03
H.
Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.
I.
Valve Flanges: ASME B16.10 for iron valves; ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.
J.
Valve Grooved Ends: ASME/AWWA C606.
BRONZE BALL VALVES
A.
Bronze Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.
B.
Two-Piece Ball Valves: Bronze body with full port, hard chrome-plated solid brass or
bronze ball, reinforced TFE seats and PTFE packing, adjustable packing nut, blowoutproof brass stem, threaded or solder ends; 150 SWP/600 WOG.
1.
C.
A.
Brass Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.
B.
Two-Piece Ball Valves: Forged brass body with full port, hard chrome-plated solid
brass or bronze ball, reinforced TFE seats and PTFE packing, adjustable packing nut,
blowout-proof brass stem, threaded or solder ends; 150 SWP/600 WOG.
Milwaukee BA-475B/BA-485B, or equal.
PRESSURE-SEAL BRONZE BALL VALVES
A.
Two-Piece Ball Valves: Bronze body with full port, chrome-plated brass ball and stem,
PFTE seats, blowout-proof stem, pressure-seal ends; 600 WOG for sizes NPS 2 and
smaller.
1.
2.06
Milwaukee BA-400S, or equal.
BRASS BALL VALVES
1.
2.05
Milwaukee BA-400/BA-450, or equal.
Two-Piece Ball Valves: Bronze body with full port, 316 stainless steel solid ball,
reinforced TFE seats (15% glass filled) and PTFE packing, adjustable packing nut,
blowout-proof 316 stainless steel stem, threaded ends; 150 SWP/600 WOG.
1.
2.04
Chainwheel: For attachment to valves, of size and mounting height, as indicated
in the "Valve Installation" Article in Part 3.
Gear Drive: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger.
Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller.
Viega Pro-Press Series.
DUCTILE IRON BODY BUTTERFLY VALVES
A.
Iron Body Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP-67, bubble tight seal with lug (flanged)
body type.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15110-3
15025
B.
Butterfly Valves: Cast iron body, aluminum bronze disc, 416 stainless steel two-piece
stem design, field replaceable hard phenolic backed EPDM liner, non-metallic stem
journal, blowout-proof stem, extended neck for 2 inch insulation, 10-position lever-lock
handle with memory position plate for sizes NPS 6 and Smaller, lug body type; 200
WOG.
1.
C.
Grooved-End, Butterfly Valves: ASTM A 536 ductile iron body, electroless nickel
coated or EPDM encapsulated ductile iron disc, EPDM seat with full continuous contact,
EPDM stem seals, stainless-steel stem, 10-position lever-lock handle or gear operator;
230 deg F. maximum service temperature, 300 WOG.
1.
2.
3.
2.07
Grooved-End, Non-Ferrous Butterfly Valve: 300 CWP rating, cast bronze body,
elastomer encapsulated ductile iron disc, with grooved ends manufactured to copper-tube
dimensions.
1.
2.
Anvil “Gruvlok” 7721 Series.
Victaulic Series 608.
BRONZE CHECK VALVES
A.
Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP-80.
B.
Horizontal Swing Check Valves: Bronze body, threaded cap, bronze or TFE disc,
integral bronze seats, threaded or solder ends; 125 SWP/200 WOG.
1.
C.
D.
Milwaukee 509/1509, or equal.
Horizontal Swing Check Valves: Bronze body, threaded cap, TFE disc, integral bronze
seats, threaded or solder ends; 150 SWP/300 WOG.
1.
Milwaukee 510-T/1510-T, or equal.
Horizontal Swing Check Valves: “Y” pattern swing, bronze body, threaded cap,
regrindable bronze disc, stainless steel hinge pins, integral bronze seats, threaded ends;
200 SWP.
1.
2.09
Anvil “Gruvlok” 7700 Series
Tyco/Grinnell B302 Series
Victaulic 761 Series, VIC-300 “Master-Seal”
GROOVED NON-FERROUS ALLOY BUTTERFLY VALVES
A.
2.08
Milwaukee ML Series, or equal.
Milwaukee 508, or equal.
IRON BODY SWING CHECK VALVES
A.
Iron Body Swing Check Valves, General: MSS SP-71.
B.
Horizontal Swing Check Valves: Cast iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, bronze or
cast iron disc, bronze seat ring, flanged ends; 125 SWP/200 WOG.
1.
Milwaukee F2974, or equal.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15110-4
15025
C.
Horizontal Swing Check Valves: ASTM A216 Grade WCB cast carbon steel body,
bolted cover, 13% chrome disc, flanged ends, API 598; 150 SWP.
1.
2.10
SPRING-LOADED, LIFT-DISC CHECK VALVES
A.
Bronze Spring-Loaded Lift-Disc Check Valves: Bronze body, non-slam, in-line spring
lift check, TFE disc, bronze or TFE seat, bronze or stainless steel spring, threaded or
solder ends; 250 WOG.
1.
B.
C.
Milwaukee 1400, or equal.
Ductile Iron Spring-Assisted, Check Valves: Grooved style, non-slam, ductile iron body,
aluminum bronze or elastomer encapsulated ductile iron disc, stainless steel spring and
shaft; 300 CWP.
1.
Victaulic Series 716.
BRONZE GATE VALVES
A.
Bronze Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-80.
B.
Gate Valves: Bronze body, threaded bonnet, rising stem, malleable iron handwheel, solid
bronze wedge, non-asbestos packing, gland follower, threaded or solder ends; 125
SWP/200 WOG.
1.
C.
D.
Milwaukee 148/149, or equal.
Gate Valves: Bronze body, union bonnet, rising stem, malleable iron handwheel, solid
bronze wedge, non-asbestos packing, gland follower, threaded or solder ends; 150
SWP/300 WOG.
1.
Milwaukee 1151/1169, or equal.
Gate Valves: Bronze body, union bonnet, rising stem, malleable iron handwheel, solid
bronze wedge, stainless steel seat rings, non-asbestos packing, gland follower, threaded
ends; 200 SWP.
1.
2.12
Milwaukee 548T/1548T, or equal.
Iron Body Compact-Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves: Wafer (flangeless) style, non-slam,
cast iron body, bronze trim and disc, center guided, stainless steel springs and screws;
125 SWP/200 WOG.
1.
2.11
Milwaukee 1570, or equal.
Milwaukee 1174, or equal
BRONZE GLOBE VALVES
A.
Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-80.
B.
Globe Valves: Bronze body, threaded bonnet, rising stem, malleable iron handwheel,
bronze disc and seat, non-asbestos packing, gland follower, threaded or solder ends; 125
SWP/200 WOG.
1.
Milwaukee 502/1502, or equal.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15110-5
15025
C.
Globe Valves: Bronze body, union bonnet, rising stem, malleable iron handwheel, TFE
disc, integral bronze seat, non-asbestos packing, gland follower, threaded or solder ends;
150 SWP/300 WOG.
1.
D.
Milwaukee 590-T/1590-T, or equal.
Globe Valves: Bronze body, union bonnet, rising stem, malleable iron handwheel,
stainless steel plug disc and seat, non-asbestos packing, threaded ends; 200 SWP.
1.
Milwaukee 592A, or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance.
1.
3.02
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
B.
Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion.
Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during
shipping and handling.
C.
Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats
made accessible by such operations.
D.
Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E.
Examine grooved ends for conditions that might cause leakage. Ends should be free from
indentations or projections in the area from valve end to groove.
F.
Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material
composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
G.
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not
indicated, use the following:
1.
2.
3.
Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly or gate valves.
Throttling Service: Ball, globe valves.
Pump Discharge: Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.
B.
If valves with specified SWP or WOG ratings are not available, the same types of valves
with higher SWP or WOG ratings may be substituted.
C.
CHILLED-WATER, CONDENSER WATER, AND HOT WATER HEATING PIPING:
Use the following types of valves:
1.
2.
Bronze Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: 600 WOG.
Brass Ball Valves, NPS 3 and Smaller: 600 WOG.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15110-6
15025
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
D.
COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING: Use the following types of valves:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Bronze Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: 600 WOG.
Equipment-Isolation Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Safety-exhaust.
Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: 150 SWP/300 WOG, bronze body,
TFE disc.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING: Use the following types of valves:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
3.03
Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 200 WOG, ductile iron body.
Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 300 WOG, ductile iron body, groovedends.
Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: 150 SWP/300 WOG, bronze body.
Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 125 SWP/200 WOG, bronze trim,
iron body.
Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: 250 WOG, bronze
body.
Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 125 SWP/200
WOG, wafer style, bronze trim, iron body.
Spring-Assisted, Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 300 CWP, grooved end
style, stainless steel trim, ductile iron body.
Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: 150 SWP/300 WOG, bronze body.
Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 125 SWP/200 WOG, bronze trim, iron
body.
Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: 150 SWP/300 WOG, bronze body.
Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 125 SWP/300 WOG, bronze trim, iron
body.
Bronze Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: 600 WOG.
Brass Ball Valves, NPS 3 and Smaller: 600 WOG.
Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: 300 WOG, cast bronze body.
Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: 125 SWP/200 WOG, bronze body.
Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 125 SWP/200 WOG, bronze trim,
iron body.
Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: 250 WOG, bronze
body.
Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 125 SWP/200
WOG, wafer style, bronze trim, iron body.
Spring-Assisted, Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 300 CWP, grooved end
style, stainless steel trim, ductile iron body.
Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: 125 SWP/200 WOG, bronze body.
Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 125 SWP/200 WOG, bronze trim, iron
body.
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15110-7
15025
D.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
E.
Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1.
2.
3.04
3.05
Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.
Compact-Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position,
between flanges.
F.
Install union adjacent to each threaded end valve on the downstream side, and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
G.
Install flanges adjacent to flanged valves and at final connections to each piece of
equipment.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
joint construction.
B.
Pressure-Seal Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure.
insertion marks on pipe after assembly.
C.
Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and
bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. . All grooved
couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be of the same manufacturer. Grooving
tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components. Grooved ends shall
be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end
to groove. Grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained field representative shall
provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the proper use of grooving
tools, application of groove, and installation of grooved piping products. Factory trained
representative shall periodically inspect the product installation. Contractor shall remove
and replace any improperly installed products.
Leave
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service
but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
END OF SECTION 15110
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15110-8
15025
SECTION 15122 - METERS AND GAGES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following meters and gages for mechanical systems:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.03
Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for domestic and fire-protection water
service meters outside the building.
Division 2 Section "Natural Gas Distribution" for gas meters outside the
building.
Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for domestic and fire-protection
water service meters inside the building.
Division 15 Section “Hydronic Piping” for calibrated balancing valves,
flowmeters and automatic flow-control valves.
Division 15 Section "Steam and Condensate Piping" for steam and condensate
meters.
Division 15 Section "Fuel Gas Piping" for gas meters inside the building.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
Thermometers.
Gages.
Test plugs.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
1.
2.02
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers listed.
LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Marsh Bellofram.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15122-1
15025
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.03
B.
Case: Plastic or die-cast aluminum, 9 inches long.
C.
Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled, with magnifying lens.
D.
Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale
markings.
E.
Window: Glass or plastic.
F.
Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal
plane, with locking device.
G.
Stem: Metal, for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.
H.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to
maximum of 1.5 percent of range.
THERMOWELLS
A.
Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used.
B.
Description: Fitting with protective socket for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold
fixed thermometer stem.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.04
MILJOCO Corporation.
Tel-Tru.
Trerice, H. O. Co.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
Winters Instruments.
Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.
Material: Steel, for use in steel piping.
Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2 inches, but not less than
thickness of insulation. Omit extension neck for sockets for piping not insulated.
Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe, minimum insertion length 2-1/2
inches.
PRESSURE GAGES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div.
Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
Marsh Bellofram.
MILJOCO Corporation.
Tel-Tru.
Trerice, H. O. Co.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
WIKA Instrument Corporation.
Winters Instruments.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15122-2
15025
B.
Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:
ASME B40.100.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
C.
Case: Dry type, cast aluminum, 4-1/2-inch diameter.
Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type
is indicated.
Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale
markings.
Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal.
Window: Glass.
Ring: Stainless steel.
Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale.
Vacuum-Pressure Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure.
Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.
Pressure-Gage Fittings:
1.
2.
3.
2.05
Indicating-dial type complying with
Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless-steel needle type.
Syphons: NPS 1/4 coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.
Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion-resistant,
porous-metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
TEST PLUGS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Flow Design, Inc.
MG Piping Products Co.
Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.
Sisco Manufacturing Co.
Trerice, H. O. Co.
B.
Description: Corrosion-resistant brass or stainless-steel body with core inserts and
gasketed and threaded cap, with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated
piping.
C.
Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.
D.
Core Inserts: Two self-sealing rubber valves.
1.
2.
E.
Insert material for air, water, oil, or gas service at 20 to 200 deg F shall be
chlorosulfonated synthetic rubber.
Insert material for air or water service at minus 30 to plus 275 deg F shall be
EPDM.
Test Kit: Furnish one test kit containing one pressure gage and adaptor, two
thermometers, and carrying case. Pressure gage, adapter probes, and thermometer
sensing elements shall be of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15122-3
15025
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS
A.
Install liquid-in-glass thermometers in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.02
Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 180 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
Heating Hot Water: 30 to 240 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
Condenser Water: 0 to 160 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
Chilled Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
Steam and Condensate: 30 to 300 deg F, with 5-degree scale divisions.
GAGE APPLICATIONS
A.
Install dry-case-type pressure gages in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.03
Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller.
Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central
systems.
Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.
Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat-recovery unit.
Inlet and outlet of each thermal storage tank.
Outlet of each water heater.
Where indicated on Drawings.
Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.
Chilled- and condenser-water inlets and outlets of chillers.
Building water-service entrance.
Suction and discharge of each hydronic pump.
INSTALLATIONS
A.
Install direct-mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B.
Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid or to center
of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated. Install
utilizing thermal conductive paste or other approved material.
C.
Install direct-mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe
at most readable position.
D.
Install needle-valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except
steam).
E.
Install needle-valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam.
F.
Provide test plugs at the following locations whether indicated on plans or not:
1.
Adjacent to all gauges, temperature or pressure sensors, and thermometers. If
instruments/ sensors are grouped, one test plug will suffice if provided in a
common location.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15122-4
15025
2.
3.
4.
G.
3.04
Install flow indicators, in accessible positions for easy viewing, in piping systems.
CONNECTIONS
A.
3.05
Adjacent to the supply and discharge of all pumps and manual flow control
devices.
At the inlet and outlet sides of all hydronic coils. Test plugs supplied with
combination-duty type valves or as an integral component are acceptable
substitutes for applications.
Adjacent to each temperature control sensor thermowell.
Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance for meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
END OF SECTION 15122
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15122-5
15025
SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes domestic water piping inside the building.
B.
Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company.
C.
Water meters will be furnished by utility company for installation by Contractor.
D.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.03
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems
with the following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
1.04
1.05
Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, pressure gages, and
fittings.
Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for water distribution
piping specialties.
Domestic Water Service Piping: 160 psig.
Domestic Water Distribution Piping: 125 psig.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B.
Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article in Part 3.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B.
Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15140-1
15025
2.02
B.
Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured
fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with,
piping to be joined.
C.
Transition Couplings for Underground Pressure Piping: AWWA C219, metal, sleevetype coupling or other manufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least
equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L, water tube, drawn temper.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.03
Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22,
wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings.
Furnish wrought-copper fittings if
indicated.
Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish
Class 300 flanges if required to match piping.
Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with
ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded
ends.
Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22,
wrought- copper, solder-joint fittings.
Copper Pressure-Seal Fittings and Ball Valves: ASME B16.18, cast-copperalloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper fittings with EPDM O-rings, inboard
bead design, compression crimp on both sides of the seal bead, minimum 200psig working-pressure rating at 250 deg F; 600 WOG bronze body, two-piece,
full-port ball valves with pressure-seal ends.
a.
Manufacturers:
1)
Nibco
2)
Viega
Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish
Class 300 flanges if required to match piping.
Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with
ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded
ends.
Copper, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze
castings.
VALVES
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for bronze and cast-iron, general-duty valves.
B.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing and
drain valves.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15140-2
15025
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXCAVATION
A.
3.02
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for excavating,
trenching, and backfilling.
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be
used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Grooved joints may be used on aboveground grooved-end piping.
D.
Fitting Option: Mechanically formed tee-branch outlets and brazed joints may be used
on aboveground copper tubing.
E.
Pipe Bending Option: Pipe bending of Types K and L copper tube permitted when bends
are made with no kinks, ripples, distortions or reductions in diameter or any noticeable
deviations from round. Minimum radius shall be 6 pipe diameters for pipe NPS 2 and
smaller, and 5 pipe diameters for pipe NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
F.
Underground Domestic Water Service Piping: Use the following piping materials for
each size range:
1.
2.
G.
Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for
each size range:
1.
2.
3.
3.03
NPS 2 and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type K; copper pressure fittings; and
brazed joints.
NPS 3 and NPS 4: Hard copper tube, Type K; copper pressure fittings; and
brazed joints.
NPS 4 and Smaller: Hard copper tube,Type L; copper pressure-seal joints and
ball valves.
NPS 4 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and
soldered joints.
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: Hard copper tube, Type L; with grooved ends; copper
grooved-end fittings.
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated,
the following requirements apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Shutoff Duty: Use ball, butterfly or gate valves.
Throttling Duty: Use ball, butterfly or globe valves.
Hot-Water-Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.
Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
Cast-bronze, grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15140-3
15025
C.
3.04
Bronze, pressure-seal end valves may be used with pressure-seal piping.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B.
Extend domestic water service piping to exterior water distribution piping in sizes and
locations indicated.
C.
Install copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
D.
Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall.
Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods" for wall penetration systems.
E.
Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,
inside building at each domestic water service. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and
Gages" for pressure gages, and to Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping
Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.
F.
Install water-pressure regulators downstream from shutoff valves. Refer to Division 15
Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for water-pressure regulators.
G.
Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility
company's requirements.
H.
Install aboveground domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.
I.
Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that
piping is full of water.
J.
Perform the following steps before operation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
Open throttling valves to proper setting.
Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing
of piping during installation.
Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
K.
Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do
not operate water heaters before filling with water.
L.
Check Domestic Water Piping Specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and
operation.
1.
M.
Water-Pressure Regulators: Set outlet pressure at 80 psig maximum, unless
otherwise indicated.
Energize pumps and verify proper operation.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15140-4
15025
3.05
3.06
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
joint construction.
B.
Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin
antimony solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Pressure-Seal Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure.
insertion marks on pipe after assembly.
D.
Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed-coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and
bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Mechanically Formed Outlets: Form tee in copper tube according to equipment
manufacturer's written instructions. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole,
form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar.
F.
PEX Piping Joints: Join according to ASTM F 1807.
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install sectional valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing
fixtures or equipment.
B.
Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment and on each water supply to
plumbing fixtures without supply stops.
C.
Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal
piping, and where required to drain water piping.
1.
2.
D.
3.07
Leave
Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.
Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and
discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open
to restrict but not stop flow. Refer to Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping
Specialties" for calibrated balancing valves.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support
devices.
B.
Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
C.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D.
Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15140-5
15025
E.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.08
F.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
G.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect domestic water piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to
join dissimilar piping materials.
D.
Connect domestic water piping to service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and
connect to the following:
1.
2.
3.
3.09
NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.
Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing
Fixtures."
Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union or flange for each
connection.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect domestic water piping as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of
authorities having jurisdiction:
a.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before
concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b.
Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having
jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance
with requirements.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test
or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15140-6
15025
B.
Test domestic water piping as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.10
ADJUSTING
A.
3.11
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have
been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit
separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic
water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was
covered or concealed before it was tested.
Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate
test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure
constitute defects that must be repaired.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof
until satisfactory results are obtained.
Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.
CLEANING
A.
Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1.
2.
Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired before using.
Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having
jurisdiction or, if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either
AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described below:
a.
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not
appear at outlets.
b.
Fill and isolate system according to the following:
1)
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at
least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand
for 24 hours.
c.
Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water
coming from system after the standing time.
d.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.
Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
B.
Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
C.
Clean interior of domestic water piping system.
progresses.
Remove dirt and debris as work
END OF SECTION 15140
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15140-7
15025
SECTION 15145- DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.03
Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
1.05
Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, and pressure gages.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.04
Backflow preventers
Water regulators
Balancing valves
Compact Circulators
Thermostatic water mixing valves
Water tempering equipment for emergency plumbing fixtures
Strainers
Outlet boxes
Key-operation hydrants
Trap seal primer valves
Drain valves
Miscellaneous piping specialties
Domestic Water Piping: 125 psig.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B.
NSF Compliance:
1.
Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for
plastic domestic water piping components.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15145-1
15025
2.
1.06
Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,
Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water piping specialties.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
Operating Key Handles: Equal to 100 percent of amount installed for each keyoperated hose bibb and hydrant installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1.
2.02
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
the manufacturers listed.
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Ames Co., Inc.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
Febco Backflow Preventers.
Watts Industries, Inc.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
General: ASSE standard, backflow preventers.
1.
2.
3.
4.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, or stainless-steel body with flanged
ends.
Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
Strainer: On inlet.
C.
Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with nonremovable and
manual drain features, and ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet. Units attached
to rough-bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze.
D.
Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1013, suitable for continuous
pressure application. Include shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; test
cocks; and pressure-differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air-gap fitting located
between two positive-seating check valves. Stainless steel construction for water supply
serving carbonated water beverage systems.
1.
2.
3.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Quarter-turn, full-port ball valves.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside screw and yoke (OS&Y) gate valves.
Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15145-2
15025
E.
Double-Check Backflow Prevention Assemblies: ASSE 1015, suitable for continuous
pressure application. Include shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; test
cocks; and two positive-seating check valves.
1.
2.
3.
2.03
WATER REGULATORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
Watts Industries, Inc.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
General: ASSE 1003, water regulators, rated for initial working pressure of 150 psig
minimum. Include integral factory-installed or separate field-installed, Y-pattern strainer.
1.
2.
3.
2.04
NPS 2 and Smaller: Quarter-turn, full-port ball valves.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside screw and yoke (OS&Y) gate valves.
Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
a.
General-Duty Service: Single-seated, direct operated, unless otherwise
indicated.
b.
Booster Heater Water Supply: Single-seated, direct operated with
integral bypass.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Bronze or cast-iron body with flanged ends. Include
AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, interior epoxy coating for regulators with castiron body.
a.
Type: Single-seated, direct operated.
Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
BALANCING VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
Flow Design, Inc.
Bell & Gossett
Hays Fluid Control Div.
Taco, Inc.
Tour & Andersson, Inc.
Watts Industries, Inc.
Calibrated Balancing Valves: Adjustable, with two readout ports and memory setting
indicator.
1.
2.
3.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with brass ball, adjustment knob, calibrated
nameplate, and threaded or solder-joint ends.
For recirculation system applications with water flows 1.5 GPM or less: Use NPS
½ valve.
For recirculation system applications with water flows 0.5 GPM or less: Use NPS
½ valve specifically designed for accurate low flow control.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15145-3
15025
2.05
COMPACT CIRCULATORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Description: Horizontal, in-line, replaceable-cartridge-design circulator; rated for 125psig minimum working pressure and minimum continuous water temperature of 225
deg F. Bronze or stainless steel body.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.06
Pump and Motor Assembly: On common shaft in hermetically sealed unit
without stuffing box or mechanical seal, and with manufacturer's standard
cooling and lubrication system.
Impeller: Corrosion-resistant material.
End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. Pumps available only with
flanged ends may be furnished with threaded companion flanges.
Motor: Single speed, unless otherwise indicated.
STRAINERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
Mueller Steam Specialty
Nibco.
Spirax Sarco, Inc.
Victaulic Company of America.
Watts Industries, Inc.
Strainers: Y-pattern, unless otherwise indicated, and full size of connecting piping.
Include ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel screens .
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.07
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
Grundfos Pumps Corp.
Bell & Gossett
Taco, Inc.
WILO-USA.
Pressure Rating: 125-psig minimum steam working pressure, unless otherwise
indicated.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body, with female threaded ends; 20 mesh, 0.033inch openings.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron body, ANSI 125 flanged ends; 20 mesh, 0.033inch openings for steam and water service to NPS 3; 0.045-inch perforations for
steam service NPS 4 to NPS 6; 0.062-inch perforations for steam service NPS 8
and larger; 0.125-inch perforations for water service NPS 4 and larger.
Y-Pattern Strainers: Screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown.
a.
Drain: Factory- or field-installed, hose-end drain valve.
OUTLET BOXES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Acorn Engineering Company.
Guy GrayManufacturing Co., Inc.
IPS Corporation.
LSP Products Group.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15145-4
15025
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
General: Recessed-mounting outlet boxes with supply fittings complying with
ASME A112.18.1M. Include box with faceplate, services indicated for equipment
connections.
C.
Clothes Washer Outlet Boxes: With hot- and cold-water hose connections, drain, and the
following:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Box and Faceplate: [Stainless steel] [Enameled or epoxy-painted steel].
Shutoff Fitting[s]: [Two hose bibbs] [Combination, single lever].
Drain: NPS 2 standpipe, P-trap, and direct waste connection to drainage piping.
Icemaker Outlet Boxes: With hose connection and the following:
1.
2.
2.08
Oatey.
Plastic Oddities, Inc.
Sioux Chief Mfg. Co.
Symmons Industries, Inc.
Zurn Industries, Inc.
Box and Faceplate: [Stainless steel] [Enameled or epoxy-painted steel].
Shutoff Fitting: 1/2 inch FIP inlet compression angle valve.
KEY-OPERATION HYDRANTS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
General: ASME A112.21.3M, key-operation hydrant with pressure rating of 125 psig.
1.
2.
C.
Inlet: NPS 3/4 threaded or solder joint.
Outlet: ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads.
Non-freeze Exposed-Outlet Wall Hydrants: ASSE 1019, self-drainable with integral nonremovable hose-connection vacuum breaker or backflow preventer, casing and operating
rod to match wall thickness, projecting outlet, wall plate and wall clamp.
1.
2.
D.
Acorn Engineering.
Josam Co.
MIFAB
Prier Brass
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
Watts Industries, Inc.
Woodford Manufacturing Co.
Zurn Industries, Inc.
Nozzle Finish:Polished nickel bronze.
Wall Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze or stainless steel.
Non-freeze Concealed-Outlet Wall Hydrants: ASSE 1019, self-drainable with flushmounting box with locking cover, integral non-removable hose-connection vacuum
breaker , casing and operating rod to match wall thickness, concealed outlet, wall clamp,
“Water” stamped on cover.
1.
Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze or stainless steel.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15145-5
15025
E.
Hot and Cold, Non-freeze Concealed-Outlet Wall Hydrants: With deep flush-mounting
box with locking cover; hot- and cold-water casings and operating rods to match wall
thickness; concealed outlet; wall clamps; factory- or field-installed, non-removable and
manual drain-type, hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011,
“Water” stamped on cover.
1.
F.
Single Temperature, Recessed Hose Box: Recessed hose box with wall flange; 18 gauge
stainless steel box, 16 gauge stainless steel hinged removable door with cylinder lock;
cartridge operated cold valve with 3/4-inch NPT female supply connection; loose-key
vandal-resistant wheel handle; screwdriver stop; atmospheric type vacuum breaker
complying with ASSE 1011. Provide engraved plastic nameplate “Water” affixed to
cover.
1.
G.
Box and Cover Finish: Satin finish.
Hot and Cold, Recessed Hose Box: Recessed hose box with wall flange; 18 gauge
stainless steel box, 16 gauge stainless steel hinged removable door with cylinder lock;
cartridge operated hot and cold water valves with 3/4-inch NPT female supply
connections; loose-key vandal-resistant wheel handles; screwdriver stops; atmospheric
type vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011. Provide engraved plastic nameplate
“Water” affixed to cover.
1.
2.09
Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze or stainless steel.
Box and Cover Finish: Satin finish.
TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES
A.
Supply-Type Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE 1018, water-supply-fed type, with the
following characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Manufacturers:
a.
Josam Co.
b.
MIFAB
c.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
d.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
e.
Sioux Chief Mfg. Co.
f.
Watts Industries, Inc.
125-psig minimum working pressure.
Field serviceable.
Bronze body with atmospheric-vented drain chamber.
Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.
Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.
Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is
not chrome finished.
Vacuum Breaker Type Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE 1044, Chrome-plated, cast-brass,
NPS 1-1/2, flushometer valve vacuum breaker with NPS 3/8 outlet tubing.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
b.
Zurn Industries, Inc.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15145-6
15025
2.10
DRAIN VALVES
A.
Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, NPS 3/4 ball valve, rated for 400-psig minimum
CWP. Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with standard port, chrome-plated brass
ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.
1.
2.
B.
2.11
Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads and cap.
Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated for 200-psig minimum
CWP or MSS SP-80, Class 125, gate valve; ASTM B 62 bronze body, with NPS 1/8 side
drain outlet and cap.
MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, piston type with pressurized
metal-tube cushioning chamber. Sizes indicated are based on ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and
A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.
1.
B.
Manufacturers:
a.
Amtrol, Inc.
b.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
c.
Josam Co.
d.
MIFAB
e.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
f.
Sioux Chief Mfg. Co.
g.
Watts Industries, Inc.
h.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
Hose Bibbs: Bronze body with replaceable seat disc complying with ASME A112.18.1M
for compression-type faucets. Include NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet,
of design suitable for pressure of at least 125 psig; integral or field-installed,
nonremovable, drainable hose-connection vacuum breaker; and garden-hose threads
complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlet.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, chrome or nickel plated.
Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze, Chrome or nickel plated.
Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.
Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.
Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle.
Operation for Finished Rooms: Wheel handle.
Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.
Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping
joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15145-7
15025
B.
Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems
and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination.
Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Locate backflow preventers where indicated; in same room as connected
equipment or system where possible if not specifically indicated.
Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection
with air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of
at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap
device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not
acceptable for this application.
Backflow preventers installed more than 5 feet above floor or ground level shall
have a permanent platform under for maintenance personnel to stand on.
Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
Test each backflow prevention assembly by City of Lewiston certified tester at
the time of installation. Furnish written report of test to Owner and authority
having jurisdiction.
C.
Install pressure regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance valve bypass.
Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
D.
Install calibrated balancing valves of size specified at indicated locations. Transition from
system piping size to balancing valve as required.
E.
Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure regulator, and solenoid
valve.
F.
Install plumbing pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions and with access
for periodic maintenance, including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and
accessories.
G.
Install thermostatic water mixing valves and required specialties in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions. Provide heat trap of recommended depth in hot water inlet
piping where required by mixing valve location, check valves and adjusting valves as
required. Adjust mixing valves in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Furnish
written report to include in Operation and Maintenance Manual.
H.
Trap seal primers are not indicated on the Drawings. Trap seal primers shall be drainagetype used with flushometer valves. At locations remote from a flushometer valve fixture,
trap seal primers shall be supply-type trap seal primer valves Locate trap seal primers in
accessible locations. Where located in finished area, conceal in wall and provide access
door. Install supply-type trap seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward
drain trap a minimum of 1 percent and connect to floor-drain, floor-sink, or open-hub
drain or other drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
1.
Outlet Piping: Soft copper tube, Type K; CPVC “Gold” Schedule 40 with socket
type fittings; or crosslinked polyethylene (PEX) tubing and barbed or
compression adapter fittings
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15145-8
15025
3.02
3.03
I.
Size and install water hammer arresters in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations and instructions. Install arresters at quick-closing valves, solenoid
valves, and at each plumbing fixture or battery of fixtures in domestic water systems.
Arrestors shall be accessible for servicing or replacement.
J.
Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to water piping specialties. Use ball
valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessible locations.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty ball, butterfly, check, gate, and
globe valves.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of circulator pumps, and check valve and
balancing valve on discharge side of pumps. Install valves same size as connected piping.
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A.
Equipment Nameplates and Signs:
Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment
nameplate or sign on or near each thermostatic water mixing valve and backflow
preventer.
1.
3.04
Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for nameplates and
signs.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:
1.
Test each backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the
device’s reference standard.
END OF SECTION 15145
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15145-9
15025
SECTION 15150 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the
building and to locations indicated.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:
1.
2.
1.04
Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the
following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.06
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.05
Division 15 Section "Chemical-Waste Piping" for chemical-waste and vent
piping systems.
Division 15 Section "Drainage Piping Specialties" for soil, waste, and vent
piping systems specialties.
Division 15 Section "Sewage Pumps".
Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15150-1
15025
2.02
2.03
HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Pipe and Fittings: CISPI 301, ASTM A 888 or ASTM A 74, Service class. Pipe and
fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
and be of domestic manufacturer.
B.
Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Pipe and Fittings: CISPI 301, ASTM A 888 or ASTM A 74, Service class. Pipe and
fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
and be of domestic manufacturer.
B.
Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1540 / C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing,
corrosion-resistant fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe
stop.
1.
2.04
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.
1.
2.05
2.06
Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304,
stainless-steel shield (min. thickness 0.010 in.); stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.
a.
NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch- wide shield with 4 bands.
b.
NPS 5 to NPS 10: 4-inch- wide shield with 6 bands.
c.
ANACO Husky SD 2000, Mission Rubber Co. Heavyweight (HW), or
approved equal.
Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29,
wrought copper, solder-joint fittings.
ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Cellular-Core, ABS Pipe: ASTM F 628, Schedule 40, drain, waste, and vent.
B.
ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent
patterns.
PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40, drain, waste, and vent.
B.
PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste,
and vent patterns.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXCAVATION
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for excavating,
trenching, and backfilling.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15150-2
15025
3.02
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure
ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use any of the following piping materials
for each size range:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use any of the following piping materials
for each size range:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.03
NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 6: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, heavy-duty
stainless steel couplings.
NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 6: Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered
joints.
NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 6: Cellular-core, ABS pipe; ABS socket fittings; and solventcemented joints. Not allowed in return air plenums.
NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 6: PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented
joints. Not allowed in return air plenums.
NPS 8: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, heavy-duty stainless steel
couplings.
NPS 8: PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. Not
allowed in return air plenums.
NPS 2 to NPS 6: Service class, hub-and–spigot cast-iron soil pipe and fittings,
gasketed joints.
NPS 2 to NPS 6: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, heavy-duty stainless
steel couplings.
NPS 2 to NPS 6: Cellular-core, ABS pipe; ABS socket fittings; and solventcemented joints.
NPS 2 to NPS 6: PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
NPS 8 to NPS 12: Service class, hub-and–spigot cast-iron soil pipe and fittings,
gasketed joints.
NPS 8 to NPS 12: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, heavy-duty stainless
steel couplings.
NPS 8 to NPS 12: PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B.
Do not use ABS or PVC plastic piping in return air plenums.
C.
Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers.
D.
Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall.
Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods" for wall penetration systems.
E.
Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15150-3
15025
F.
Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be
used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use
long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or
side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on
vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of
standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size
of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
G.
Install vent piping free from drops or sags, graded and connected as to drip back by
gravity to the drainage pipe it serves.
H.
Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of
piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions
for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in
piping and pull past each joint as completed.
I.
Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.04
Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow
for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping
NPS 4 and larger.
Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
J.
Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade
if slab is without membrane waterproofing.
K.
Install ABS soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2661.
L.
Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.
M.
Prime and paint (chrome or silver finish) all exposed waste drainage piping in Food
Service fixture applications.
N.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
joint construction.
B.
Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1.
2.
C.
Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings.
Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.
Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, leadfree-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15150-4
15025
D.
3.05
PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support
devices.
B.
Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
C.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D.
Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum
rods.
E.
Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.
NPS 6: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod.
NPS 8 to NPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8-inch rod.
Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is
limited to 60 inches.
F.
Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.
G.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.
H.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
I.
Install hangers for ABS and PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod.
NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod.
NPS 8 to NPS 12: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod.
J.
Install supports for vertical ABS and PVC piping every 48 inches.
K.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15150-5
15025
3.06
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting
to join dissimilar piping materials.
C.
Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.07
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction
to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C.
Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having
jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.08
Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing
Fixtures."
Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes
indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but
not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section
"Drainage Piping Specialties."
Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if
indicated, and union or flange for each connection.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have
been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit
separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage
and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was
covered or concealed before it was tested.
Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except
outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system
and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water.
From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level
must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof,
until satisfactory results are obtained.
CLEANING
A.
Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15150-6
15025
B.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and
debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
END OF SECTION 15150
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15150-7
15025
SECTION 15155- DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following drainage piping specialties:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.03
The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:
1.
2.
Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, and accessories for the following:
1.
B.
1.06
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.05
Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, and pressure gages.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.04
Miscellaneous piping specialties
Sleeve penetration systems
Flashing materials
Cleanouts
Roof drains
Solids interceptors.
Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15155-1
15025
C.
NSF Compliance:
1.
Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for
plastic piping components. Include marking "NSF-DWV" on plastic drain,
waste, and vent piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1.
2.02
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
the manufacturers listed.
MISCELLANEOUS DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
Air-Admittance Valves: Plastic housing with mechanical-operation sealing diaphragm,
designed to admit air into drainage and vent piping and to prevent transmission of sewer
gas into building.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Manufacturers:
a. Oatey.
b. Sioux Chief Mfg. Co.
c. Studor, Inc.
Stack Vent Valve: ASSE 1050, designed for installation as terminal on soil,
waste, and vent stacks, instead of stack vent extending through roof, in NPS 2 to
NPS 4.
Fixture Vent Valve: ASSE 1051, designed for installation on waste piping,
instead of vent connection, for single fixture, in NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2.
Roof Flashing Assemblies: Manufactured assembly made of 4-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inchthick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 10 inches from pipe with
galvanized steel boot reinforcement, and counter flashing fitting.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Manufacturers:
a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div.
Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.
Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.
Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.
C.
Roof Piping and Conduit Flashings: One-piece, 18” x 18” 24 gage galvanized steel base
with friction-seal, elastomeric sealing collar.
D.
Fixed Air-Gap Fittings: Manufactured cast-iron or bronze drainage fitting with semiopen top with threads or device to secure drainage inlet piping in top and bottom spigot
or threaded outlet larger than top inlet. Include design complying with ASME A112.1.2
that will provide fixed air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.
E.
Vent Caps: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include
vented hood and set-screws to secure to vent pipe.
F.
Mushroom Vent Caps: Molded ABS plastic body with 3 set-screws to secure to vent
pipe.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15155-2
15025
G.
Expansion Joints: ASME A112.21.2M, assembly with cast-iron body with bronze sleeve,
packing gland, and packing; of size and end types corresponding to connected piping.
H.
Downspout Boots: ASTM A 48, gray-iron casting, with NPS 4 outlet; shop-applied
bituminous coating; and inlet size to match downspout.
I.
Downspout Nozzle: Bronze body with threaded inlet for connected conductor size,
bronze wall flange with mounting holes and bird screen.
1.
J.
Solids Interceptors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.03
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
B.
Hubbard Enterprises.
ProSet Systems, Inc.
Description: UL 1479, through-penetration firestop assembly consisting of sleeve and
stack fitting with firestopping plug.
1.
2.
Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral
nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye-branch stack fitting
with neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness in
branch. Include PVC protective cap for plug.
FLASHING MATERIALS
A.
Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum
weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.05
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
product indicated on Drawings:
Type: Factory-fabricated interceptor made for removing and retaining sediment,
plaster from wastewater.
Body Material: Plastic.
Mounting: Above floor, inline.
SLEEVE PENETRATION SYSTEMS
A.
2.04
Downspout Nozzle Schedule (Reference Manufacturer: Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co):
Smith, Jay R.; Fig. 1770-BS.
General Use: 4-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness.
B.
Elastic Membrane Sheet:
minimum thickness.
ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil
C.
Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
CLEANOUTS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Josam Co.
MIFAB
Sioux Chief Mfg. Co.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15155-3
15025
5.
6.
7.
B.
Cleanouts, General: Comply with ASME A112.36.2M.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
Body or Ferrule Material: Cast iron.
Clamping Device: Required.
Outlet Connection: Spigot or no-hub.
Closure: Brass plug with tapered threads.
Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.
Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze.
Frame and Cover Shape: Round.
Top Loading Classification: Light Duty for finished interior floor service; Heavy
Traffic Duty for exterior service.
Cleanout Schedule (Reference Manufacturer: Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.06
Tyler Pipe, Wade Div.
Watts Industries, Inc., Drainage Products Div.
Zurn Industries, Inc., Specification Drainage Operation
Finished Floor:
Carpeted Floor:
Terrazzo Floor:
Wall:
Exterior:
Smith, Jay R.; Fig. 4023S or Fig. 4033L.
Smith, Jay R.; Fig. 4023S-X or Fig. 4033L-X.
Smith, Jay R.; Fig. 4183S or Fig. 4193L.
Smith, Jay R.; Fig. 4422C.
Smith, Jay R.; Fig. 4253S or Fig. 4263L.
ROOF DRAINS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Roof Drains, General: Comply with ASME A112.21.1M.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Josam Co.
MIFAB
Sioux Chief Mfg. Co.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
Tyler Pipe, Wade Div.
Watts Industries, Inc., Drainage Products Div.
Zurn Industries, Inc., Specification Drainage Operation
Body Material: Cast iron.
Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required.
Outlet: Bottom.
Dome Material: Cast iron.
Extension Collars: Required.
Underdeck Clamp: Required.
Sump Receiver: Required.
Roof Drain Schedule (Reference Manufacturer: Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co):
1.
2.
RD-1 (primary roof drain, 16-inch diameter with low profile dome): Smith, Jay
R.; Fig. 1010-C-R-E-CID.
RD-2 (overflow roof drain, 16-inch diameter with low profile dome and 2-inch
high water dam): Smith, Jay R.; Fig. 1080-C-R-E-CID.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15155-4
15025
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping
joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B.
Install expansion joints on vertical risers, stacks, and conductors if indicated.
C.
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the
following, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping
unless larger cleanout is indicated.
Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100
feet for larger piping.
Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
Locate at upper terminal of all horizontal drain lines that exceed 5 feet from
drainage mains. Cleanouts not required for horizontal drain lines less than 5 feet
from drainage mains, unless serving sinks or urinals.
Locate above each urinal.
Locate below each sink and mop sink.
Locate as required by the applicable Plumbing Code.
D.
Install cleanouts with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts for piping below
floors.
E.
Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with
finished wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping.
F.
Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through
floors with waterproof membrane.
G.
Install wall cleanouts with horizontal clearance for access:
1.
2.
2-inch diameter piping or less: 12-inches minimum.
Piping larger than 2-inches diameter: 18-inches minimum.
H.
Install cleanouts for under floor piping with minimum 18-inches vertical clearance and
30-inches horizontal clearance for access.
I.
Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
J.
Install downspout nozzles at 12-inches above grade or as indicated.
K.
Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's
written installation instructions.
1.
2.
Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain
and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where
penetrated.
Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15155-5
15025
3.02
L.
Install traps on piping specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.
M.
Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations
and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal
protruding pipe fittings.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect drainage piping specialties to piping specified in other Division 15 Sections.
D.
Interceptor Connections: Connect piping, flow-control fittings, and accessories.
1.
3.03
FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes
are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1.
B.
Lead Sheets: Solder joints of lead sheets 4-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or
thinner.
Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in
floors with waterproof membrane.
1.
2.
3.
3.04
Solids Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet.
Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10
inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.
Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
around sleeve.
Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8
inches around specialty.
C.
Set flashing on floors in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D.
Install flashing for piping and conduit passing through roofs with counter flashing or
commercially made flashings.
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A.
Equipment Nameplates and Signs:
Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment
nameplate or sign on or near each grease interceptor, grease recovery unit and oil
interceptor.
1.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for nameplates and
signs.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15155-6
15025
3.05
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect field-assembled grease recovery units and their installation, including piping and
electrical connections. Report results in writing.
1.
2.
3.06
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and
debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 15155
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15155-7
15025
SECTION 15160 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes storm-drainage (rainwater) piping inside the building and to
locations indicated.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:
1.
2.
1.04
Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the
following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.06
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.05
Division 15 Section "Drainage Piping Specialties" for storm drainage piping
system specialties.
Division 15 Section "Sump Pumps."
Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.02
Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Pipe and Fittings: CISPI 301, ASTM A 888 or ASTM A 74, Service class. Pipe and
fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
and be of domestic manufacturer.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15160-1
15025
B.
2.03
Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Pipe and Fittings: CISPI 301, ASTM A 888 or ASTM A 74, Service class. Pipe and
fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
and be of domestic manufacturer.
B.
Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1540 / C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing,
corrosion-resistant fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe
stop.
1.
2.04
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.
1.
2.05
2.06
Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304,
stainless-steel shield (min. thickness 0.010 in.); stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.
a.
NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch- wide shield with 4 bands.
b.
NPS 5 to NPS 10: 4-inch- wide shield with 6 bands.
c.
ANACO Husky SD 2000, Mission Rubber Co. Heavyweight (HW), or
approved equal.
Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29,
wrought copper, solder-joint fittings.
ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Cellular-Core, ABS Pipe: ASTM F 628, Schedule 40, drain, waste, and vent.
B.
ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent
patterns.
PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40, drain, waste, and vent.
B.
PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste,
and vent patterns.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXCAVATION
A.
3.02
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for excavating,
trenching, and backfilling.
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure
ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15160-2
15025
B.
Aboveground Storm Drainage Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each
size range:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.03
NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 6: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, heavy-duty
stainless steel couplings.
NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 6: Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered
joints.
NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 6: Cellular-core, ABS pipe; ABS socket fittings; and solventcemented joints. Not allowed in return air plenums.
NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 6: PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented
joints. Not allowed in return air plenums.
NPS 8: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, heavy-duty stainless steel
couplings.
NPS 8: PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. Not
allowed in return air plenums.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B.
Do not use ABS or PVC plastic piping in return air plenums.
C.
Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building
storm sewers.
D.
Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall.
Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods" for wall penetration systems.
E.
Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
F.
Make changes in direction for storm piping using appropriate branches, bends, and longsweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of
standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size
of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
G.
Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of
piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions
for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in
piping and pull past each joint as completed.
H.
Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise
indicated:
1.
I.
Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for
piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping
NPS 4 and larger.
Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade
if slab is without membrane waterproofing.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15160-3
15025
3.04
J.
Install ABS storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2661.
K.
Install PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2665.
L.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
joint construction.
B.
Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1.
2.
3.05
Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings.
Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.
C.
Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, leadfree-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support
devices.
B.
Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
C.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D.
Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum
rods.
E.
Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.
NPS 6: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod.
NPS 8 to NPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8-inch rod.
Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is
limited to 60 inches.
F.
Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.
G.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15160-4
15025
4.
5.
H.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
I.
Install hangers for ABS and PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.06
3.07
NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.
NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod.
NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod.
NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod.
NPS 8 to NPS 12: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod.
J.
Install supports for vertical ABS and PVC piping every 48 inches.
K.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition
fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
C.
Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing-in after roughing-in.
Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction
to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C.
Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or,
in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1.
2.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have
been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit
separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm
drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was
covered or concealed before it was tested.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15160-5
15025
3.
4.
3.08
Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping on completion of roughing-in. Close
openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less
than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to
completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof,
until satisfactory results are obtained.
CLEANING
A.
Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and
debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
END OF SECTION 15160
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15160-6
15025
SECTION 15194 - GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes natural gas piping, specialties, and accessories within the building
and to locations indicated. Products include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.03
1.04
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Gas System Pressure: One pressure range. 0.5 psig (14 inches w.c.) or less.
B.
Gas System Pressures: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is at least 2.0 psig but
not more than 5.0 psig, and is reduced to secondary pressure of 0.5 psig (14 inches w.c.)
or less.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.05
Pipe, tube, fittings, and joining materials.
Protective pipe and fitting coating.
Piping specialties.
Specialty valves.
Service meters.
Pressure regulators.
Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing systems. Include associated components.
Specialty valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical
connection data of selected models.
Service meters. Include pressure rating and capacity of selected models.
Pressure regulators. Include pressure rating, capacity, and settings of selected
models.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For natural gas specialties and accessories to include
in operation and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX.
B.
Electrical Components and Devices: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked
for intended use.
C.
ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z223.1, "National Natural Gas Code."
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15194-1
15025
1.06
D.
FM Standard: Provide components listed in FM's "Fire Protection Approval Guide" if
specified to be FM approved.
E.
IAS Standard: Provide components listed in IAS's "Directory of A. G. A. and C. G. A
Certified Appliances and Accessories" if specified to be IAS listed.
F.
UL Standard: Provide components listed in UL's "Gas and Oil Equipment Directory" if
specified to be UL listed.
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
Code Compliance: Comply with most current adopted edition of following:
1.
1.07
International Natural Gas Code (IFGC).
COORDINATION
A.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
B.
Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Corrugated, Stainless-Steel Tubing Systems:
a.
Omega Flex, Inc.
b.
Titeflex Corp.
c.
Tru-Flex Metal Hose Corp.
d.
Ward Industries, Inc.
Piping Specialties:
a.
Dormont Manufacturing Co.
b.
T&S Brass
Appliance Connector Valves:
a.
American Valve.
b.
B&K Industries, Inc.
c.
Brass Craft Manufacturing Co.
d.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
e.
Jomar International, Ltd.
f.
Mueller Co.; Mueller Gas Products Div.
g.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
Gas Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller:
a.
Hammond Valve
b.
Jomar International, Ltd.
c.
Kitz Corp. of America.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15194-2
15025
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.02
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.03
Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
CORRUGATED, STAINLESS-STEEL TUBING SYSTEMS
A.
Description: Comply with AGA LC 1 and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.04
d.
Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc.
e.
Mueller Co.; Mueller Gas Products Div.
f.
Nibco, Inc.
g.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:
a.
Flow Control Equipment, Inc.
b.
Milliken Valve Co., Inc.
c.
Nordstrom Valves, Inc.
d.
Olson Technologies, Inc.; Homestead Valve Div.
e.
Walworth Co.
Electrically Operated Gas Valves:
a.
ASCO General Controls.
b.
Atkomatic Valve Co., Inc.
c.
Automatic Switch Co.
Service Meters:
a.
American Meter Co.
b.
Badger Meter, Inc.; Utility Products Div.
c.
Invensys.
d.
National Meter Industries, Inc.
e.
Sensus.
Line Pressure Regulators:
a.
American Meter Co.
b.
Fisher Controls International, Inc.
c.
Maxitrol Co.
d.
National Meter Industries, Inc.
e.
Sensus.
Tubing: Corrugated stainless steel with plastic jacket or coating.
Fittings: Copper alloy with ends made to fit corrugated tubing. Include ends
with threads according to ASME B1.20.1 if connection to threaded pipe or
fittings is required.
Striker Plates: Steel, designed to protect tubing from penetrations.
Manifolds: Malleable iron or steel with protective coating. Include threaded
connections according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe inlet and corrugated tubing
outlets.
PIPES, TUBES, FITTINGS, AND JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, black.
1.
2.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern,
with threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat,
ground joint, and threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15194-3
15025
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
2.05
Transition Fittings: Type, material, and end connections to match piping being joined.
PROTECTIVE COATING
A.
2.06
Furnish pipe and fittings with factory-applied, corrosion-resistant polyethylene coating
for use with underground piping.
PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy.
B.
Quick-Disconnect Devices:
connector.
C.
Appliance Gas Connectors for Moveable Equipment: ANSI Z21.69, ANSI Z21.41, ANSI
Z21.24, installation kit complete with flexible gas connector, “push-to-connect” quickdisconnect with integral thermal shut-off, flared design end fittings, and coiled restraining
device with mounting hardware.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.07
Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125.
Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel or ASME B16.11, forged
steel.
Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends
according to ASME B1.20.1.
Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.
Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas.
ANSI Z21.41, convenience outlets and matching plug
Connector Tubing: Annealed Type 304 stainless steel.
Connector Braiding: Multi-strand Type 304 stainless steel.
Connector Coating: PVC dipped coating, NSF certified.
Quick Disconnect: Brass body, carbon steel threaded end fittings, aluminum
collar.
Thermal Shut-off: Polymer insert in quick-disconnect melts when temperatures
exceed 350 deg.F, to shut off gas flow.
End Fittings: Carbon steel with zinc and yellow dichromate coating; flared
design.
Restraining Cable: PVC coated, carbon steel multi-stand cable.
SPECIALTY VALVES
A.
Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads.
B.
Butterfly Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body, stainless steel disc, stem and nut,
viton disc seal, AGA certified, UL Listed, threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for
pipe threads.
1.
Milwaukee “Butterball” BB2-100, or equal.
C.
Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges
and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.
D.
Appliance Connector Valves: ANSI Z21.15 and CSA International-listed.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15194-4
15025
E.
Gas Stops: Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and flat or square
head, ball type with chrome-plated brass ball and lever handle, or butterfly valve with
stainless-steel disc and fluorocarbon elastomer seal and lever handle; 2-psig minimum
pressure rating.
F.
Gas Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASME B16.33 and CSA International-listed bronze
body and 125-psig pressure rating.
G.
Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.38 and MSS SP-78 cast-iron, lubricated
plug valves, with 125-psig pressure rating.
H.
General-Duty Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.38, cast-iron body, suitable for
natural gas service, with "WOG" indicated on valve body, and 125-psig pressure rating.
1.
2.
I.
2.08
Electrically Operated, Gas Safety Shutoff Valves: UL 429, aluminum body solenoid
valve; 120-V ac, 60 Hz, Class B, continuous-duty molded coil. Include NEMA ISC 6,
Type 4, coil enclosure and electrically opened and closed dual coils. Valve position shall
normally be closed. ASCO 8215 Series or equal.
SERVICE METERS
A.
Service Meters: Positive-displacement type suitable for natural gas service. Include
metal case, temperature compensation, corrosion-resistant internal components, and flow
registered in cubic feet.
1.
2.
3.
2.09
Gate Valves: MSS SP-70, OS&Y type with solid wedge.
Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, lug type with lever handle.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges
and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.
Type: ANSI B109.1, diaphragm.
PRESSURE REGULATORS
A.
Description: Single-stage, lock-up design, suitable for natural gas service. Include steel
jacket and corrosion-resistant components, elevation compensator, and atmospheric vent.
Regulator seat shall seal the regulator orifice when the connected appliance or equipment
is off and there is no demand for gas.
1.
2.
3.
B.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges
and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.
Line Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.80 with 2-psig- minimum inlet pressure
rating.
Pressure Regulator Vents: Factory- or field-installed, corrosion-resistant screen in
opening if not connected to vent piping.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15194-5
15025
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roughing-in for natural gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping
connections before equipment installation.
1.
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
3.03
Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or section of
piping. Perform leakage test as specified in "Field Quality Control" Article to determine
that all equipment is turned off in affected piping section.
SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING
A.
Extend natural gas piping and connect to natural gas distribution for service entrance to
building.
1.
3.04
Exterior natural gas distribution system piping, service pressure regulator, and
service meter will be provided by gas utility.
SERVICE-METER INSTALLATION
A.
Install service-meter aboveground.
1.
Set service-meter assembly on, or supported over, precast concrete bases. Set
bases level with top surface projecting 3 inches above finished grade. Concrete
bases are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods."
B.
Include gas valve or plug valve, [strainer,] [service pressure regulator,] [service-meter bar
for service meter with connections NPS 1 and smaller,] [and service meter] for each
assembly.
C.
Install gas valve or plug valve and strainer upstream from each service pressure regulator.
D.
Install service pressure regulators with vent outlet turned down and with corrosionresistant-metal insect screen.
E.
Install service meters downstream from service pressure regulators.
1.
2.
3.05
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
Service meters with connections NPS 1 and smaller on meter bars.
Service meters with connections larger than NPS 1 supported from piping or set
on concrete bases.
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings with pressure ratings same as or higher
than system pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise
indicated.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15194-6
15025
B.
Natural Gas Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
3.06
3.07
NPS 1/2 and Smaller: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded
joints.
NPS 1/2 and Smaller: Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing system and threaded
joints.
NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded
joints.
NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing system and threaded
joints.
NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded
joints.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints.
Underground Natural Gas Piping: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints
with protective coating.
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 psig or Less: Appliance connector valve or
gas stop.
B.
Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 to 2 psig: Gas stop or gas valve.
C.
Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 2 to 5 psig: Gas valve.
D.
Piping Line Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve.
E.
Piping Line Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Plug valve or general-duty valve.
F.
Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve.
G.
Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Plug valve.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods".
B.
Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in airtight
conduit constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent
conduit to outside and terminate with screened vent cap.
1.
Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces,
subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not such spaces
are used as plenums.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15194-7
15025
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
In Floors: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in
"Protective Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in floors, subject to
approval of authorities having jurisdiction. Surround piping cast in concrete
slabs with minimum of 1-1/2 inches of concrete. Piping may not be in physical
contact with other metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically
neutral conductors. Do not embed piping in concrete slabs containing quick-set
additives or cinder aggregate.
In Floor Channels: Gas piping may be installed in floor channels, subject to
approval of authorities having jurisdiction. Channels must have cover and be
open to space above cover for ventilation.
In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing
from physical damage when installed inside partitions or hollow walls.
a.
Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls.
In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in
"Protective Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in masonry walls, subject
to approval of authorities having jurisdiction.
Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air
ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or
dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.
a.
Exception: Accessible above-ceiling space specified above.
Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Locate
where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate
would be subject to freezing.
1.
Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or
capped. Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3
inches long, and same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom
of drip and floor for removal of plug or cap.
D.
Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below
grade or floors, and in floor channels, unless indicated to be exposed to view.
E.
Install natural gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers.
F.
Use bell reducer or eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install
eccentric reducer fittings with level side down.
G.
Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
H.
Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to
each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged
devices.
I.
Install corrugated, stainless-steel tubing system according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Include striker plates to protect tubing from puncture where tubing is
restrained and cannot move.
J.
Install shutoff valve on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic and electrically
operated valve.
K.
Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger
connections.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15194-8
15025
3.08
3.09
L.
Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and
vent to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with
corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end.
M.
Install containment conduits for gas piping below slabs, within building, in gastight
conduits extending minimum of 4 inches outside building, and vented to atmosphere.
Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant
insect screens in large end. Prepare and paint outside of conduits with coal-tar, epoxypolyamide paint according to SSPC-Paint 16.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Basic piping joint construction is specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods".
B.
Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds
and where damage to coating occurs during construction.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support
devices.
B.
Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Install hangers for horizontal corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with the following
maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1.
2.
3.
3.10
NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.
NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
Option: Support tubing from structure according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of natural gas piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect piping to appliances with shutoff valve, unions and appliance gas connector.
Install valve upstream from and within 72 inches of each appliance. Install union
downstream from valve.
D.
Connect piping to moveable appliances or equipment with shutoff valve and appliance
gas connector with quick-disconnect fitting and restraining device.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15194-9
15025
E.
3.11
Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as
practical to inlet of each appliance using gas.
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A.
Equipment Nameplates and Signs:
Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment
nameplate or sign on or near each service meter, pressure regulator, and specialty valve.
1.
3.12
PAINTING
A.
Paint exterior piping exposed to view, service meters, pressure regulators, and specialty
valves.
1.
2.
3.13
3.14
Nameplates, pipe identification, and signs are specified in Division 15 Section
"Mechanical Identification."
Type: Semi-gloss enamel over primer.
Color: Gray, 2 coats.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test, inspect, and purge piping according to NFPA 54 and requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results
are obtained.
C.
Verify capacities and pressure ratings of service meters, pressure regulators, valves, and
specialties.
D.
Verify correct pressure settings for pressure regulators.
E.
Verify that specified piping tests are complete.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
safety devices.
END OF SECTION 15194
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15194-10
15025
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
SUMMARY
A.
Provide all materials, labor, equipment design and services necessary to perform the
installation of the fire protection system as shown on the drawings and as described herein.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.03
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Fire sprinkler systems shall be hydraulically calculated, wet or dry pipe systems protecting
areas of the buildings with a zones as required, designed in accordance with NFPA 13 and
NFPA 14 for the following conditions:
1.
2.
1.04
Division 15 Section “General Mechanical Requirements”.
Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods”.
Division 16 Section “Fire Alarm and Detection Systems”.
Except as listed below, sprinkler systems shall be designed for Light Hazard
occupancy, including spaces above ceilings in existing and new construction where
construction is combustible.
Sprinkler systems protecting the Electrical Rooms, and Storage spaces shall be
designed for Ordinary Hazard, Group 1 occupancy.
B.
Obtain water supply characteristics from the water utility purveyor or authority having
jurisdiction where not specifically indicated.
C.
Pipe sizes and routing on the Drawings are for general information. Actual pipe sizes and
routing shall be shown on the Shop Drawings as verified by hydraulic calculations by the
Contractor.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Furnish a complete list of fire protection equipment and products, and
manufacturer's catalog data sheets and maintenance data sheets for each item to be included in
the project.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit drawings which have been prepared in accordance with NFPA 13
identified as "Working Plans," including hydraulic calculations, and which have been
approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Submit evidence of final drawing approval by
the authority having jurisdiction prior to the start of fabrication or installation.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15300-1
15025
C.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.06
Test Reports and Certificates: Include "Contractor's Material & Test Certificate for
Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material & Test Certificate for Underground Piping"
as described in NFPA 13, for work provided.
Installer Qualifications: All above ground fire sprinkler system work shall be performed by a
licensed fire sprinkler contractor in the State of Idaho.
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
Code Compliance: Comply with most current adopted edition of following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.07
International Building Code (IBC), Standards and Amendments.
International Mechanical Code (IMC), Standards and Amendments.
International Fire Code (IFC), Standards and Amendments.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
National Electrical Code (NEC); NFPA 70.
Applicable State and local codes, laws and ordinances
APPROVALS
A.
For purposes of code compliance, the Authority having jurisdiction will be the City of
Lewiston. Where there is a conflict between the Authority having jurisdiction and the
referenced codes and standards, the most stringent shall apply.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
GENERAL
A.
Materials and Equipment: All fire protection system materials and equipment shall be new
and current products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such materials
and equipment.
B.
Approval Guides: All fire protection system materials and equipment shall be listed in the
latest publication of the Underwriter's Laboratories Fire Protection Directory or the Factory
Mutual Approval Guide.
PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS
A.
2.03
Pipe or tubing shall be metallic and meet or exceed the standards of NFPA 13.
PIPE FITTINGS
A.
Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4, Class 125, rated for 175 psi, standard pattern, for threaded
joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.
B.
Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234, seamless or welded, for welded joints.
C.
Grooved Mechanical Fittings: ASTM A 47, malleable-iron fittings with grooves or shoulders
designed to accept grooved end couplings.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15300-2
15025
2.04
2.05
D.
Grooved Mechanical Couplings: Consist of ductile or malleable iron housing, a synthetic
rubber gasket of a central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin,
locking toggle, or lugs to secure roll-grooved pipe and fittings.
E.
Grooved mechanical couplings including gaskets used on dry-pipe systems shall be listed for
dry-pipe service.
F.
Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 125; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.
G.
Gasket Materials: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled, and design
temperatures and pressures.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Provide hangers to support all piping in perfect alignment without sagging or interference, to
permit free expansion and contraction, and meet the requirements of NFPA 13.
B.
Pipe rings shall be zinc-coated. Grinnell figure 69 or approved equal.
C.
Hanger rods to be electro-galvanized.
SEISMIC BRACING
A.
2.06
Seismic bracing shall be with a pipe clamp and pipe with swivel type anchor or those similar
to illustrations in NFPA 13 Figures A-4-5.4.3.5.1 (e) and (f). Other types of UL listed or FM
approved bracing may be used.
VALVES
A.
Gate Valves - 2 Inch and Smaller: Body and bonnet of cast bronze, 175 pound cold water
working pressure - non-shock, threaded ends, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising
stem, screw-in bonnet, and malleable iron handwheel. Valves shall be capable of being
repacked under pressure, with valve wide open.
B.
Gate Valves – 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Iron body; bronze mounted, 175 pound cold water
working pressure - non-shock. Valves shall have solid taper wedge; outside screw and yoke,
rising stem; flanged bonnet, with body and bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B;
replaceable bronze wedge facing rings; flanged ends; and a packing assembly consisting of a
cast iron gland flange, brass bland, packing, bonnet, and bronze bonnet bushing. Valves shall
be capable of being repacked under pressure, with valve wide open.
C.
Check Valves: Cast iron body, bronze seat, stainless steel clapper with a replaceable rubber
seal and 175 psi rated working pressure.
1.
2.
Butterfly Valves: Iron body with lug, wafer or grooved configuration, rated at 175
psi working pressure, resilient seating for bubble tight shut-off, U.L. listed or F.M.
approved.
Drain Valves: Valves shall be screw-in bonnet bronze globe valves rated for 175 psi
non-shock cold water working pressure. Low point drain valves shall have in
addition a : inch brass nipple with : inch male hose thread and cap.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15300-3
15025
2.07
SPECIALTY VALVES
A.
2.08
DOUBLE-CHECK DETECTOR BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLY
A.
2.09
2.10
Dry-Pipe Valves: Differential type, 175 psig working pressure, and have cast iron, flanged
inlet and outlet, bronze seat with "O" ring seals, single hinge pin and latch design. Provide
trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure
gauges, priming chamber attachment, and fill line attachment.
Double Check Backflow Preventer Assembly: Assembly shall comply with all local water
district requirements for bypass detection, etc.
SYSTEM ACCESSORIES
A.
Sight Drain: Provide single piece sight drain on each main drain on the system riser. Grinnell
Model F1321 or approved equal.
B.
Pressure Gauge: Provide 32 inch diameter bourdon type pressure gauge, range of 0 to 300
pounds, 3 inch soft metal seat globe valve with arrangements for draining piping between
gauge and valve. Locate near main control valve assembly.
C.
Wall Escutcheon: Provide chrome plate split ring type escutcheons at all exposed wall
penetrations.
D.
Signs: Provide all control, drain and test valves with signs identifying type of valve and area
affected by valve. Signs shall be three layer etched plastic with red letters on a white
background to identify valves. Provide hydraulic design information plates as required by
NFPA 13. Signs shall be similar to Grinnell Type A.
SPRINKLERS
A.
Provide automatic sprinklers throughout. Sprinklers in finished ceilings shall be glass bulb
type with white finish and white recessed escutcheon unless otherwise noted. Temperature
rating of sprinkler shall be as required by application. Extended coverage sprinklers may be
used where installed in accordance with NFPA 13 and UL/FM listings.
B.
Sprinkler finishes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Recessed pendent: White with white escutcheon.
Horizontal sidewall: Chrome plate with chrome escutcheon.
Upright - concealed: Brass.
Dry sidewall: Chrome plate with chrome escutcheon.
C.
Provide spare sprinklers and escutcheons for each type and style of sprinkler used in
accordance with NFPA 13 and proportioned based upon the number, type and style of
sprinklers installed on the project.
D.
Provide a spare sprinkler cabinet to accommodate the required number of spare sprinklers and
escutcheons. Include a wrench for each type of sprinkler in the cabinet.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15300-4
15025
E.
2.11
FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
A.
2.12
2.13
Provide UL Listed sprinkler headguards for sprinklers subject to mechanical damage or for
any sprinkler lower than 7'-0" above the floor. Headguards shall be provided for all sprinklers
in the gymnasium and mechanical rooms.
Wall Type Siamese Connections: Cast brass with wall escutcheon for horizontal connection.
Connection sizes shall be 4-inch outlet and two, 2-inch female inlets, having NH standard
threads, for the connection size indicated, as specified in NFPA 1963. Each inlet shall have a
clapper valve, and plug and chain. Unit shall have wall escutcheon of aluminum alloy with
cast-in raised letters with words "AUTO SPRK - FIRE DEPT. CONNECTION"
("STANDPIPE - FIRE DEPT. CONNECTION") ("AUTO SPRK & STANDPIPE - FIRE
DEPT CONNECTION").
POST INDICATOR VALVE ASSEMBLY
A.
Gate Valve: UL 262, FM-approved NRS gate valve with iron body and bonnet with flange for
indicator post, bronze seating material, inside screw, flanged connections, 175 psig minimum
working pressure.
B.
Indicator Post: UL 789, FM-approved, vertical type, cast iron body with operating wrench,
extension rod, valve supervisory switch, and adjustable cast iron barrel of length required for
valve burial depth.
ALARM DEVICES
A.
General: Types and sizes shall mate and match piping and equipment connections.
B.
Waterflow Switches: Vane type waterflow detector, rated to 250 psig; designed for horizontal
or vertical installation; have 2-SPDT circuit switches to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary
contacts, 7 ampere 125 volts AC and 0.25 ampere 24 volts DC; complete with factory-set,
field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals, and tamper-proof cover which sends a
signal when cover is removed.
C.
Supervisory Switches: SPST, normally closed contacts, designed to signal valve in other than
full open position.
D.
Electric Bell: 10" diameter, 24-volt connection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A.
Deviations from approved "working plans" for fire sprinkler piping, require approval of the
authority having jurisdiction and shall be made only after careful coordination with other
Trades on the project and the Architect.
B.
Piping shall be so arranged to allow space for other equipment and piping. Coordinate all
work with other trades on the job, and where necessary to alter work, it shall be done at no
extra charge to the Owner. Install piping to provide maximum head height.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15300-5
15025
3.02
3.03
C.
Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13.
D.
Hangers and Supports: Comply with requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Hanger and
support spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in
accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instructions, for
rigid systems. Provide required seismic bracing in accordance with NFPA 13.
E.
Install inspector's test valves for each system located in accordance with NFPA 13. Test
assemblies shall be piped to discharge outside the building.
F.
Install pressure gauge on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gauge
with a connection not less than 1/4 inch and having a soft metal seated globe valve, arranged
for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal, and where they
will not be subject to freezing.
G.
Install mechanical sleeve seal at pipe penetrations in below grade foundation walls.
VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A.
General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings, and specialties in accordance with
the manufacturer's written instructions, NFPA 13, and the authority having jurisdiction.
B.
Control Valves: Install supervised-open control valves so located to control all sources of
water supply except fire department connections. Provide permanently marked identification
signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each valve.
C.
Install check valves in each water supply connection.
D.
Backflow Prevention Device: Install in proper direction of flow where indicated with
adequate support. Maximum height above floor level not to exceed 5'-0".
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A.
3.04
3.05
Electrical Connections: Coordinate all required electrical and fire alarm connections to
supervisory switches, waterflow switches, bells, compressed air components, etc. with
Division 16 - Electrical.
SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A.
Use proper tools to prevent damage during installations. Sprinkler head layout in finished
ceiling areas shall be symmetrical with all heads in straight lines and evenly spaced with
respect to lighting fixtures, etc.
B.
Sprinkler heads located in 2'x 2' lay-in type ceiling panel shall be centered in tile unless
otherwise indicated. Sprinkler heads located in 2'x 4' lay-in type ceiling panel shall be
centered in tile or located at quarter points unless otherwise indicated.
FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATIONS
A.
Install automatic drip valves at the check valve on the fire department connection. Check
valve and ball drip shall be located in the boiler/mechanical room.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15300-6
15025
3.06
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping systems in accordance with NFPA 13. Underground
piping shall be flushed, tested, inspected and approved prior to connection to sprinkler piping
within the building. Replace piping system components which do not pass the test procedures
specified, and retest repaired portion of the system.
END OF SECTION 15300
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15300-7
15025
SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes plumbing fixtures.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.03
1.04
Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow
preventers, wall hydrants, thermostatic water mixing valves, water tempering
equipment for emergency plumbing fixtures and specialty fixtures not in this
Section.
Division 15 Section "Drainage Piping Specialties" for floor drains, roof drains,
interceptors, and grease removal units.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by
people with disabilities.
B.
Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings
specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and
tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty
valves are included where indicated.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances,
appurtenances, equipment, and supports and indicate materials and finishes, dimensions,
construction details, and flow-control rates for each type of fixture indicated.
1.
2.
Include summary table of plumbing fixtures, in order scheduled, listing fixture
identification symbol, fixture and all related trim and accessories with
manufacturers and model numbers.
Include single product data for accessories (p-traps, stops, supplies, ADA
protective shielding guards, etc.) common to multiple fixtures. Identify which
fixture symbols each accessory applies to. Do not duplicate product data for
common accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C.
Maintenance Data:
manuals.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
For plumbing fixtures to include in operation and maintenance
15410-1
15025
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of the International Building Code
(IBC) and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; about plumbing
fixtures for people with disabilities.
C.
NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, “Drinking Water System Components- Heath
Effects,” for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
D.
Water Conservation: Comply with requirements of the Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) as
amended by Washington State Building Code Council (Chapter 51-47 WAC) for
maximum water usage by plumbing fixtures.
E.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
plumbing fixtures:
1.
F.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
lavatory and sink faucets:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
G.
Stainless-Steel Fixtures Other Than Service Sinks: ASME A112.19.3M.
Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M.
Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet:
ASME A112.18.3M.
Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025.
Faucet Hose: ASTM D 3901.
Faucets: ASME A112.18.1M.
Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
NSF Materials: NSF 61.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
Supply and Drain Fittings: ASME A112.18.1M.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
bathtub and shower faucets:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Backflow Protection Devices for Hand-Held Showers: ASME A112.18.3M.
Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets:
ASSE 1016.
Faucets: ASME A112.18.1M.
High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices:
ASTM F 445.
Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15410-2
15025
H.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous fittings and accessories:
1.
2.
3.
I.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1.
2.
3.
1.06
Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1M.
a.
Stops: Chrome-plated, quarter-turn ball or compression type; 1/2 inch
nominal compression or threaded inlet, loose-key.
b.
Supplies: Chrome-plated; flexible tubing riser with ground joint
connection to fixture and wall escutcheon.
Tubular Brass Drainage Fittings and Piping: ASME A112.18.2M; 17 gauge
minimum; semi-cast p-traps with cleanout, 1-1/2” minimum.
Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
Supply and Drain Piping Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
a.
Manufactured, molded anti-microbial protective pipe covers for covering
hot and cold water supplies, stops, p-trap and drain piping; flush, snap-in
tamper-resistant fasteners; ADA compliant.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate roughing-in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can
be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
Stainless Steel Sinks and Service Sinks:
a.
Advance Tabco
b.
Elkay Mfg. Co.
c.
Just Mfg. Co.
Faucets:
a.
American Standard, Inc.
b.
Bradley Corporation
c.
Central Brass
d.
Chicago Faucet Co.
e.
Crane Plumbing
f.
Delta Commercial Faucets
g.
Elkay Mfg. Co.
h.
Kohler Co.
i.
Leonard Valve Company
j.
Moen Commercial
k.
Sloan
l.
Speakman Company
m.
Symmons Industries, Inc.
n.
T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15410-3
15025
3.
2.02
2.03
2.04
o.
Zurn Industries, Inc.
Fixture Supports and Carriers:
a.
Josam Co.
b.
MIFAB
c.
J.R. Smith Mfg. Co.
d.
Tyler Pipe/Wade Div.
e.
Watts Drainage
f.
Zurn Industries, Inc.
PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
A.
General: Basis-of-Design manufacturers and model numbers listed are for reference only
for intended level of quality and required features. Refer to plumbing fixture schedule
sheet M0.1.
B.
Fixture Mounting Heights: Refer to Architectural interior elevations for fixture mounting
heights.
C.
Install protective shielding guards on hot and cold water supplies, stops, p-trap and drain
piping for lavatories, sinks and other plumbing fixtures designated as “accessible”.
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roughing-in for water soil and for waste piping systems and supports to verify
actual locations and sizes of piping connections and that locations and types of supports
match those indicated, before plumbing fixture installation. Use manufacturer's
roughing-in data if roughing-in data are not indicated.
B.
Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be
installed.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
FIXTURE INSTALLATION
A.
Assemble fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers'
written instructions.
B.
Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
C.
Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions and
roughing-in drawings.
D.
Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to
water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces
behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
1.
E.
Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valve if stops are not specified with fixture.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.
Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly
connected to sanitary drainage system.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15410-4
15025
F.
Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to
drainage system.
G.
Install protective shielding guards on hot and cold water supplies, stops, p-trap and drain
piping for fixtures designated as accessible.
H.
Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if
faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
I.
Install water-supply, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at
stop valves.
J.
Install faucet, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts
if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
K.
Install traps on fixture outlets.
1.
2.
2.05
Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.
Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
L.
Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal
protruding fittings. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods" for escutcheons.
M.
Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures.
C.
Connect cold water supply piping to plumbed emergency plumbing fixtures without
integral, water-tempering system.
D.
Connect hot and cold water supply piping to hot and cold tempering equipment. Connect
tempered water piping to emergency plumbing fixtures.
E.
Connect drain piping from fixtures to sanitary drainage and vent piping.
F.
Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Connect fixtures with water
supplies, stops, risers, traps, and waste piping. Use size fittings required to match
fixtures. Connect to plumbing piping.
G.
Supply and Waste Connections to Fixtures and Equipment Specified in Other Sections:
Connect fixtures and equipment with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and waste piping
specified. Use size fittings required to match fixtures and equipment. Connect to
plumbing piping.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15410-5
15025
H.
Ground equipment.
1.
2.06
2.07
2.08
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where
installed.
B.
Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified
components.
C.
Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D.
Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units
operate properly.
E.
Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
ADJUSTING
A.
Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,
fittings, and controls.
B.
Adjust water pressure at faucets, shower valves, and flushometer valves to produce
proper flow and stream.
C.
Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
CLEANING
A.
Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning
methods and materials. Do the following:
1.
2.
2.09
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall
strainers and spouts.
Remove sediment and debris from drains.
PROTECTION
A.
Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B.
Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by
Owner.
END OF SECTION 15410
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15410-6
15025
SECTION 15732 – PACKAGED ROOFTOP HEATING/COOLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following packaged rooftop heating/cooling units:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.03
Division 15 Section "Direct-Fired, Makeup Air Units" for outside units providing
100 percent tempered outside air without heat exchangers.
Division 15 Section "Indirect-Fired, Heating and Ventilating Units" for outside
units providing 100 percent tempered outside air with heat exchangers.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated, including
rated capacities, operating weights, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics,
wiring diagrams, furnished specialties, and accessories.
1.
1.04
Units 7-1/2 tons and smaller.
Units 7-1/2 to 20 tons.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged rooftop heating/cooling units to include
in operation and maintenance manuals.
C.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B.
Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration."
C.
Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy
Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings".
D.
Comply with NFPA 54 for gas-fired furnace section.
E.
ARI Certification for Units with Capacities Less Than 240,000 Btuh: Units shall be ARI
certified and listed.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15732-1
15025
F.
ARI Compliance for Units with Capacities Less Than 135,000 Btuh: Rate rooftop airconditioner capacity according to ARI 210/240, "Unitary Air-Conditioning and AirSource Heat Pump Equipment."
1.
G.
ARI Compliance for Units with Capacities 135,000 Btuh and More: Rate rooftop airconditioner capacity according to ARI 340/360, "Commercial and Industrial Unitary AirConditioning and Heat Pump Equipment."
1.
1.05
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with roof
installer.
1.
Coordinate installation of restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace
components of packaged rooftop heating/cooling units that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
2.
1.07
Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with ARI 270, "Sound Rating of Outdoor
Unitary Equipment."
COORDINATION
A.
1.06
Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with ARI 270, "Sound Rating of Outdoor
Unitary Equipment."
Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than
five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than
ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
2.
Fan Belts: One set for each belt-drive fan.
Filters: One set of filters for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
the manufacturers listed.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15732-2
15025
2.02
PACKAGED ROOFTOP HEATING/COOLING UNITS 7.5 TONS AND SMALLER
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Carrier Corp.
B.
Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for exterior installation; consisting
of compressor, indoor and outside refrigerant coils, heating section, indoor fan(s) and
outside coil fan, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers.
C.
Casing: Galvanized-steel construction with enamel paint finish, removable panels or
access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum
1/2-inch- thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections,
exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs.
D.
Indoor Fan:
1.
2.
Forward curved, centrifugal, directly driven by multi-speed motor.
Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven by single-speed motor.
E.
Outside Coil Fan: Propeller type, directly driven by motor.
F.
Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with
equalizing-type vertical distributor.
G.
Compressor: Hermetic reciprocating or scroll compressor with integral vibration
isolators, internal overcurrent and over temperature protection, internal pressure
relief, and crankcase heater where recommended by manufacturer.
H.
Refrigeration System:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Compressor.
Outside coil and fan.
Indoor coil and fan.
Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element or fixed orifice metering
system.
Refrigerant dryer.
High-pressure switch.
Low-pressure switch.
Low-ambient switch.
Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines.
Charge of refrigerant.
I.
Filters: 2-inch-thick, pleated, throwaway filters in filter rack.
J.
Heat Exchanger: Stainless-steel construction for natural -gas-fired burners with the
following controls:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Redundant single or dual gas valve with manual shutoff.
Direct-spark pilot ignition.
Electronic flame sensor.
Induced-draft blower.
Flame rollout switch.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15732-3
15025
K.
Economizer: Return- and outside-air dampers with neoprene seals, outside-air filter, and
hood.
1.
2.
3.
Damper Motor: Fully modulating spring return with adjustable minimum
position.
Control: Electronic-control system uses outside-air temperature to adjust mixing
dampers.
Relief Damper: Gravity actuated with bird screen and hood.
L.
CO2 sensor (where scheduled): wall mounted CO2 sensor for demand controlled
ventilation. Sensor to increase ventilation air/economizer damper above a set minimum
when CO2 levels approach a set limit.
M.
Power Connection: Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted,
non-fused disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer
with built-in circuit breaker.
N.
Unit Controls: Solid-state control board and components contain at least the following
features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
O.
Indoor fan on/off delay.
Default control to ensure proper operation after power interruption.
Service relay output.
Unit diagnostics and diagnostic code storage.
Field-adjustable control parameters.
Economizer control.
Electric heat staging.
Gas valve delay between first- and second-stage firing.
Indoor-air quality control with carbon dioxide sensor.
Low-ambient control, allowing operation down to 0 deg F.
Minimum unit and compressor run time.
Night setback mode.
Return-air temperature limit.
Smoke alarm with smoke detector installed in supply air.
Low-refrigerant pressure control.
Digital display of outside temperature, supply-air temperature, return-air
temperature, economizer damper position, indoor-air quality, and control
parameters.
Thermostat: Programmable, electronic; with heating setback and cooling setup with
seven-day programming; and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Touch sensitive keyboard.
Automatic switching.
Deg F readout.
LED indicators.
Hour/day programming.
Manual override capability.
Compressor cycle delay.
Time and operational mode readout.
Status indicator.
Battery backup.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15732-4
15025
11.
12.
13.
P.
Optional Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Q.
2.03
Subbase with manual system switch (on-heat-auto-cool) and fan switch (autoon).
Fan-proving switch to lock out unit if fan fails.
Dirty-filter switch.
Convenience Outlet: 115-V, ground-fault, circuit-interrupter type with factoryinstalled stepdown transformer.
Dirty-filter switch.
Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire.
Thru-the-curb service connections.
Indoor-air quality control with carbon dioxide sensor.
Smoke detector installed in supply air. (RTU-1, 2, 3 and 4)
Vertical vent extension.
Roof Curb: Steel with corrosion-protection coating, gasketing, and factory-installed
wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards; minimum height of 14 inches.
PACKAGED ROOFTOP HEATING/COOLING UNITS 7-1/2 TO 20 TONS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Carrier; Div. of United Technologies Corp.
B.
Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for exterior installation; consisting
of compressor, indoor and outside refrigerant coils, heating section, indoor fan(s) and
outside coil fan, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers.
C.
Casing: Galvanized-steel construction with enamel paint finish, removable panels or
access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum
1-inch thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior
condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs.
D.
Indoor Fan(s):
1.
Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable motor sheaves, greaselubricated ball bearings, and motor.
E.
Outside Coil Fan: Propeller type, directly driven by permanently lubricated motor.
F.
Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with
equalizing-type vertical distributor.
G.
Compressor(s): Two hermetic scroll compressors with integral vibration isolators,
internal overcurrent and over temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and
crankcase heater(s) where recommended by manufacturer.
H.
Refrigeration System:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Compressor(s).
Outside coil and fan.
Indoor coil and fan.
Check valves.
Expansion valves with replaceable thermostatic elements.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15732-5
15025
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Refrigerant dryers.
High-pressure switches.
Low-pressure switches.
Independent refrigerant circuits.
Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines.
Charge of refrigerant.
Hot-Gas Bypass: Factory-installed valve.
I.
Filters: 2-inch- thick, fiberglass, pleated, throwaway filters in filter rack.
J.
Heat Exchanger: Stainless-steel construction for natural -gas-fired burners with the
following controls:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
K.
Redundant dual gas valve with manual shutoff.
Direct-spark pilot ignition.
Electronic flame sensor.
Induced-draft blower.
Flame rollout switch.
Economizer: Return- and outside-air dampers with neoprene seals, outside-air filter, and
hood.
1.
2.
3.
Damper Motor: Fully modulating spring return with adjustable minimum
position.
Control: Electronic-control system uses outside-air temperature to adjust mixing
dampers.
Relief Damper: Gravity actuated with bird screen and hood.
L.
Power Connection: Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted
disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with builtin circuit breaker.
M.
Unit Controls: Solid-state control board and components contain at least the following
features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Indoor fan on/off delay.
Default control to ensure proper operation after power interruption.
Service relay output.
Unit diagnostics and diagnostic code storage.
Field-adjustable control parameters.
Economizer control.
Gas valve delay between first- and second-stage firing.
Indoor-air quality control with carbon dioxide sensor.
Low-ambient control, allowing operation down to 0 deg F.
Minimum unit and compressor run time.
Night setback mode.
Return-air temperature limit.
Smoke alarm with smoke detector installed in supply air.
Low-refrigerant pressure control.
Digital display of outside temperature, supply-air temperature, return-air
temperature, economizer damper position, indoor-air quality, and control
parameters.
Variable-Air-Volume Control: Variable-frequency drive controls supply-air static
pressure. Supply-air, static-pressure limit shuts unit down on high pressure.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15732-6
15025
N.
DDC Temperature Control: Install stand-alone control module providing link between
unit controls and DDC temperature-control system. Control module shall be compatible
with temperature-control system specified in Division 15 Section "HVAC
Instrumentation and Controls."
O.
Thermostat: Programmable, electronic; with heating setback and cooling setup with
seven-day programming; and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
P.
Optional Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Q.
Touch sensitive keyboard.
Automatic switching.
Deg F readout.
LED indicators.
Hour/day programming.
Manual override capability.
Compressor cycle delay.
Time and operational mode readout.
Status indicator.
Battery backup.
Subbase with manual system switch (on-heat-auto-cool) and fan switch (autoon).
Fan-proving switch to lock out unit if fan fails.
Convenience Outlet: 115-V, ground-fault, circuit-interrupter type with factoryinstalled stepdown transformer.
Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire.
Power exhaust fan centrifugal type.
Indoor-air quality control with carbon dioxide sensor.
Smoke detector installed in supply air.
Roof Curb: Steel with corrosion-protection coating, gasketing, and factory-installed
wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards; minimum height of 14 inches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances.
B.
Curb Support: Install roof curb on roof structure, level and secure, according to NRCA's
"Low-Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb
Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Install and secure rooftop air
conditioners on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof
construction. Secure units to curb support.
C.
Unit Support: Install unit level on structural curbs. Coordinate wall penetrations and
flashing with wall construction. Secure units to structural support with anchor bolts.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15732-7
15025
B.
Install piping adjacent to units to allow service and maintenance.
1.
C.
Connect condensate drain pans using Type M copper tubing of same size as drain pan
outlet connection. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct p-trap of depth
and configuration as required for unit static pressure at connection to drain pan. Make
unit connection with flexible connector for equipment with external vibration isolators.
D.
Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection
requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.03
Install ducts to termination in roof curb.
Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out
decking under entire roof curb.
Connect supply ducts to rooftop unit with flexible duct connectors specified in
Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
Terminate return-air duct through roof structure and insulate space between roof
and bottom of unit with 2-inch- thick, acoustic duct liner.
E.
Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16
Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls.
F.
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
G.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections,
and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.04
Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section "Fuel
Gas Piping." Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and
connect with union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner
removal and service.
After installing rooftop air conditioners and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, test units for compliance with requirements.
Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15732-8
15025
B.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions
and do the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
Inspect for visible damage to unit casing.
Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber.
Inspect for visible damage to compressor, air-cooled outside coil, and fans.
Inspect internal insulation.
Verify that labels are clearly visible.
Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.
Verify that controls are connected and operable.
Verify that filters are installed.
Clean outside coil and inspect for construction debris.
Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris.
Connect and purge gas line.
Adjust vibration isolators.
Inspect operation of barometric dampers.
Lubricate bearings on fan.
Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration
and binding.
Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.
Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
a.
Start refrigeration system in summer only.
b.
Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.
Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify
sequences.
Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer.
Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing and
adjust burner for peak efficiency. Adjust pilot to stable flame.
a.
Measure gas pressure on manifold.
b.
Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber.
c.
Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge.
Calibrate thermostats.
Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits.
Inspect outside-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air
dampers.
Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following:
a.
Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.
b.
Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.
c.
Outside-air, dry-bulb temperature.
d.
Outside-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.
Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration,
and normal and emergency shutdown.
Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following:
a.
Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures.
b.
Short circuiting of air through outside coil or from outside coil to
outside-air intake.
Verify operation of remote panel, including pilot-light operation and failure
modes. Inspect the following:
a.
High-limit heat exchanger.
b.
Warm-up for morning cycle.
c.
Freezestat operation.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15732-9
15025
28.
3.05
3.06
d.
Economizer to limited outside-air changeover.
e.
Alarms.
After startup and performance testing, change filters, vacuum heat exchanger and
cooling and outside coils, lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and inspect
operation of power vents.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust initial temperature set points.
B.
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain rooftop heating/cooling units.
END OF SECTION 15732
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15732-10
15025
SECTION 15738 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
1.04
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
furnished specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C.
Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
D.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or
replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
B.
Warranty Period:
completion.
PART 2
2.01
This Section includes split-system air-conditioning units consisting of separate indoor
evaporator-fan and outdoor compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for
exposed mounting.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.05
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.03
GENERAL
One year parts, 5-years compressor from date of substantial
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
Carrier; Div. of United Technologies Corp.
Daikin AC
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15738-1
15025
3.
4.
2.02
2.03
WALL-MOUNTING, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS
A.
Cabinet: High-impact polystyrene plastic or enameled steel with removable panels on
front and ends, and discharge drain pans with drain connection. Fully insulate cabinet for
improved thermal and acoustic performance.
B.
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying
with ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve or capillary tube metering device.
C.
Fan: Tangential direct drive, centrifugal fan.
D.
Air Sweep: Automatic, motor-driven vertical air sweep.
E.
Fan Motors: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent
lubrication.
F.
Filters: Permanent, cleanable.
AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS
A.
Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls,
weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves,
fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
B.
Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration
isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices,
start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
1.
2.
2.04
Fujitsu General America, Inc.
Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc.; HVAC Division.
Compressor Type: Scroll.
Refrigerant: Non HCFC, R-410A.
C.
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying
with ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
D.
Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
E.
Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
F.
Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 0 deg F.
ACCESSORIES
A.
User Controller: Wired, wall-mounted controller to control compressor and evaporator
fan, with the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Compressor time delay.
24-hour time control of system stop and start.
Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting,
operating mode, and fan speed.
Fan-speed selection, including auto setting.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15738-2
15025
B.
Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
C.
Condensate Pump: Field-installed, automatic operation with level sensor on drain pan to
stop cooling operation if the level in drain pan is unacceptable.
D.
Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned,
dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both
ends.
PART 3
3.01
3.02
3.03
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units level and plumb. Unless otherwise specified in the manufacturer instructions,
always adhere to any recommendations for slope of equipment for condensate pans or
other specific requirements.
B.
Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices
securely fastened to building structure.
C.
Install compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting base.
D.
Connect refrigerant piping to indoor and outdoor sections; maintain required access to
unit. Install furnished field-mounted accessories.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Connect condensate drain pump using vinyl tubing of same size as drain pan outlet
connection. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain.
B.
Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Sections for power
wiring, switches, and motor controls.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15738-3
15025
3.04
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1.
3.05
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.
END OF SECTION 15738
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15738-4
15025
SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution
systems in pressure classes from minus 2-inch to plus 10-inch wg. Metal ducts include
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.03
NFPA Compliance:
1.
2.
B.
1.05
Division 15 Section "Nonmetal Ducts" for fibrous-glass ducts and thermoset FRP
ducts.
Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices,
duct-mounting access doors, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.04
Rectangular ducts and fittings.
Single-wall, round, and flat-oval ducts and formed fittings.
Double-wall, round, and flat-oval ducts and formed fittings.
Duct liner.
NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations," Ch. 3, "Duct System," for commercial kitchen hood ducts, unless otherwise
indicated.
DEFINITIONS
A.
NAIMA: North American Insulation Manufacturers Association.
B.
SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Single-wall, round, and flat-oval spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings.
Double-wall, round, and flat-oval spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings.
Duct liner.
For adhesives, sealants and mastics: Documentation including printed statement
of VOC content.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15815-1
15025
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal ducts.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Fittings.
Reinforcement and spacing.
Seam and joint construction.
Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment,
vibration isolation, and seismic restraints.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless
otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M
and having G90 coating designation. Where specifically indicated, ducts shall have
“galvaneal” (“paint-grip”) finish for surfaces to be painted.
C.
PVC-Coated Galvanized Steel: Acceptable by authorities having jurisdiction for use in
fabricating ducts with UL 181, Class 1 listing. Lock-forming-quality, galvanized sheet
steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G90 coating designation.
Factory-applied PVC coatings shall be 4 mils thick on sheet metal surfaces of ducts and
fittings exposed to corrosive conditions and 2 mils thick on opposite surfaces.
D.
Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality;
with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.
E.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316 as indicated, and having a
No. 2B finish for concealed ducts and No. 4B polished finish for exposed ducts.
F.
Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed
ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
G.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts.
H.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less;
3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
DUCT LINER
A.
Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
CertainTeed Corp.; Insulation Group; “ToughGard2” or “ToughGard R”
Duct Liner.
b.
Johns Manville International, Inc.; “Linacoustic RC” Duct Liner.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15815-2
15025
Johns Manville International, Inc.; “Spiracoustic Plus”, “Spiracoustic”
Round Duct Liner.
d.
Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.; “Duct Liner E-M”.
e.
Owens Corning.; “QuietR” Duct Liner.
Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated with
tightly bonded non-woven mat to prevent erosion of glass fibers and to facilitate
duct cleaning.
a.
Thickness: 1 inch unless otherwise indicated.
b.
Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.
c.
Anti-Bacterial and Fungal Prevention: EPA-registered anti-microbial
agent treatment in airstream surfaces applied to aid in the prevention of
fungal and bacterial growth. Comply with ASTM C 1338, ASTM G21,
ASTM G22.
d.
Maximum Emissions Levels:
1)
Formaldehyde: 0.05 ppm
2)
Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TOVC): 0.50 mg/m3
3)
Total Particles: 0.05 mg/m3
e.
Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and
smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
f.
Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with
ASTM C 916.
1)
VOC content of 100 g/L or less when calculated according to 40
CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
g.
Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for welding attachment
to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by
manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct.
1)
Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb- tensile, dead-load
test perpendicular to duct wall.
2)
Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and
without projecting more than 1/8 inch into airstream.
3)
Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with
fire-hazard classification of duct liner system.
c.
2.
2.03
SEALANT MATERIALS
A.
Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of
adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric
strips and mastics.
B.
Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound
and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard,
durable, airtight seal.
1.
C.
VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light
when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.
1.
VOC content of 100 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15815-3
15025
D.
Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing,
polymerized butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
1.
E.
Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant
complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
1.
F.
2.04
VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel
fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1.
2.
B.
Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes
or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.
Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweightaggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.
1.
2.
3.
Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods
or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after
installation.
Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel
rod diameters.
Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces
painted with zinc-chromate primer.
C.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;
compatible with duct materials.
D.
Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1.
2.
3.
2.05
VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Supports for Galvanized Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates.
Supports for Stainless Steel Ducts: Stainless steel support materials.
Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials are
electrolytically separated from ducts.
RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and
complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod
applications, and joint types and intervals.
1.
2.
Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and
rigidity class required for pressure class.
Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15815-4
15025
B.
Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using
manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and
joint reinforcement.
C.
Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible," using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.
D.
Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and
larger and 22 gage or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts
are lined.
E.
Duct Dimensions: Unless specifically indicated, duct dimensions on the Drawings are net
free areas. Increase duct dimensions as necessary to compensate for liner thickness.
F.
Elbow Configuration:
1.
G.
Branch Configuration:
1.
2.06
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." Rectangular duct elbow
configuration shall be one of the following types unless specifically indicated
otherwise:
a.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-width (R/W) ratio.
Square throat radius elbows (R/W ratio of 0.5) are not allowed.
b.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-width (R/W) ratio and
two splitter vanes.
c.
Mitered Type RE 2 with turning vanes complying with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3,
"Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
1)
Exception: Vanes not required for general purpose exhaust-air,
return-air, and relief-air ducts where duct velocity is 1000 fpm or
lower AND duct net inside area is 144 sq. in. (1.0 sq. ft.) or less.
2)
Exception: Maximum velocity limitation: 1500 fpm.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection." Rectangular duct branch
configuration shall be one of the following types unless specifically indicated
otherwise:
a.
Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.
b.
Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin-in or self-sealing fitting.
ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION
A.
Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with a
circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.
B.
Duct Dimensions: Unless specifically indicated, duct dimensions on the Drawings are net
free areas. Increase duct dimensions as necessary to compensate for liner thickness.
C.
Round, Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15815-5
15025
D.
Flat-Oval, Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts according to SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
E.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F.
Accu Duct Mfg.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Lindlab, Inc.
Semco Mfg., Inc.
Spiral Pipe of Texas
United Sheet Metal Div. United McGill Corp.
Ventline, Inc.
Duct Joints:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Ducts up to 20 Inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed
before and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws.
Ducts 21 to 72 Inches in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint
consisting of two internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with
gasket.
Ducts Larger Than 72 Inches in Diameter: Companion angle flanged joints per
SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 32.
Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped,
EPDM rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system
manufacturer's tolerances.
Flat-Oval Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of two flanges and
one synthetic rubber gasket.
G.
Tees and Lateral Taps: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal-seam
straight ducts.
H.
Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no
excess material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.
I.
Elbow Configuration:
1.
Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."
a.
Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of
direction have proportionately fewer segments.
1)
Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.
b.
Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.
c.
Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam or
welded.
d.
Segmented, adjustable type elbows are not allowed.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15815-6
15025
J.
Branch Configuration:
1.
K.
PVC-Coated Elbows and fittings: Fabricate elbows and fittings as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.07
Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and
Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct only.
a.
Velocity 1000 fpm or lower: 90-degree tap, conical tap, 45-degree tap,
or 45-degree lateral.
b.
Velocity over 1000 fpm: Conical tap, 45-degree tap, or 45-degree
lateral.
Round Elbows 4 to 8 inches in diameter: Two piece, die stamped, with
longitudinal seams spot welded, bonded, and painted with PVC aerosol spray.
Round elbows 9 to 26 inches in Diameter: Standing seam construction.
Round Elbows 28 to 60 inches Diameter: Standard gored construction, riveted
and bonded.
Other Fittings: Riveted and bonded joints.
Couplings: Slip-joint construction with a minimum 2-inch insertion length.
DOUBLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Accu Duct Mfg.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Lindab Inc.
Semco Mfg., Inc.
Spiral Pipe of Texas
United Sheet Metal Div, United McGill Corp
Ventline, Inc.
Ducts: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) ducts with an outer shell and an inner duct.
Dimensions indicated are for inner ducts.
1.
2.
3.
Outer Shell: Base metal thickness on outer-shell dimensions. Fabricate outershell lengths 2 inches longer than inner duct and insulation and in metal thickness
specified for single-wall duct.
Insulation: 1-inch- thick fibrous glass, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate
insulation where double-wall duct connects to single-wall duct or uninsulated
components, and reduce outer shell diameter to inner duct diameter.
a.
Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.
Solid Inner Ducts: Use the following sheet metal thicknesses and seam
construction:
a.
Ducts 3 to 8 Inches in Diameter: 28 gage with standard spiral-seam
construction.
b.
Ducts 9 to 42 Inches in Diameter: 28 gage with single-rib spiral-seam
construction.
c.
Ducts 44 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 26 gage with single-rib spiral-seam
construction.
d.
Ducts 62 to 88 Inches in Diameter: 22 gage with standard spiral-seam
construction.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15815-7
15025
4.
5.
C.
Perforated Inner Ducts: Fabricate with 24 gage thick sheet metal having 3/32inch- diameter perforations, with overall open area of 23 percent.
Maintain concentricity of inner duct to outer shell by mechanical means. Prevent
dislocation of insulation by mechanical means.
Fittings: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) fittings with an outer shell and an inner duct.
1.
2.
3.
Solid Inner Ducts: Use the following sheet metal thicknesses:
a.
Ducts 3 to 34 Inches in Diameter: 24 gage.
b.
Ducts 35 to 58 Inches in Diameter: 22 gage.
c.
Ducts 60 to 88 Inches in Diameter: 20 gage.
Perforated Inner Ducts: Fabricate with 28 gage sheet metal having 3/32-inchdiameter perforations, with overall open area of 23 percent.
Field- or shop-installed saddle tap fittings are not acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
DUCT APPLICATIONS
A.
Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
All ducts shall be standard galvanized steel except as follows:
1.
3.02
Supply Ducts: 1-inch wg .
Supply Ducts (before Air Terminal Units): 2-inch wg.
Supply Ducts (after Air Terminal Units): 1-inch wg.
Supply Ducts (in Mechanical Equipment Rooms): 2-inch wg.
Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.
Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.
Sawdust Collection System Ducts (Negative Pressure): 10-inch wg.
Welding Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg.
Vehicle Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg.
Clothes Dryer Exhaust Ducts: 24 gage galvanized steel, 0.04-inch thick
aluminum or Type 304, stainless steel.
DUCT INSTALLATION
A.
Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Install round duct liner products in accordance with the manufacturer's application
guidelines.
C.
Install round and flat-oval ducts in lengths not less than 10 feet unless interrupted by
fittings.
D.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E.
Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15815-8
15025
F.
Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.
Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a
minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.
G.
Secure ductwork joints and fittings for materials-handling applications such as clothes
dryers and sawdust collection systems with fastening devices that do not extend into the
duct and airstream.
H.
Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
I.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building.
J.
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
K.
Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid
partitions unless specifically indicated.
L.
Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting
layouts, and similar finished work.
M.
Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and
afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
N.
Cap or seal temporary duct openings during construction. Remove caps or seals for final
connections.
O.
Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through and above
transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
P.
Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings
and ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts.
Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
Q.
Fire Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant.
Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section”Duct Accessories.”
R.
Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to withstand, without damage to
equipment, seismic force required by applicable building codes. Refer to SMACNA's
"Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."
S.
Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed.
T.
Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches upstream of
registers and grilles where bare sheetmetal is visible from a normal viewer position.
Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a compatible galvanized-steel primer.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15815-9
15025
3.03
APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A.
Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive
coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers
of duct liner is prohibited.
B.
Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal
nosing.
C.
Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D.
Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure buttededge overlapping.
E.
Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints
necessary.
F.
Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts where air velocities are greater
than 2500 fpm.
G.
Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not
exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not
exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.
H.
Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have
either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge
facings at the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
I.
For double-wall (insulated) ducts, secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner
duct of same thickness as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that
maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation.
1.
J.
3.04
Fan discharges.
Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than
2500 fpm or where indicated.
Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open
area of 23 percent.
Terminate inner ducts with build outs attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning
vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated build outs (metal hat sections), or other
build out means are optional; when used, secure build outs to duct walls with bolts,
screws, rivets, or welds.
SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A.
Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.
1.
B.
For pressure classes 2-inch wg and lower, seal transverse joints at a minimum.
Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15815-10
15025
3.05
HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A.
Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each
branch intersection.
B.
Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor.
C.
Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of
failure (proof-test) load.
D.
Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
E.
Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
1.
3.06
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15
Section "Duct Accessories." Locate flexible connectors in sections of ductwork below
roof level for roof mounted equipment unless indicated otherwise.
B.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
END OF SECTION 15815
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15815-11
15025
SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.03
Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control dampers
and damper actuators.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
1.04
Backdraft dampers.
Volume dampers.
Turning vanes.
Duct-mounting access doors.
Flexible connectors.
Flexible ducts.
Spin-in and self-sealing take-off fittings.
Duct accessory hardware.
Residential clothes dryer vent wall box.
Backdraft dampers.
Volume dampers.
Fire dampers.
Ceiling radiation dampers.
Combination fire and smoke dampers.
Duct silencers.
Duct-mounting access doors.
Flexible connectors.
Flexible ducts.
Spin-in and self-sealing take-off fittings.
Residential clothes dryer vent wall box.
Air measuring stations and flow transmitters.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems,"
and NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B.
Comply with AMCA Standard 500 for maximum leakage rates.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15820-1
15025
1.05
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent (1 minimum) of amount
installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
1.
2.02
2.03
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers listed.
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M
and having G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for
surfaces exposed to view.
C.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M.
D.
Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed
ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
E.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063, temper T6.
F.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel
ducts.
G.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less;
3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Air Balance, Inc.
American Warming and Ventilating.
CESCO Products.
Duro Dyne Corp.
Greenheck.
Pottorff
Ruskin Company.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15820-2
15025
8.
B.
Description: Multiple-blade, parallel action gravity balanced, with blades of maximum
6-inch width, with sealed edges, assembled in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop,
adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
C.
Maximum Leakage Rates:
1.
2.
2.04
Vent Products Company, Inc.
For dampers 24 inches or smaller in either dimension: 40 cfm/sq.ft. at 1.0 inch
w.g.
For all other damper dimensions: 20 cfm/sq. ft. at 1.0 inch w.g.
D.
Frame: 0.090-inch- thick extruded aluminum, with mitered corners.
E.
Blades: 0.025-inch- thick, roll-formed aluminum.
F.
Bearings: Non-corrosive synthetic.
G.
Blade Seals: Vinyl.
H.
Blade Axles: Nonferrous.
I.
Linkage Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum, concealed in frame.
VOLUME DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen
damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a
fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal
duct consistent with pressure class.
1.
C.
Air Balance, Inc.
American Warming and Ventilating.
Greenheck.
Johnson Controls, Inc.
Nailor Industries, Inc.
Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.
Pottorff
Ruskin Company.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
Pressure Classes of 3-Inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts
with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating
shaft.
Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design, standard
leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
1.
2.
Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 16 gage,
with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for
attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 16 gage, galvanized sheet steel; maximum 6-inch
width.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15820-3
15025
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Jackshaft: 1-inch- diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly
mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
1.
E.
2.05
Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each
damper in multiple-damper assembly.
Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inchthick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit
damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
Provide concealed type regulators, utilizing miter gears and universal joints as required,
for dampers located above hard ceilings or in non-accessible locations.
TURNING VANES
A.
Manufactured Turning Vanes: Single-wall vanes of galvanized sheet steel set into vane
runners with friction insert tabs.
1.
2.06
Aluminum Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- thick, aluminum sheet channels;
frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames
where indicated for installing in ducts.
Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- thick aluminum sheet; maximum 6inch width..
Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- thick extruded aluminum; maximum 6inch width.
Blade Axles: Nonferrous.
Bearings: Molded synthetic.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
Manufacturers:
a.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b.
Duro Dyne Corp.
DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS
A.
General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
B.
Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal
with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include 1-by-1-inch
butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
1.
2.
Manufacturers:
a.
American Warming and Ventilating.
b.
CESCO Products.
c.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
d.
Greenheck.
e.
Kees.
f.
McGill AirFlow Corporation.
g.
Pottorff
h.
Nailor Industries, Inc.
i.
Ruskin Company
j.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
Frame: Minimum 22 gage galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam
gaskets.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15820-4
15025
3.
2.07
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Duro Dyne Corp.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
B.
General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives
complying with UL 181, Class 1.
C.
Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches wide
attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 24 gage, galvanized sheet steel.
D.
Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..
Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
Service Temperature: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F.
Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric:
Glass fabric double coated with
weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1.
2.
3.
2.08
Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:
a.
Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with two sash locks.
b.
Up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
c.
Up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches.
d.
Sizes 24 by 48 Inches and Larger: One additional hinge.
Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..
Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.
Service Temperature: Minus 10 to plus 250 deg F.
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Insulated-Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire; 1 inch fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative.
Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F.
Insulated-Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, springsteel wire; 1 inch fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
Hart & Cooley, Inc.
McGill AirFlow Corporation.
Thermaflex
Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.
Maximum Air Velocity: 5000 fpm.
Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 175 deg F.
Flexible Duct Clamps: Nylon strap, in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15820-5
15025
E.
2.09
Flexible Elbow: UL listed for return air plenums, molded composite material, one-piece
design to install over outside of flexible duct.
SPIN-IN AND SELF-SEALING TAKE-OFF FITTINGS
A.
Spin-in Fitting: Factory-fabricated assembly for making round take-off connections to
rectangular ducts.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Self-Sealing Fitting: Factory-fabricated assembly for making round take-off connections
to rectangular ducts.
1.
2.
3.
2.10
2.11
Galvanized sheet steel construction.
Spins into round duct opening.
Adjustable damper with locking quadrant.
Insulation guard for use with internally lined duct.
Galvanized sheet steel construction.
Neoprene seal on fitting flange for external attachment to round duct opening.
Adjustable damper with locking quadrant.
DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A.
Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw
cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of
length to suit duct insulation thickness.
B.
Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to
gasoline and grease.
RESIDENTIAL CLOTHES DRYER VENT WALL BOX
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
In-O-Vate Technologies, Inc. (www.dryerbox.com)
B.
Description: Recessed in wall dryer venting box with top outlet for 4-inch round ducting.
C.
Housing: 22 gage aluminized steel; overall dimensions 21” high x 12.5” wide x 5” deep.
D.
Schedule:
1.
Symbol “DB”: In-O-Vate Technologies, Inc. Model 425
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A.
Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116,
"Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B.
Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel
accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in
stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15820-6
15025
C.
Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where
indicated.
D.
Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
E.
Install automatic control dampers where indicated. Coordinate damper installation
requirements with Division 15 Section “HVAC Instrumentation and Controls”.
F.
Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where
branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of
two duct widths from branch takeoff.
1.
Provide concealed damper regulators for dampers located above hard ceilings
and in other non-accessible locations.
G.
Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
H.
Install ceiling radiation dampers, fire dampers, smoke dampers and fire/smoke dampers
according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions.
I.
Install duct silencers rigidly to ducts.
J.
Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories
and terminal units as follows:
1.
2.
3.
K.
On both sides of duct-mounted coils.
Adjacent to fire or fire/smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall
fusible links.
Adjacent to duct-mounted motorized dampers.
Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.
Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.
Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.
Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.
L.
Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
M.
Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with
fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators. In general, make final
duct connections with flexible connectors for units without fan internal vibration
isolation. Locate flexible connectors below roof level for rooftop equipment unless
indicated otherwise.
N.
For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and higher, cover flexible connectors
with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
O.
Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 24-inch lengths of flexible duct.
Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15820-7
15025
3.02
P.
Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts with maximum 48-inch
lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. Install sheetmetal elbow or flexible
elbow at terminal connection to prevent duct crimping.
Q.
Bends in flexible ducts shall be made with not less than 1 duct diameter centerline radius.
Do not compress ducts.
R.
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with nylon draw straps.
S.
Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
B.
Adjust fire and fire/smoke dampers for proper action.
C.
Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing,
Adjusting, and Balancing."
END OF SECTION 15820
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15820-8
15025
SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, grilles. Related
Sections include the following:
1.
1.03
Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volumecontrol dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product scheduled, include the following:
1.
2.
Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise
ratings.
Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, model
number, size, and accessories furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.02
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
2.03
Carnes
Krueger.
Nailor Industries
Price Industries.
Titus.
Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to
ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance
of equipment.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15855-1
15025
2.04
2.05
INSTALLATION
A.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B.
Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts,
fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve
design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure
drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in
lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or
other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final
location.
C.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow
service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. Install ductmounted registers and grilles in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended
procedures to assure airflow and sound performance.
ADJUSTING
A.
After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as
directed, before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 15855
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15855-2
15025
SECTION 15861 - AIR FILTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
1.03
1.04
1.06
This Section includes factory-fabricated air-filter devices and media used to remove
particulate matter from air for HVAC applications.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include dimensions; rated flow capacity, including initial and final
pressure drop at rated airflow; efficiency and test method; fire classification; furnished
specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.
B.
Maintenance Data: For each type of filter and device to include in operation and
maintenance manuals. Provide master filter schedule, listing quantity, size and type of
filter for each air handling unit or terminal unit requiring filters.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.05
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
MERV: Minimum efficiency reporting value (ASHRAE 52.2).
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
B.
ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE 52.1 and ASHRAE 52.2
for methods of testing and rating air-filter units.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
Provide one complete set of filters for each air handling unit or terminal unit
requiring filters. If system includes prefilters, provide only prefilters. Obtain
signed receipt from Owner’s representative.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15861-1
15025
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
2.02
EXTENDED-SURFACE, DISPOSABLE PANEL FILTERS
A.
Description: Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface filters with holding frames; UL
Class 2 listed.
B.
Media: Reinforced, non-woven cotton/synthetic blend media formed into deep-V-shaped
pleats and held by self-supporting wire grid.
C.
Media and Media-Grid Frame: Nonflammable, moisture-resistant beverage board with
diagonal and horizontal support members on the upstream and downstream sides.
D.
Thickness: 2 inch
E.
Performance:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.03
Air Filters:
a.
AAF International.
b.
Airguard Industries, Inc.
c.
Camfil/Farr
d.
Flanders-PrecisionAire
e.
Glasfloss Industries
f.
Purolator Products.
g.
Research Products Corp.
Filter Gages:
a.
Dwyer Instruments Inc.
Average efficiency: 25-30% (ASHRAE 52.1)
MERV: 8 (ASHRAE 52.2)
Average arrestance: 90-92%
Initial (clean) resistance: 0.25-0.30 inch wg. at 500 fpm.
Recommended final (changeout) resistance: 0.9 inch wg.
FILTER GAGES
A.
Description: Diaphragm type with dial and pointer in metal case, vent valves, black
figures on white background, and front recalibration adjustment.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Diameter: 4-1/2 inches.
Range: 0- to 2.0-inch wg.
Range: 0- to 4.0-inch wg.
Accessories: Static-pressure tips, tubing, gage connections, and mounting bracket as
required for application.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15861-2
15025
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Install filter frames according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance.
C.
Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air.
D.
Install filter gage for each air handling unit filter bank where not factory installed.
E.
Install filter gage static-pressure tips upstream and downstream from filters to measure
pressure drop through filter. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter
plenum in an accessible position.
F.
Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling unit installations.
G.
Clean filter housings after completing system installation and install new filters in all air
handling equipment prior to testing, adjusting and balancing.
H.
Where allowed, install filters in all air handling equipment used for temporary heating or
air circulation. Filters shall be disposable type, not less than 25-30% efficiency and shall
be inspected frequently during construction to prevent damage to equipment and
accumulation of debris in duct systems. Air handling equipment shall not be operated
without filters in place.
END OF SECTION 15861
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15861-3
15025
SECTION 15900 - AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section.
B.
Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” apply to this Section.
MECHANICAL PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
1.03
1.04
1.05
Comply with requirements of Division 15 Section “Mechanical Project Closeout”, in addition
to any specific requirements of this Section.
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Furnish and install all control equipment, engineering services, job drawings and field
supervision for automatic temperature control systems described in this Section and/or
indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing" scope of work. Provide
assistance as required for DDC System adjustments, manipulation of operational sequences,
etc. for HVAC systems balancing.
SERVICE AND GUARANTEE
A.
The temperature control system(s) as herein specified shall be free from defects in
workmanship and material under normal use and service. If within one (1) year from date of
Acceptance by the Owner, any of the equipment herein described is proved to be defective in
workmanship or material, it shall be replaced or repaired at no expense to the Owner.
B.
The Contractor shall, after completion of the original test of the installation and Acceptance
by the Owner, provide any service incidental to the proper performance of the temperature
control system under guarantees outlined above for the period of one (1) year, after
completion of the installation, the Contractor shall regulate and adjust all equipment provided.
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products which have been tested, listed and labeled
by UL and comply with NEMA standards.
B.
NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to components and devices
for electric control systems.
C.
NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" where applicable to controls and control sequences.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15900-1
15025
1.06
SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the General
Conditions and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including
manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, control sequences, catalog cuts, and
installation instructions. Shop drawings shall also contain complete wiring and wiring
routing, routing, schematic diagrams, tag number of devices, software descriptions,
calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been and will
function properly. Drawings shall show proposed layout and installation of all equipment and
the relationship to other parts of the work.
B.
Shop drawings shall be approved before any equipment is installed. Therefore, shop
drawings must be submitted in time for review so that all installations can be completed per
the project's completion schedule.
C.
All drawings shall be reviewed after the final system checkout and updated or corrected to
provide Record Drawings to show exact installation. Furnish three (3) sets of Record
Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A.
2.02
Provide electric control products in sizes and capacities indicated, consisting of dampers,
thermostats, sensors and other components as required for complete installation. Except as
otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard control system components as indicated
by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by
manufacturer as indicated.
ROOM THERMOSTAT
A.
Programmable type with seven day programming for two occupied and two unoccupied
periods per day; individual occupied and unoccupied set points; three hour override of
unoccupied program with automatic return to programmed schedule; battery back-up with
rechargeable nicad battery; fan "auto" cycle available for both occupied and unoccupied
cycles; automatic changeover on heating/cooling sequences. Thermostat shall be Honeywell
TB7220, or equal. Coordinate with rooftop unit specifications.
B.
Provide clear heavy duty polycarbonate locking thermostat cover for all thermostats in public
areas RTU-8, 10, 11 (Alt. #6), 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, and 18.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
ELECTRICAL
A.
Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and roughing-in
drawings, and details on drawings. Install electrical components and use electrical products
complying with requirements of applicable Division 16 sections of these specifications. All
system controllers, junction boxes, etc. shall be mounted at readily accessible and convenient
locations and heights.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15900-2
15025
3.02
B.
Room Temperature Sensors and Thermostats - Mounting Heights:
C.
Room temperature sensors and thermostats with occupant adjustment capabilities shall be
mounted with the highest operable part at 54 inches above finished floors where the clear
floor space allows parallel approach by a person in a wheelchair.
D.
Room temperature sensors and thermostats with occupant adjustment capabilities shall be
mounted with the highest operable part at 48 inches above finished floors where the clear
floor space allows only forward approach by a person in a wheelchair.
E.
Room temperature sensors and thermostats without occupant adjustment capabilities shall be
mounted at 60 inches above finished floors. unless otherwise specifically indicated on the
Drawings.
F.
Control Wiring: The term “control wiring” is defined to include providing of wire, conduit
and miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connecting electrical control
devices.
G.
Wiring System: Install complete control wiring system for electric control systems. Conceal
wiring, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed.
Provide multi-conductor instrument harness (bundle) in place of single conductors where
number of conductors can be run along common path. Fasten flexible conductor's bridging
cabinets and doors, neatly along hinge side, and protect against abrasion. Tie and support
conductors neatly.
ADJUSTMENTS
A.
After completion of installation, adjust thermostats, dampers, motors and similar equipment
provided as work of this section.
PART 4 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
4.01
ROOFTOP UNIT "RTU-8 THROUGH RTU-19"
A.
The heating and cooling setpoints shall be individually adjustable for both occupied and
unoccupied periods. The thermostat shall be capable of a deadband of 5 deg. F (no
mechanical heating or cooling shall operate within this deadband). Space temperature
deviation above cooling setpoint or below the heating setpoint shall generate a demand signal
to control the system as follows:
B.
Heating
1.
2.
The thermostat shall control the heating output based on the demand signal
communicated from the thermostat program, taking into account both space
temperature deviation and the duration of that temperature deviation.
The outdoor air damper shall be at the set minimum position during the occupied
period, and shall be closed during the unoccupied period of the heating mode.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15900-3
15025
C.
Cooling
1.
The thermostat shall control the cooling outputs based on the demand signal
communicated from the thermostat program, taking into account both space
temperature deviation and the duration of that temperature deviation. Unit mounted
controls shall enable economizer as first stage of cooling whenever OSA temperate is
lower than return air temp.
D.
CO2 control of OSA - During occupied periods, modulate outside-air damper open on rising
carbon dioxide concentrations, overriding normal damper operation to maintain maximum
carbon dioxide level of 1000 ppm +/- 100 ppm as determined by carbon dioxide sensor.
Maintain minimum mixed-air temperature limit of 50 deg F (adj.). Coordinate with Rooftop
unit specifications.
E.
Heating Setback and Cooling Setup:
1.
Initiation of heating setback or cooling setup for each of 7 days shall be provided by a
programmed time schedule manually entered into the thermostat. When all or a
portion of a manually programmed schedule is unavailable, the thermostat shall
control the unavailable program functions to occupied mode and default setpoint
ranges as follows:
Heating
Cooling
2.
3.
F.
Setpoint Recovery from Unoccupied to Occupied
The thermostat shall employ "Intelligent Recovery (tm)". This shall select the
optimum time to begin building warm-up or cool-down based on setpoints and
occupied program.
Fan Operation
1.
2.
G.
TABLE OF DEFAULT SETPOINT RANGES
OCCUPIED deg. F
UNOCCUPIED deg. F
70
55
76
90
Fan operation shall be constant during the occupied period.
Fan operation shall be intermittent during the unoccupied period.
Heating and Cooling Operation Minimum On/off Times
1.
The thermostat shall incorporate a program to maintain minimum-stage operation
times of 2 minutes "on" and 4 minutes "off" for compressor stages, and 2 minutes
"on" and 2 minutes "off" for gas heat.
END OF SECTION 15900
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15900-4
15025
SECTION 15955 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE
A.
The air distribution systems shall be balanced by an independent testing, adjusting and
balancing (TAB) firm or an Engineering firm with a minimum five years experience in
HVAC design and balancing. The TAB firm shall furnish the necessary instruments for
making tests, perform balancing work, and issue a certified report of balancing work
performed. Balancing reports shall be AABC, NEBB certified or shall be certified by a
Registered Professional Mechanical Engineer registered in the State where the project is
located.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
TAB work shall not be started until such time as the following conditions are completely
fulfilled:
1.
2.
3.
3.02
INSTRUMENTS
A.
3.03
Systems shall be completely installed and shall have been successfully test run,
and fully operational.
Outlets, dampers, balancing devices, and accessories shall be completely
installed.
Filters shall be clean.
Instruments used for TAB measurements shall be accurate and calibration histories for
each instrument shall be available for examination.
PROCEDURES FOR AIR SYSTEMS
A.
TAB for air systems shall include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Set supply fans at design speeds and record average amperage readings on all fan
motor phases, static pressures and cfm of air flow in each system.
Read air flows at diffusers and grilles with a flow hood or equal air measuring
device. Adjust dampers as required.
Adjust outside air dampers to scheduled minimum cfm.
Adjust fans as required to meet design airflows.
Check for drafts, noise and vibration.
After balancing is complete, mark final position of balancing dampers.
Report any discrepancies.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15955-1
15025
3.04
PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A.
TAB for hydronic systems shall include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.05
TOLERANCES
A.
Set HVAC system airflow rates within the following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.06
Determine total flow by the use of flow meters. With full flow, record total pump
head and compare with pump curve and record amperage. Pump curves with
operating point indicated shall be included in the balancing report. Record and
adjust flow to each coil or terminal by adjusting flow control.
If manual calibrated balancing type valves are used, record each coil or terminal,
indicate valve type and size. Record and adjust flow to each coil or terminal by
adjusting valve.
If automatic, pre-set type valves are used, record each coil or terminal and valve
pressure drop; indicate valve type and size. Make spot checks on flow of
approximately 20 percent of the valves and record results.
Report any discrepancies.
Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: +/- 10 percent.
Air Outlets and Inlets: +/- 10 percent.
REPORTS
A.
Submit, on neat and legible forms, the full, certified report of systems operation, initial
and final readings.
B.
Upon completion of TAB of air systems prepare a complete and legible preliminary
report. Submit 2 copies for review.
C.
Upon verification and approval of the preliminary report, prepare final certified report.
Furnish one copy to the Architect, and the remaining 3 copies are to be included in the
Owner's Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
END OF SECTION 15955
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
15955-2
15025
SECTION 16010 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
1.03
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
SCOPE OF WORK – GENERAL
A.
This section specifies general requirements for electrical installations and includes
requirements common to more than one section of Division 16. It expands and
supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division 1.
B.
Provide materials, labor, transportation, tools, permits, facilities, fees, inspections,
utilities and incidentals necessary for the complete installation of electrical work
indicated and described in the Contract Documents.
C.
It is the intent of the Contract Documents to provide an installation complete in every
respect. In the event that additional details or special construction is required for work
indicated or specified under this section of work or work specified in other sections,
provide material and equipment which is usually furnished with such systems in order to
complete the installation, whether mentioned or not.
D.
All work shown and/or specified shall be completely installed and connected in a first
calls and workmanlike, professional manner. Work shall be complete in all details.
E.
All work shall be performed by trade technicians properly qualified to perform the work
required. System-specific sub contractors shall be hired (as required) to furnish and
install the system.
F.
Workmanship shall comply with the National Electrical Installation Standards (NEIS),
published by the National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA).
G.
All work shall be done in accordance with system manufacturer’s instructions,
recommendations, and requirements, with the exception where the drawings or
specifications indicate other detailed instructions.
SEQUENCE OF WORK
A.
Conduct work in sequence to provide least possible interference to the activities of the
Agency, and to permit orderly transfer of activities and equipment to completed areas.
B.
Work shall be substantially complete by the dates listed in Division 1 Section,
“Summary”.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16010-1
15025
C.
1.04
ALTERNATES
A.
1.05
1.06
Refer to Division 0 Section, “Instruction to Bidders” for phased construction
requirements. The Library will be occupied during the entire construction period;
coordinate with the Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and
facilitate Library usage. Perform work so as not to interfere with Library’s operations.
Refer to Division 1 Section, “Alternates” for description of alternates. Review Contract
Documents for additional information.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Provide: Furnish and install complete and ready for intended use.
B.
Indicated: Indicated on drawings.
C.
Noted: Noted on Drawings or in Specifications.
D.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above
ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
E.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished
occupied spaces and mechanical and electrical equipment rooms.
F.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
G.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical
contact by building occupants and hidden from sight. Examples include above ceilings,
within finished walls and in chases or furred spaces.
H.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters and utility vaults.
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
Code Compliance: Comply with most current adopted edition of following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
International Building Code (IBC), Standards and Amendments.
International Mechanical Code (IMC), Standards and Amendments.
International Fire Code (IFC) Standards and Amendments.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
National Electrical Code (NEC); NFPA 70.
American with Disabilities Act (ADA).
Applicable State and local codes, laws and ordinances.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16010-2
15025
B.
Standards and Regulations Compliance: Comply with most current adopted edition of
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
1.07
1.08
Comply with Contract Document requirements which exceed minimum code and
standards requirements.
SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
A.
Comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations of any public authority
for the safety of persons and property, including requirements of the Idaho Division of
Building Safety and/or the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) and Division 1,
General and Supplementary Conditions.
B.
Comply with any and all safety code, rules, regulations, and standards of the City of
Lewiston.
PERMITS AND FEES
A.
1.09
BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM),
Standards/Practices and Amendments.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), Standards/Practices and
Amendments.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B, Standards and Amendments.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B, Standards and Amendments.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A, Standards and Amendments.
ANSI J-STD-607-A, Standards and Amendments.
Obtain and pay for required permits and fees necessary to fully complete work included
in the Contract Documents.
INTENT AND INTERPRETATION
A.
Drawings and Specifications supplement each other and any details contained in one and
not the other shall be included as if contained in both. Items not specifically mentioned
in the specifications or noted on the drawings, but which are obviously necessary to
make a complete working installation shall be provide to make a complete and working
installation ready for intended use.
B.
Drawings are partly diagrammatic and do not necessarily show exact location of new
equipment, conduits, and existing utilities, unless specifically dimensioned. Size and
location of equipment are drawn to scale where possible, however some graphic symbols
may be distorted dimensionally to obtain clarity in representation.
C.
Approximate location of each item is indicated on the drawings. These drawings are not
intended to give complete and exact details in regard to location. Exact locations are to
be determined by actual measurements at the building(s).
D.
Riser and other diagrams are schematic only and do not necessarily show the physical
arrangement of equipment. They shall not be used for obtaining quantities or lineal runs
of conduit and conductors.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16010-3
15025
1.10
E.
Drawings generally indicate required minimum allowable size, quantity and type of
conductors and points of termination of conduits. Routing or total number of conduits
required for circuits are not indicated. Provide additional conduits as required to
complete installation for specific equipment furnished.
F.
Receptacles, switches, and other devices shall be located symmetrically with
Architectural elements and coordinated with equipment or devices furnished in other
Sections. Devices shall be centered on windows, wall spaces, or other items, unless
specifically dimensioned otherwise.
G.
Electrical drawings shall serve as working drawings for Division 16 work. Refer to
architectural documents for additional information which may effect the installation of
electrical work such as mechanical equipment. Architectural drawings shall take
precedence over the electrical drawings if any dimensional discrepancies exist.
SUBMITTAL OF EQUIPMENT FOR APPROVAL
A.
Refer to Division 1 Section, “Submittals” for submittal definitions, requirements and
procedures. Additional requirements are listed below.
B.
Shop drawings, catalog information, and material schedules shall be submitted for
approval of materials and equipment prior to ordering. The submitter is to provide riser
and interconnection wiring diagrams for the following low voltage systems:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Fire Alarm Notification and Detection
Security and Access Control
Sound Systems
Audio/Video
Telecommunications
C.
Provide detailed riser and interconnecting wiring diagrams for required systems if not
specifically indicated on the drawings.
D.
Submittal data shall clearly identify electrical components, devices and accessories as
listed and labeled by Underwriter’s Laboratory, or other testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
E.
Clearly mark submittals as to which items, options, colors, model, etc are to be
furnished.
F.
Submittals not meeting the following requirements will be returned for revision:
1.
2.
3.
Provide a cover page for each item or group of items. Cover page shall provide a
3” x 5” space for Engineer’s review stamp.
Each cover page must be clearly identified with the project name, specification
number and paragraph number.
Submittal package must be accompanied by an itemized index listing
specification section, paragraph number, item and manufacturer; larger projects
will be index tabbed by specification section with index for each section.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16010-4
15025
1.11
GUARANTEE
A.
1.12
Guarantee satisfactory operation of material and equipment installed under Division 16.
Repair or replace any defective materials, equipment, or workmanship which may show
itself within one year from date of Substantial Completion.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Furnish to the Engineer, a breakdown of the Contract work in Divisions 16 within thirty
(30) days of the Notice to Proceed.
B.
The breakdown shall list cost for materials and labor as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
Miscellaneous Overhead Expenses
Mobilization
Permits
Panelboards
Panelboard Labor
Feeder Conduit and Conductors Material
Feeder and Conductors Labor
Branch Circuit Conduit and Conductors Material
Branch Circuit Conduit and Conductors Labor
Device Material
Device Labor
Lighting Fixtures
Lighting Fixture Labor
Fire Alarm and Detection System
Fire Alarm and Detection System Labor
Telecommunication Systems
Telecommunication Systems Labor
Access Control System
Access Control System Labor
Sound Systems
Sound Systems Labor
Equipment Connections
Commissioning Activities
Project Closeout:
a.
O&M Manuals
b.
Record Documents
c.
Owner Training
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
A.
Materials used under this Contract, unless specifically noted otherwise, shall be new and
of the latest and most current model line produced by the manufacturer. Outdated “new”
equipment is not acceptable.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16010-5
15025
B.
2.02
Electrical components, devices, and accessories to be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Throughout these Contract Documents, various materials, equipment, apparatus, etc., are
specified by manufacturer, brand name, and type or catalog number. Such designation is
to establish standards of desired quality and construction and shall be the basis of the
bid.
B.
Where more than one manufacturer is listed, and only one manufacturer's catalog number
is indicated, that standard of quality and construction shall be maintained by materials
supplied by other manufacturer(s).
C.
Substitutions of equipment or materials shall be made only with written prior approval.
Prior approval requests must be received at least ten (10) days prior to bid date unless
otherwise instructed. Refer to Division1 Section, “Product Requirements” for procedures
in requesting substitutions.
D.
Acceptance of substitution request signifies manufacturer recognition only. No attempt
has been made to check each item as to special features, capacities, or physical
dimensions required by this project. Verify requirements before submitting for approval.
Acceptance of exact features, sizes, capacities, etc., all of which must meet or exceed
design requirements will be determined when submitted during the construction phase.
E.
The Contractor shall bear full responsibility for substituted equipment and materials,
including, but not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Costs.
Available space requirements.
Effect on other trades.
Changes in electrical requirements
Changes in structural requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
COORDINATION
A.
Refer to Division 1 Section “Coordination”.
B.
Coordinate available space for equipment and systems with other trades. Refer to
Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings for additional building details
necessary for coordination.
C.
Cutting, patching, wiring, finishing or any other work required for relocation of work
installed due to interferences between various trades will be at no additional cost to the
Owner.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16010-6
15025
3.02
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Comply with Division 1 Section, “Execution Requirements” for general requirements for
cutting and patching.
B.
All cutting, drilling and patching that must be done in order that work is properly
installed. All work of this nature is subject to the following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.03
MANAGEMENT OG CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A.
3.04
3.05
3.06
All disturbed construction or finish must be made good.
Structural work shall not be disturbed, except on approval of the project
architect.
In general, cutting through floors, walls and partitions is to be avoided and only
where absolutely necessary will same be permitted. When necessary, it shall be
done in a careful manner and the opening filled about conduits as directed by the
architect. Holes through concrete or masonry shall be made only with a core
drill. Obtain permission from architect for each individual opening.
All masonry or other finish damaged or cut into during the installation of this
work must be replaced or repaired with materials of like kind and quality as the
original materials by skilled labor, experienced in that particular building trade.
Comply with Division 1 waste management and disposal procedures. Separate and
segregate recyclable materials by type.
CLEANUP
A.
At the time of final cleanup, all fixtures and equipment, new or existing, shall be
thoroughly cleaned and left in condition for use. All debris and unused materials shall be
removed from the construction site, leaving the premises in a clean condition.
B.
Site shall be kept clean on a day-to-day basis.
SLEEVES
A.
Sleeves: EMT conduit with insulated throat bushings for each end.
B.
Provide sleeves where required, sized as noted on the Contract Documents. Where not
noted, sleeve sizing shall be determined by the type and quantity of cable to be routed
through the sleeve per TIA/EIA 569A cable capacity standards, plus an additional 100%
for future expansion.
C.
Provide roto-hammering or core drilling where required for installation.
D.
Seal between sleeve and wall or floor in which the sleeve is installed.
penetration to restore wall or floor to pre-penetration fire-rating.
Firestop
PAINTING
A.
Paint all exposed conduits, raceways, multi-outlet assemblies and panelboard trim as
directed by architect.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16010-7
15025
B.
3.07
Comply with Division 9 Section “Paints and Coatings” requirements for painting.
TESTS
A.
All work shall be complete in every respect and shall be tested and approved satisfactory
to the architect and in accordance with the local, state and federal regulations governing
the installation.
B.
Be responsible for making any and all tests necessary to insure against concealment of
defective materials and/or workmanship.
C.
Determine, by test, that all wiring and connections are free from shorts between wires
and shorts to ground and that all circuits have proper continuity.
D.
All defects shall be corrected and retested before installation of fixtures and equipment.
E.
Installed systems shall be tested for conformity to specifications and for proper
operation. Provide certification and/or documentation as described in the following
individual Division 16 Sections:
1.
2.
3.
F.
3.08
3.09
Typical tests shall include outlet polarity, insulation resistance, large circuit breaker
tests, surge suppression systems, phase relationships and load balance.
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Furnish proper equipment and/or materials required for installation as intended by the
manufacturer, for all work described under Division 16. If needed for proper installation
or operation, request advice and supervisory assistance from the representative of the
specific manufacturer. Manufacturer's published instructions shall be followed for
preparing, assembling, installing, erecting, and cleaning manufactured materials or
equipment, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Promptly notify the architect in writing of any conflict between the requirements of the
Contract Documents and the manufacturer's directions and obtain the architect's
instructions before proceeding with the work.
SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A.
3.10
Section 16720
Section 16727
Section 16751
Newly installed equipment, devices, conduits, fixtures, raceways, etc shall be installed
with seismic restraints in accordance with requirements of the latest edition of the
International Building Code.
EXAMINATION OF SITE
A.
Visit site of proposed work and become familiar with conditions affecting work prior to
bid.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16010-8
15025
B.
3.11
3.12
CONTINUITY OF SERVICES
A.
Minimize interruption of existing electrical services and systems (power, fire alarm,
telephone, intercom, etc) during construction phase. Prior to shutting off any existing
services or systems, obtain permission from the architect and a designated representative
of the Library at least one (1) week prior to the shutdown.
B.
Schedule all work to assure continuity of electrical services or systems. Provide
additional temporary feeders, wiring, panels, etc. as required at no additional cost to the
Agency and/or Owner to assure continuity during construction.
SITE UTILITY SERVICES
A.
3.13
Existing sidewalks, concrete paving, curbs, or asphalt paving removed or damaged
during period of installation or as a result thereof, shall be replaced with like material in
a manner as directed by and to the satisfaction of the Architect. Comply with Division 2
requirements.
OPENINGS IN CONDUITS
A.
3.16
Locations of equipment and devices, as shown on the drawings, are approximate unless
dimensioned. Exact locations of such items shall be determined from the Construction
Drawings. Verify physical dimensions of each component of electrical equipment, to fit
available space and promptly notify the architect prior to roughing-in if conflicts appear.
Coordinate equipment to available space and access routes through construction. Offsets
in conduits required for proper system installation shall be provided at no additional cost
to Owner.
REPLACEMENT OF PAVING AND CONCRETE
A.
3.15
Where applicable, make connections to temporary electrical service immediately so as to
provide the use of this service by other traces. Comply with Division 01 Section
“Temporary Facilities and Controls” requirements.
LAYING OUT WORK
A.
3.14
Verify measurements at the building before beginning work.
Cap or seal temporary openings in conduits or raceways during construction. Remove
caps or seals for final connections.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types,
grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications;
adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and
handling.
B.
Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing.
Protect stored equipment and materials from damage.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16010-9
15025
C.
3.17
3.18
Coordinate deliveries of electrical materials and equipment to minimize construction site
congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities
needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations.
ACCESSIBILITY
A.
Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and
maintenance. Coordinate location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access
with location of access panels and doors.
B.
Allow ample space for removal of parts that require replacement or servicing.
C.
Access Doors: Prime coated 14 gauge steel, and flush, with screwdriver operated cam
lock, frame to accommodate construction type. Access doors, shall be manufactured by
Acudor, Elmdor or approved equivalent. See Division 08 section “Access Doors and
Frames.”
FIRESTOPPING
A.
Material: Conform to both Flame (F) and Temperature (T) ratings as required by local
building codes and as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E814 or UL
1479 fire test in a configuration that is representative of the actual field conditions.
Manufactured by:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Specified Tech., Inc.
Metacaulk
Dow Corning
3M Fire Protection Products
Tremco Sealants and Coatings
B.
Firestopping Materials: Firestopping materials shall emit no toxic or combustible fumes,
and shall allow for normal movement of the building structure and the penetrating
elements without adversely affecting the adhesion or integrity of the firestopping system.
C.
Openings in fire-rated walls, ceilings, or floors shall be protected by maintaining an
effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, and gases. Where the penetrating
elements are cables, corrugated plastic ducts, or other combustible items, firestopping
materials shall be intumescent type. Firestopping shall consist of UL listed fire-rated
assemblies and shall be installed in accordance with UL approved installation details.
END OF SECTION 16010
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16010-10
15025
SECTION 16015 – ELECTRICAL PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to work of this section.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK - GENERAL
A.
This section specifies procedural requirements for electrical installations project
closeout, including but not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.03
Division 1 Section “Submittal Procedures”.
Division 1 Section “Closeout Procedures.”
Project Record Document submittal.
Operation and Maintenance Manual submittal.
Operation and Maintenance Instruction and Training.
Electrical Equipment and Systems Start-Up.
Final Cleaning.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Record differences between electrical Work as installed and as shown in Contract
Drawings on a set of dedicated electrical “as-built” plans. Plans to be obtained from the
Architect. Return the finished plans to the Architect at completion of the project.
Notations made on drawings shall be neat and legible using red ink only. Mistakes or
corrections shall be crossed out and the correction made next to it. Comply with Division
1 Section requirements.
B.
Mark drawings to indicate the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Revisions to conduits and conductors; size and location both exterior and
interior.
Revisions to branch circuiting.
Revisions to device and outlet location and/or height.
Revisions to lighting fixture locations.
Concealed equipment and/or devices.
Installed location of all underground site utilities including but not limited
power, telecommunication, and future conduit raceways.
C.
Revise equipment and fixture schedules on the plans to indicate actual installed
manufacturer and model numbers.
D.
Mark specifications to indicate change orders; actual equipment and materials used.
E.
Record the following information for each connected motor and equipment item:
1.
Nameplate data (volts, amps, phase)
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16015-1
15025
2.
3.
F.
1.04
Actual current drawn by each equipment item and each motor larger than 1/3
horsepower when operating at or near normal load.
Rating and catalog number or each thermal overload device finally selected for
each motor over 1/3 horsepower.
Record the voltage between phases and between each phase and neutral, and the actual
current in each phase at each panel with normal load applied.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Prepare and submit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals for electrical systems
provided. Comply with Division 1 Section requirements.
B.
Manual binder shall have permanent lettering of a contrasting color.
C.
Information to be included on the binder cover is as follows:
ELECTRICAL
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
LEWISTON CITY LIBRARY
LEWISTON IDAHO
2016
OWNER:
(NAME)
ARCHITECT:
CASTELLAW KOM ARCHITECS
ELECTRICAL ENGINEER:
L&S ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC.
GENERAL CONTRACTOR:
(NAME)
ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR: (NAME)
1.
2.
Information to be included on the binder spine is as follows:
ELECTRICAL O & M MANUAL (Year)
(Project Name)
D.
Provide master index at beginning of Manual showing sections and items included. Use
plastic tab indexes for sections of Manual.
E.
Cover section: List name, address, and phone number of Project Architect, General
Contractor, Electrical Engineer, Electrical Contractor and all Electrical Sub-Contractors.
Provide a list of equipment suppliers with address and phone number.
F.
Provide a separate section for each Section of the Specifications. Provide index for each
section listing equipment included. Include all items specified.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16015-2
15025
G.
Include descriptive literature of each manufactured item (catalog cut sheets, etc).
Literature shall show capacities and size of equipment used and be marked indicating
each specific item with applicable data underlined. Data sheets shall be originals or
clean copies of originals. Copies of faxes are not acceptable.
H.
Include copies of approved submittals or shop drawings for all items requiring submittal.
I.
One (1) copy of the O&M Manual shall be submitted for review and approval by the
Design Engineer. After approval, submit three (3) copies of the manual to the Architect
for approval, unless otherwise directed by Division 1 Section requirements.
J.
Information to be included in O&M Manual:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.05
Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations,
performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and
commercial numbers of all replaceable parts.
Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine
and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping shut-down, and
emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.
Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and
troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting
instructions.
Itemized listing of lamp type and source for all installed lighting fixtures.
Sequence of operation for each installed system.
Test records and certifications.
Equipment start-up reports.
Warranty information and letters of guarantee.
K.
Complete O&M Manual shall be available for use by Owner's representatives during
instruction and training sessions.
L.
Provide electronic files of approved O&M Manual.
Division 1 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data”.
Comply with requirements of
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING
A.
Instruct Owner's Representative(s) in the Operation and Maintenance procedures
described in Operation and Maintenance Manual. Comply with Division 1 Section
requirements.
B.
Enlist services of qualified personnel, including each sub-trade and factory trained
specialists for each major piece of equipment, to attend training sessions and provide
operation and maintenance instructions.
C.
Submit training agenda, schedule and list of representatives to Design Engineer for
review 30 days prior to training sessions. Confirm attendance by written notification to
all participants.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16015-3
15025
D.
Prepare checklist of all equipment and systems requiring instruction and maintenance for
verification and agreement by the Owner's Representative of satisfactory start-up and
instruction. Checklist shall include a statement of completion by the Contractor, date and
topic(s) covered in each training session, and an attendance list of all participants at each
training session. Submit a copy of checklist to Design Engineer for review 30 days prior
to training sessions. Include copy of the completed checklist in Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
E.
Minimum instruction time shall be 8 hours, unless otherwise specifically noted. Refer to
individual Division 16 Sections for additional instruction/training requirements.
F.
All electrical systems shall be properly functioning prior to instruction period.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.01
2.02
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS START-UP
A.
Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect unit
installation, provide start-up service and demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance
personnel.
B.
Include certification of factory-authorized representative status as part of equipment
submittal from manufacturer.
C.
Include written start-up reports with test data for equipment in Operation and
Maintenance Manual.Required Equipment items shall include the following:Section
16561, 16720, 16727, and 16751.
FINAL CLEANING
A.
Refer to Division 1 Section general requirements for final cleaning.
B.
At time of final cleanup, clean all lighting fixtures, devices and equipment and leave in
condition for use intended. Vacuum cabinet interiors of control panels, mechanical units,
etc. to remove all electrical construction debris.
END OF SECTION 16015
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16015-4
15025
SECTION 16020 – ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specifications, apply to work of this section.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.02
1.03
Division 1 Section, “Summary” for phasing requirements.
Division 1 Section, “Cutting and Patching”.
Division 1 Section, “Selective Demolition” for general demolition requirements
and procedures.
SUMMARY
A.
Include all labor, equipment, and materials necessary to complete demolition of existing
electrical systems as shown on the drawings and described herein.
B.
Electrical services to areas occupied by Owner shall be maintained. If interruptionof
service is necessary, coordinate and schedule work with owner to minimize interruption.
C.
Remove and dispose of all transformers and related equipment which contain
polychlorinated biphenals (PCB’s) in full compliance with EPA regulations.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site,
unless idicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to
Owner.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse,
and reinstall them where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that
are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and
reinstalled.
PART 2 - SALVAGE
2.01
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
The Owner shall have first salvage rights to all removed lighting fixtures and equipment.
Coordinate selection with the Owner's Representative.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16020-1
15025
B.
Except for items or materials to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled or otherwise indicated to
remain owner’s property, demolished materials shall become Contractor’s property and
removed from Project site.
C.
Transport and legally dispose of off site, all materials resulting from demolition not
being salvaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
CONTINUITY OF SERVICE
A.
Obtain permission from the Architec and Owner’s Representative prior to interruption of
existing electrical systems. Reconnect existing circuit loads were necessary.
B.
Where live circuits are encountered during demolition, relocate and/or extend the circuits
as required to accommodate the construction.
C.
Protect, brace and support existing active electrical circuits or equipment as required.
D.
Circuits damaged during work of this contract shall be repaired. Data cables shall be
replaced from termination jack to patch panel.
E.
Schedule work to avoid interruptions to the occupied facilities. The Owner may require
work to be performed on nights, weekends, or holidays. Include overtime work as
necessary.
DEMOLITION
A.
Condition and Premises: The Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to
be demolished. General conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes
will be maintained by Owner.
B.
Not all conduit, devices or equipment are shown on drawings. Other demolition may be
required.
C.
Partial Removal: Items of salvageable value to Contractor indicated to be removed, may
be removed from structure as work progresses. Salvaged items must be transported from
site as they are removed. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.
D.
Protections: Ensure safe passage of persons around area of demolition. Conduct
operations to prevent injury to adjacent buildings, structures, other facilities, and
persons.
E.
Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition operations
at no cost to Owner.
F.
Existing Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain, keep in service
and protect against damage during demolition operations.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16020-2
15025
G.
Cut and/or patch and repair all existing floor, wall and roof penetrations not being
re-used. Comply with Division 1 Section requirements.
H.
All roof penetrations that are re-used shall be inspected and made air and water tight.
I.
Cut and remove buried raceway and conductors, indicated to be abandoned in place, 2
inches below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to
match existing finish.
J.
Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect and make operational components indicated for
relocation.
END OF SECTION 16020
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16020-3
15025
SECTION 16110 – RACEWAY SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
PROVISIONS
A.
All line voltage and low voltage wires and cables shall be enclosed in a raceway unless
specifically noted otherwise.
B.
All raceways shall be concealed in finished spaces unless noted otherwise.
C.
Separate raceway systems shall be provided for each of the various wiring systems.
D.
Raceways for telecommunication cabling shall comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA Standards 568
and 569.
E.
All conduit and electrical power required for special systems shall be furnished and installed
by the Electrical Contractor as part of the overall Division 16 work.
F.
Provide a complete raceway system for all mechanical system low voltage controls.
Coordinate with mechanical contractor. Review all related specifications and drawings for
extent of work.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
All provisions of the contract including Division 1 apply to work specified in each section of
this Division 16.
B.
See Sections 16010, 16120, 16134, and 16190.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Complete manufacturer's data, including catalog cuts.
B.
Submit parts replacement/ordering information as part of O & M Manuals.
C.
All submittals shall be made in accordance with requirements of Section 16010 and Division
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PROHIBITED MATERIALS
A.
“Pot-metal” or cast fittings, couplings, or connectors.
B.
Aluminum raceways, fittings, couplings, and connectors.
C.
Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT). Also known by trade name “smurf tubing”.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16110-1
15025
2.02
2.03
MATERIALS
A.
Rigid Steel Conduit: Standard iron pipe size with screwed joints for electrical raceway use, in
conformance with ANSI C80.1 “Rigid and Steel Conduit.” Raceway shall be zinc coated by
hot dip galvanizing or sherardizing. Manufacturer shall be Allied Tube and Conduit or
Triangle PWC.
B.
Electrical Metallic Tubing: Zinc-coated steel in conformance with ANSI C80.3 “Electrical
Metallic Tubing,” manufactured by Allied Tube and Conduit, or Triangle PWC.
C.
Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit: Polyvinyl chloride, Schedule 40, heavy-wall, U.L. labeled, in
conformance with U.L. Article 651 and NEMA TC-2 as manufactured by Carlon Electrical
Products or P.W. Pipe.
D.
Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit, Type “EB”: Polyvinyl chloride, designed for encased burial, in
conformance with U.L. 651A, U.L. 657A, and NEMA TC-6, as manufactured by Carlon
Electrical Products or P.W. Pipe.
E.
Flexible Conduit: Galvanized steel in conformance with UL-1 “Flexible Metal Conduit”,
manufactured by International, American Brass, or All-Flex.
F.
Flexible Conduit, Liquidtight: Galvanized steel in conformance with UL-360 “Liquid-Tight
Flexible Steel Conduit”, manufactured by American Brass Co. “Sealtite” or “Flex-Seal” with
copper bonding tape and with weatherproof exterior jacket.
G.
Surface Metal Raceway: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers, finished with manufacturer’s
standard prime coating suitable for painting, in conformance with UL-5 “Surface Metal
Raceways and Fittings”, manufactured by Legrand Wiremold of size required for wiring,
furnished with all associated hardware. System shall be equal to Legrand Wiremold 700 series
(single channel) or 4000 series (dual channel).
H.
Fittings, Couplings and Connectors: Utilize fittings listed and approved for specific conduit or
raceway system used. All fittings, couplings, and connectors shall be steel or malleable iron
and shall have insulated bushings molded or locked into the metallic body of the fitting for
protection of conductors. Fittings for galvanized rigid steel raceways shall be the threaded
type. Fittings for EMT shall be compression type. Fittings for flexible conduit shall be of the
wedge and screw or the squeeze and clamp type. Fittings for liquid tight flexible conduit shall
have a threaded grounding cone, and a compression ring with gland for tightening. Fittings
shall be manufactured by Appleton, Thomas & Betts, OZ/Gedney or same manufacturer as
conduit.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers shall be as listed above.
B.
Substitutions may be considered only when submitted in conformance with Section 16010.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16110-2
15025
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
PROHIBITED LOCATIONS AND INSTALLATION METHODS
A.
Electrical metallic tubing shall not be installed underground, in concrete, or exterior (nongalvanized).
B.
No raceway shall be secured to the ceiling system, ceiling hangers, HVAC ductwork, or
mechanical piping.
C.
Rigid non-metallic conduit (PVC) shall not be used inside a building unless encased in
concrete.
REQUIRED LOCATIONS
A.
Rigid steel conduit shall be used for all exposed exterior raceways, for transition of nonmetallic raceways before rising above floor slabs or grade and in locations specifically noted
or required by code.
B.
Rigid non-metallic conduit shall be used for all conduits installed underground (with rigid
steel elbows), in concrete slabs and in locations where specifically noted.
C.
Flexible conduit shall be used only for connections to recessed lighting fixtures, motors and
equipment, and shall be limited to dry locations. Maximum length shall be six (6) feet.
D.
Liquidtight flexible conduit shall be used in place of flexible conduit in damp or wet
locations, including all connections to pumps.
E.
Surface metal raceways shall be used only in finished areas where surface raceways are
required by building conditions or as specifically noted.
F.
Electrical metallic tubing shall be used in all locations not noted above.
INSTALLATION
A.
Underground raceways (other than single conduits) shall be arranged as shown in NEC Figure
B.310-2. Maximum depth to the top of all buried raceways shall be 30 inches.
B.
Maximum size raceway to be installed in concrete floor slabs shall not be larger in outside
diameter than 1/3 the overall thickness of the slab. Raceways shall be installed in middle third
of the slab thickness and leave at least 1 inch concrete cover. Raceways shall be secured to
reinforcing to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. Raceways shall be
spaced no closer than three diameters laterally to prevent voids in the concrete. Curved
portions of bends shall not be visible above the finished slab.
C.
Non-metallic raceways run in concrete slabs shall make a transition to rigid steel conduit
before rising above the slab.
D.
Stub-ups in floor slabs shall be made with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for
plugs, set flush with the finished floor. For connections to equipment, extend raceway from
fitting with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches above the floor.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16110-3
15025
E.
Maintain 6 inch separation from steam and hot water lines.
F.
All raceways shall be installed parallel with or at right angles to the building lines, and not
installed diagonally.
G.
The locations of all raceways shall be coordinated with all other trades. If a conflict occurs
due to lack of this coordination, then changes in the location of the raceways shall be made
without extra charge.
H.
For conduits one inch and larger, hickey bends are not acceptable. Either manufactured
elbows or bends fabricated in a bending machine must be used.
I.
Where a conduit enters a box or other fitting through a knockout, an approved double locknut
and insulating bushing must be provided. All conduits shall be equipped with insulating
bushings at all outlets, pull boxes, panels, etc.
J.
Flexible conduit connections to motors shall include (1) 90 degree bend.
K.
All conduits shall be cleaned by pulling a swab through the conduit before pulling in wires.
L.
Branch raceway runs are shown schematically. Except where exact routing is indicated,
branch circuit raceways may be grouped, and the actual routing of branch circuit raceways
may be altered, providing actual locations are properly entered on the “As-Built” drawings.
M.
Conduit connections between outlet boxes less than 24 inches apart on opposite sides of a
wall shall be made with a loop of flexible conduit (no nipples).
N.
Provide expansion fittings for all rigidly fastened conduits spanning expansion joints, and for
all runs 1-1/2 inch or larger exceeding 150 feet in length. Fittings shall be hot-dipped
galvanized malleable iron with a packing ring to exclude water, a pressure ring, and a separate
external bonding jumper.
O.
Seal around all conduits at ceiling, floor, and wall penetrations with an approved fire stop
material to provide airtight fireproof seal.
P.
Provide roof jack at all roof penetrations. Coordinate roof jack type and installation with
General Contractor. Equipment must be compatible with required roof guarantee.
Q.
Install raceway sealing fittings per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Sealing fittings shall
be located in approved, accessible locations and filled with U.L. listed sealing compound. For
concealed raceways, install fittings in a flush steel box with a blank cover. Sealing fittings
shall be installed where raceways enter/leave a hazardous area, a refrigerated area and as
otherwise required by the code.
R.
Where conduit runs are 100 feet or longer contain the equivalent of four (4) 90E bends,
pull/junction boxes shall be provided. Pull box locations shall be indicated on the record
drawings.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16110-4
15025
S.
Minimum size conduit shall be 3/4 inch, except where a single circuit of two #12 or two #14
AWG wires are installed, which requires 1/2 inch conduit minimum. Minimum size conduit
to be 3/4 inch below grade. Conduit sizes shown on the drawings shall supersede these
requirements.
T.
All unused raceways shall be provided with a nylon pull string. Raceways larger than 1-1/2
inch shall be provided with a 1/4 inch poly pull line.
U.
PVC conduit sections shall be installed using primer and glue.
END OF SECTION 16110
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16110-5
15025
SECTION 16120 - WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
PROVISIONS
A.
A complete system of wires shall be installed in the raceway system.
B.
No attempt has been made to indicate individual branch circuits and associated homerun
lengths. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to review each building for scope of
work.
C.
All branch circuit wiring shall be copper unless specifically noted otherwise.
D.
Feeder sizing/quantity indicated on the plans are based upon NEC Article 310, Table 310.16
75C copper (cu) for greater than 100 amp and 60C copper (cu) for less than 100 amps.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
All provisions of the contract including Division 1 apply to work specified in each section of
this Division 16.
B.
See Sections 16010, 16110, and 16700 thru 16790.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Complete manufacturer's data, including catalog cuts.
B.
Submit parts replacement/ordering information as part of O & M Manuals.
C.
All submittals shall be made in accordance with requirements of Section 16010 and Division
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
All wiring shall be copper unless specifically noted otherwise, and shall be rated at 600 volts.
B.
Wire sizes #12AWG and #10AWG shall be solid, type THHN/THWN.
C.
Wire sizes #8AWG and larger shall be stranded, type THHN/THWN. Sizes #4AWG and
larger may be type XHHW.
D.
Minimum wire size shall be #12AWG unless noted otherwise.
1.
E.
Exceptions:
a.
See Sections 16700 thru 16790 for low voltage wire and cable requirements.
All wire shall be marked with gauge and insulation type on 24" centers, and color coded as
required by the N.E.C.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16120-1
15025
2.02
F.
All wire and cable shall be brought to the job in the original containers bearing the U.L. label.
G.
Molded connectors with metal thread-on core shall be used for splicing #12AWG and
#10AWG wire. Stranded cables shall be connected to lugs using mechanical connectors, and
shall be wrapped with electrical tape to a thickness equal to the wire insulation.
H.
Support vertical conductors in raceways with a screw body and wedging type plug segments
made to support cables and relieve strain without damaging conductor insulation.
I.
Wire pulling lubricants shall be non-toxic, polymer based and compatible with conductor
insulation. The dielectric strength of the conductor insulation shall not be reduced.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Wire and cable shall be as manufactured by Rome, Southwire, General Cable, American
Insulated Wire, Superior/Essex or Cerrowire.
B.
Molded connectors shall be as manufactured by 3M or Buchanan.
C.
Mechanical connectors shall be manufactured by Burndy, O.Z./Gedney Co., or Thomas &
Betts.
D.
Cable supports shall be manufactured by O.Z./Gedney.
E.
Wire lubricant shall be manufactured by Thomas & Betts or Ideal.
F.
Tape shall be manufactured by 3M.
G.
Substitutions may be considered only when submitted in conformance with Section 16010.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Wires shall be pulled in such a manner as to avoid kinking or abrasion to the insulation. Use
only approved lubricants which do not deteriorate conductors or insulation. Oil or grease shall
not be used to lubricate wires.
B.
Make sure that all conduit fittings have insulated bushings in place before pulling wires. If it
is found that the insulating bushings are not in place before pulling wire, the wire will be
removed and replaced with new at the contractor’s expense.
C.
Where more than three current carrying conductors are installed in a single raceway, the
minimum wire size shall be increased to comply with NEC Table 310-16, Note 8.
D.
Where the distance from the overcurrent device to the first outlet exceeds 100 feet, the
minimum wire size shall be #10AWG.
E.
All receptacle circuits associated with computer outlets shall have separate neutrals. No
shared neutrals will be allowed. Neutral conductor shall be considered as "current-carrying"
for the purpose of applying NEC Table 310-16, Note 8, above.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16120-2
15025
F.
Wiring shall be arranged as shown on the drawings. Combining of homeruns will be allowed
up to three circuits.
G.
Provide separate equipment ground conductor full length of all raceways. This conductor is
not shown on the drawings and is in addition to the conductors shown.
H.
Conductor insulation shall be color coded as follows:
CONDUCTOR
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Neutral
Ground
208Y/120 VAC
Black
Red
Blue
White *
Green
480Y/277 VAC
Brown
Orange
Yellow
Grey *
Green
* Neutral shall have colored stripe where so specified
I.
Except where conductor sizes are indicated on the drawings, the following schedule, listing
minimum conductor size, shall be adhered to:
CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT
DEVICE RATING
CONDUCTOR SIZE
20 amperes or less
#12AWG
30 amperes
#10AWG
40 amperes
#8AWG
50 amperes
#6AWG
60 amperes
#4AWG
70 amperes
#4AWG
80 amperes
#3AWG
90 amperes
#2AWG
100 amperes
#1AWG
J.
3.02
For paralleled conductors, lengths of the conductors shall be identical and one conductor for
each phase and neutral shall be run in each conduit.
TESTING
A.
Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
B.
Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer’s recommended values.
C.
Perform continuity test on all power conductors. Verify proper phasing connections.
END OF SECTION 16120
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16120-3
15025
SECTION 16130 - EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
PROVISIONS
A.
This section of the specification applies to the enclosures for enclosed equipment other than
grouped equipment, i.e. motor control centers, switchboards, panelboards, etc.
B.
Provide weather-tight NEMA-rated enclosures for equipment mounted outdoors or exposed to
moisture.
C.
Items covered includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.02
Switches (fusible and non-fusible; motor starting).
Starters (magnetic, manual, combination).
Circuit breakers.
Pilot devices including push-button stations.
Contactors.
Control enclosures.
SUBMITTALS
A.
List manufacturer and certify compliance with industry standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Enclosures used indoors in nondesignated areas shall be NEMA 1 unless otherwise noted.
B.
Enclosures used outdoors in nondesignated areas shall be NEMA 3R.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate location of enclosures with other trades.
B.
Install disconnect switch and similar device enclosures where accessible per code.
C.
Enclosures for individual units shall be mounted at 4'- 6" above floors to centerline of switch,
controls, etc.
D.
Utilize mounting hardware designed for intended use.
E.
Provide supports and brackets required to attach the enclosure.
F.
Enclosures shall be installed parallel and perpendicular to architectural and structural
elements.
END OF SECTION 16130
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16130-1
15025
SECTION 16131 – PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
PROVISIONS
A.
1.02
Furnish and install pull and junction boxes in all locations shown or required for proper
installation of the raceway and wiring systems.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
All provisions of the contract including Division 1 apply to work specified in each section of
this Division 16.
B.
See Sections 16010, 16110, and 16199.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Provide galvanized sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers, of the type,
shape, and size to suit each respective location and installation.
1.
2.02
Type for various locations:
a.
100 cubic inches or smaller: Standard outlet box with stamped knockouts.
b.
150 cubic inches or larger: Code gauge steel with slides formed and welded,
with screw covers unless shown to have hinged doors. Hinged doors shall
have locking device same as furnished for panelboards. Knockouts shall be
factory stamped, or formed in the field with a cutting tool to provide a clean,
symmetrically cut hole.
c.
Exterior or wet areas: Weatherproofed galvanized steel construction with
proper gaskets and corrosion resistant fasteners.
d.
Ordinary Cast Metal Boxes: Provide cast aluminum or malleable iron with
minimum wall thickness of 1/8”. Boxes shall have integral threaded
raceway hubs and mounting flanges. Boxes shall be corrosion resistant on
the inside and outside and contain gasketed covers held in place with a
minimum of four corrosion-resistant screws.
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A.
Pull and junction boxes shall be as manufactured by the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Appleton Electric Co.
Arrow-Hart, Inc.
Keystone Columbia, Inc.
O.Z./Gedney Co.
T&B
Panelboard/Switch board manufacturer as described in Section 16410.
Cast Metal Boxes:
1.
Appleton, Crouse Hinds, OZ/Gedney
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16131-1
15025
C.
Substitutions may be considered only when submitted in conformance with Section 16010.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PROHIBITED INSTALLATION METHODS
A.
3.02
No box shall be secured to the ceiling system, HVAC ductwork, or mechanical piping.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install electric boxes as indicated, and in compliance with N.E.C. requirements, in accordance
with manufacturer’s recommendations and with recognized industry practices to ensure that
the boxes serve the intended purpose.
B.
Provide pull and junction boxes wherever necessary for proper installation of the various
electrical systems.
C.
Provide knockout closures to cap all unused holes where blanks have been removed.
D.
Coordinate and locate boxes to ensure accessibility of electrical wiring.
E.
Secure boxes rigidly to the building element on which they are mounted, or solidly embed
boxes in concrete or masonry.
F.
Identify all boxes with label showing the individual feeder or electrical system. See Section
16199.
G.
Boxes shall have appropriate NEMA rating for the location.
H.
Ordinary cast metal boxes shall be used in exposed locations in mechanical, electrical and
telecommunication rooms.
END OF SECTION 16131
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16131-2
15025
SECTION 16132 – FLOOR BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
PROVISIONS
A.
Furnish and install floor boxes in the locations shown on the drawings.
B.
Provide floor box system designed for the floor type and device configuration. Review all
contract documents for floor type and installation requirements.
C.
Provide power and telecommunications devices in each floor box as indicated.
D.
Provide power circuits for each receptacle installed in a floor box.
E.
Provide telecommunications cabling for each telecommunication jack installed in a floor box.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
All provisions of the contract including Division 1 apply to work specified in each section of
this Division 16.
B.
See Sections 16010, 16140 and 16751.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
General: Floor boxes shall be sized to accommodate the indicated devices, regardless of
whether such devices are provided under the Contract. Floor boxes shall be suitable for
installation in the type of floor at the location where they are to be installed. Floor box covers
shall be designed to accommodate the floor finish material where they are installed.
B.
Multi-service floor boxes designed for flush mounting, having separate compartments for
power and communications.
C.
Boxes shall accommodate power receptacles and additional signal and communications
systems devices as indicated on the Drawings. Include device brackets for duplex receptacles
each other type device to accommodate the indicated communications devices. Include
connectivity inserts for communication devices.
D.
Insets for telecommunications outlets shall match devices specified in Section 16751.
E.
Boxes shall include wiring barriers, device plates, mounting hardware, hinged lid, and cable
access port. Boxes shall be fully adjustable before and after the concrete pour.
F.
Boxes installed in floors above grade shall be equivalent to Legrand Wiremold #RFB6.
G.
Floor box covers shall be equal to Legrand Wiremold FPBTCBS.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16132-1
15025
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Substitutions may be considered only when submitted in conformance with Section 16010.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Verify exact location of all floor boxes before roughing-in.
B.
Where flush floor boxes are shown adjacent to one another, mount boxes 3" apart.
C.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Flush floor boxes must be
exactly flush with finished floor.
D.
Install power, AV, and communication devices in boxes as indicated on drawings.
END OF SECTION 16132
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16132-2
15025
SECTION 16134 - OUTLET BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
PROVISIONS
A.
Each new switch, wall receptacle, light fixture, telecom work area outlet, A/V wall device,
and other miscellaneous devices and equipment shall be provided with an outlet (junction or
wiring) box.
B.
All outlet boxes shall be of the flush type unless specifically noted otherwise.
C.
Box dimensions shall be selected to meet wiring space requirements. Depth may be limited
by building conditions.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
All provisions of the contract including Division 1 apply to work specified in each section of
this Division 16.
B.
See Sections 16010, 16110, 16140, 16147, and 16751.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Complete manufacturer's data, including catalog cuts on standard equipment, and shop
drawings for all custom equipment. Submit parts replacement/ordering information as part of
O & M Manuals.
B.
All submittals shall be made in accordance with requirements of Section 16010 and Division
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PROHIBITED MATERIALS
A.
2.02
Sectional outlet boxes shall not be utilized.
MATERIALS
A.
Flush outlet boxes shall be galvanized pressed steel, of the knockout type, not less than 4"
square, minimum #14 gauge.
B.
Provide extension rings for all flush boxes. Boxes which occur in concrete block walls shall
be equipped with 1-1/2" square cornered tile extensions.
C.
Outlet boxes installed in surface metallic raceway systems shall be shallow boxes
manufactured as part of the system.
D.
Surface mounted outlet boxes shall be utilized only in conjunction with exposed conduits, and
shall be of the cast metal type with internal hubs and mounting flanges.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16134-1
15025
E.
2.03
Boxes for exterior below grade installation shall be watertight, rated for exterior use, with
gasketed covers and watertight connections. Boxes shall be cast steel, fully coated with
corrosive protective compound. Boxes in paved areas shall be traffic rated.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Pressed steel boxes shall be manufactured by Bowers, Raco, or T&B (Steel City).
B.
Cast metal boxes shall be manufactured by Bell.
C.
Surface boxes which are part of surface metallic raceway systems shall be manufactured by
the same manufacturer as the surface metallic raceway.
D.
Cast exterior boxes shall be manufactured by OZ.
E.
Substitutions may be considered only when submitted in conformance with Section 16010.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
All outlet boxes shall be flush unless specifically noted otherwise.
B.
This Contractor shall carefully lay out all outlets and check with the plumbing, heating,
ventilating, and other contractors so that the outlets are not blocked, hidden, or rendered
inaccessible due to equipment or piping of these trades passing over, under, across, or in close
proximity to same, or to cause the devices or fixtures in or on these outlets to be inaccessible
for use or maintenance.
C.
Any minor changes in the location of outlets from those shown on the plans shall be made
without extra charge if so directed by the Architect before installation.
D.
Where two or more of the same type devices occur adjacent to each other, they shall be in a
gang type box with a gang type cover. Where different type devices occur adjacent to each
other, space outlet boxes so that finish plates will be spaced one inch apart (verify with
Architect).
E.
Contractor shall consult the Architectural drawings for exact height of all outlets not specified
herein or shown on the drawings.
F.
Flush ceiling and wall outlet boxes shall have a 3/8" fixture stud where fixture depends on
such for support.
G.
Each ceiling outlet occurring in a suspended ceiling shall be supported from a bar hanger
rigidly attached to ceiling support channels.
H.
Outlet boxes shall be supported independent from the raceway system.
I.
All switch outlets shall be located where shown, on strike side of door, and shall be 6" from
the door casing, unless it is necessary to center switch between door and other construction for
appearance.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16134-2
15025
3.02
J.
Where two or more outlets occur on the same wall, unless individually noted otherwise, they
shall be mounted at exactly the same height.
K.
Where outlets are shown side by side but at different heights, they shall be centered one above
the other unless otherwise indicated.
L.
Outlets which are shown immediately opposite one another on two sides of a wall shall have
boxes sized to prevent contact between the two. Nipples between boxes are prohibited.
M.
Outlets shown immediately opposite one another on two sides of a fire rated wall shall have
24" minimum horizontal separation.
N.
No outlet or group of outlets in a single stud space of a fire rated wall shall have a total
opening area larger than 16 square inches.
O.
All unused openings in outlet boxes must be left sealed or closed with plugs.
P.
Grout around all outlet boxes to seal space between box and wall or ceiling materials.
MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A.
Outlet boxes shall be mounted at heights as shown on the drawings. Dimensions are
measured to the top of the box unless a "B" follows the dimension. In this case, the
dimension is to the bottom of the box.
1.
Exception: In spaces where existing outlets are installed, new outlets shall be
mounted at the same height as existing similar outlets.
END OF SECTION 16134
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16134-3
15025
SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
PROVISIONS
A.
Provide wiring devices at all device outlet locations shown on the drawings.
B.
Replace existing devices with new as indicated on the drawings.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
All provisions of the contract including Division 1 apply to work specified in each section of
this Division 16.
B.
See Sections 16010, 16132, 16134, 16147, and 16199.
C.
For occupancy sensor switches and low voltage switches part of the lighting control system
see Specification Section 16561.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Complete manufacturer's data, including catalog cuts.
B.
Submit parts replacement/ordering information as part of O & M Manuals.
C.
All submittals shall be made in accordance with requirements of Section 16010 and Division
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Single Pole Switches
WALL SWITCHES
Hubbell #1221-GY
Three-Way Switches
Hubbell #1223-GY
Four-Way Switches
Hubbell #1224-GY
Single Pole Switch
with Red Pilot Lamp
Weatherproof Switch
Hubbell 1221-PL (120 volt)
Hubbell 1221-PL7 (277 volt)
Hubbell #1781-GY
Momentary Contact Switch
Hubbell #1557-GY
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16140-1
15025
B.
Single Pole Switches
WALL SWITCHES
Leviton #1221-GY
Three-Way Switches
Leviton #1223-GY
Four-Way Switches
Leviton #1224-GY
Single Pole Switch
with Red Pilot Lamp
Momentary Contact Switch
Leviton #1221-PLR (120 volt)
Leviton #1221-7PLR (277 volt)
Leviton #1256-GY
C.
Duplex Receptacles
WALL RECEPTACLES
Hubbell #CR5362GY
Safety Receptacles
Hubbell #HBL8200SG-GY
Clock Receptacles
Hubbell #5235
Dryer Receptacle
Range Receptacle
Hubbell 9350
Hubbell #7962
GFI Receptacle
Hubbell #GF5352-GY
WeatherProof Receptacles
Hubbell #GF5352-GY w/#WP-26
plate
D.
Duplex Receptacles
WALL RECEPTACLES
Leviton #5362-GY
Safety Receptacles
Leviton #5262-SG-GY
Clock Receptacles
Leviton #5361-CH
Dryer Receptacle
Range Receptacle
Leviton #5207
Leviton #5206
GFI Receptacle
Leviton #6599-GY
WeatherProof Receptacles
Leviton #6599-GY w/#G196-V plate
E.
Devices shall be gray.
F.
High-capacity toggle operated switches shall be suitable for controlling motors rated up to 2
hp.
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Double-pole 30 amp switch P&S #7802
Three-pole 30 amp switch P&S #7803
Double-pole 40 amp switch P&S #7842
Three-pole 40 amp switch P&S #7843
Additional devices shall be as noted on the drawings.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16140-2
15025
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers shall be as listed above.
B.
A&H, Hubbell, P&S and Leviton devices which are the approved equal of those specified
above are considered acceptable.
C.
Substitutions may be considered only when submitted in conformance with Section 16010.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Mount devices securely to outlet boxes.
B.
Provide ground straps between each wiring device and its associated outlet box.
1.
Exception: Ground strap not required with self-grounding devices.
C.
Orient receptacles so that ground pin is at top.
D.
Mount weatherproof receptacles vertically, up 18" from finished grade.
E.
All Toilet Rooms, Kitchen and Food Preparation locations shall have GFI type receptacles.
F.
All receptacles within 6 feet of a sink shall be GFI type receptacles.
G.
All interior damp or wet location outlets shall be weather resistant type GFI receptacles.
H.
All exterior damp or wet location outlets shall be weather-resistant type GFI receptacles.
I.
Provide device labeling per Specification Section 16199.
J.
All existing outlets noted on the drawings as being existing and reused shall have devices
replaced with new.
END OF SECTION 16140
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16140-3
15025
SECTION 16147 - DEVICE PLATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
PROVISIONS
A.
Provide each newly installed wiring device with a new wall plate or plate to match existing
building standard.
B.
Outlet devices being replaced with new shall have new plate installed.
C.
Plate shall be size and type to match device.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
All provisions of the contract including Division 1 apply to work specified in each section of
this Division 16.
B.
See Sections 16010, 16134, 16140, and 16199.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Complete manufacturer's data, including catalog cuts on standard equipment, and shop
drawings for all custom equipment.
B.
Submit parts replacement/ordering information as part of O & M Manuals.
C.
All submittals shall be made in accordance with requirements of Section 16010 and Division
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PROHIBITED MATERIALS
A.
2.02
Sectional plates shall not be utilized.
MATERIALS
A.
All devices in public areas shall be equipped with stainless steel plates of type to match
device. Devices in Staff areas shall be grey nylon.
B.
Standard Stainless Steel Faceplates: Type 430 stainless steel with satin finish equivalent to
P&S Sierra “SL” series. Type 302 Stainless Steel Faceplates: Type 302 stainless steel with
satin finish, equivalent to P&S Sierra “SS” series.
C.
Nylon plates shall be Leviton Decora style.
D.
All junction boxes in finished areas shall be provided with plates.
E.
All outlets for communications devices (television, telephone) shall be provided by the
communications contractor with plates to match device.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16147-1
15025
F.
2.03
Plates on exposed pressed steel boxes shall be pressed steel of the same manufacture as the
box unless noted otherwise.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Plates shall be Ortronics plates to match existing building standard for communication outlets.
B.
Plates shall be Leviton 302 stainless for outlets.
C.
Substitutions may be considered only when submitted in conformance with Section 16010.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Install plate on each device outlet, communications outlets, and junction box.
B.
All existing outlets noted on the drawings as being reused shall have device plates replaced
with new.
C.
Device plates shall be fitted tight to wall.
D.
All receptacles other than 15 or 20 amperes, 120 volt, shall be engraved with designation of
amperage, voltage, and phase, in 3/16" high letters. See Section 16199.
E.
All devices shall be identified as to circuit number. See Section 16199.
END OF SECTION 16147
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16147-2
15025
SECTION 16150 - MOTOR CONNECTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
PROVISIONS
A.
Furnish and install all power wiring for all permanently installed motors, starters, equipment
and control systems. All circuit protection, disconnect switches, and motor starters shall be
furnished by Division 16 – Electrical, except for specifically noted starters, integral to
equipment specified in other Sections. Review al contract documents for requirements.
B.
Motor starters and disconnect switches locations are indicated on the drawings. It shall be
understood that the symbol representing "motor connection" shall include disconnect switches
at all motors and starters, and starters where required.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
All provisions of the contract including Division 1 apply to work specified in each section of
this Division 16.
B.
See Sections 16010, 16170, and 16720.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Provide all required relays, wiring, and miscellaneous equipment for Fire Alarm Fan
Shutdown if required. Interconnecting controls shall be rated to match starter control voltage.
B.
Branch circuit protection and disconnect switches shall be provided under Division 16. See
Section 16170.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Make a single (unless otherwise noted) line voltage connection to each motor and equipment
item, and "line and load" line voltage connections to motor starters.
B.
Check the rotational direction of all motors after final service connections have been made,
and make all phase corrections required.
C.
Check all motors for proper lubrication and overload protection before placing in operation.
END OF SECTION 16150
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16150-1
15025
SECTION 16160 - GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
PROVISIONS
A.
Provide grounding for the electrical system as required in Article 250 of the N.E.C., and as
specified herein.
B.
Provide grounding and bonding of telecommunications cabling as required by the NEC and as
called for in ANSI/TIA/EIA 569 and 607-B, and as specified herein.
C.
No attempt has been made to show or otherwise indicate grounding equipment on the
drawings. It shall be understood that all newly installed devices, equipment, circuits; etc shall
be properly grounded to ensure safety and code compliance. Review existing conditions to
determine scope of work prior to bid.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
All provisions of the contract including Division 1 apply to work specified in each section of
this Division 16.
B.
See Sections 16010, 16120, and 16420..
SUBMITTALS
A.
Complete manufacturer's data, including catalog cuts.
B.
Submit parts replacement/ordering information as part of O & M Manuals.
C.
All submittals shall be made in accordance with requirements of Section 16010 and Division
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Ground Clamps: Burndy Type NT.
B.
Compression Grounding: Burndy Hyground Irreversible Compression Grounding System,
Thomas & Betts EZ Ground Compression Connectors, or approved equal.
C.
All grounding and bonding conductors shall be copper.
D.
Ground Bar: 12 inch long, 4 inch wide, ¼ inch thick, extruded copper bar with two insulated
supports.
1.
2.
Bar shall be drilled to accept standard 2-hole lugs.
Bar shall have wire clamp connectors and be capable of connecting a minimum of #6
AWG solid conductors.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16160-1
15025
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers shall be as listed above.
B.
Substitutions may be considered only when submitted in conformance with Section 16010.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
The following are specifically included as requiring grounding:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
All raceways.
Branch circuit panelboards.
Non-current carrying parts of fixed equipment.
Grounding terminal of all receptacles.
Motors.
Above grade metallic raceways.
Surge protection devices.
Telecommunication main grounding bus bar.
Communication equipment racks and enclosures.
Cable shields
Provide ground strap between each wiring device and its associated outlet box.
1.
Exception: Straps may be omitted if self-grounding devices are utilized.
C.
Provide separate ground conductor full length of all raceways. Ground conductor is not shown
on the drawings, and is in addition to conductors shown.
D.
Provide a ground bar in each telecommunications space. Provide (1) #2 AWG continuous,
insulated ground conductor from each ground bar to the main electrical service ground bar.
Provide (1) #6 AWG insulated ground conductor from ground bar to each
telecommunications rack in the telecommunication spaces.
E.
Grounding of shields for shielded audio cables shall occur only at the central equipment
inputs or outputs of the audio amplifier. Non-grounded ends shall be terminated with wedgeon collars. Care shall be taken to preserve the continuity of the shields at all connection
points.
END OF SECTION 16160
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16160-2
15025
SECTION 16170 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
PROVISIONS
A.
1.02
1.03
Provide motor and/or circuit disconnect switches in all locations shown or specified and in all
locations required by code.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
All provisions of the contract including Division 1 apply to work specified in each section of
this Division 16.
B.
See Sections 16010, 16150, 16180, 16199, and 16470.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Complete manufacturer's data, including catalog cuts. Submit parts replacement/ordering
information as part of O & M Manuals.
B.
All submittals shall be made in accordance with requirements of Section 16010 and Division
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Each motor and equipment item shall be equipped with a two or three pole, fused, heavy-duty
disconnect switch, sized to match the motor or equipment.
1.
2.02
Disconnect switches for 120 VAC, single phase motors rated ½ HP or less shall be
enclosed, toggle-type manual motor starters with integral overload protection and a
red neon pilot “run” light. Provide General Electric #CR101.
B.
Switches shall be externally operable, quick-make, quick-break, with neutral connecting block
as required, and lockable operating handle. Mount in code gauge steel cabinet.
C.
See Section 16470 for fuse requirements.
D.
Provide Class R rejection kits on fuseholders.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Disconnect switches shall be manufactured by Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, Siemens, or
Square D.
B.
Substitutions may be considered only when submitted in conformance with Section 16010.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16170-1
15025
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Install disconnect switch at the controller location and wire to disconnect both motor (or
equipment) and controller. If the motor (or equipment) is not in sight from the controller
location, provide a second disconnect switch at the motor (or equipment), whether shown on
the drawings or not.
B.
Install disconnects where accessible and within reach of personnel, as required by code.
END OF SECTION 16170
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16170-2
15025
SECTION 16180 - EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
PROVISIONS
A.
1.02
Make all required connections to equipment furnished by the Owner, or under Division 1
through 16.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
All provisions of the contract including Division 1 apply to work specified in each section of
this Division 16.
B.
See Sections 16010, 16134, 16140, and 16170.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Provide disconnect switch at all equipment unless cord/cap connected.
B.
Where equipment has a cord connection, install a new plug on cord if equipment plug does
not match the receptacle provided.
C.
Coordinate all receptacles, plugs, wiring, and locations with the equipment provided PRIOR
to rough-in. Make sure code-required clearances are provided.
D.
Provide connection from fire/smoke dampers to fire alarm system for shut-down of HVAC
units.
E.
Locate receptacle for each electric water cooler so that cord and plug are concealed inside or
behind cooler.
F.
Serve and Prep Equipment:
1.
2.
Verify all rough-in and connection requirements from drawings provided by the
equipment supplier. Make final connection to all equipment.
Conceal conduit stub-ups for equipment connections in walls behind equipment.
Install boxes flush in wall with flush cover plates. Keep exposed conduits, boxes,
and flexible conduits to a minimum length and exposure in order to meet health
department regulations.
END OF SECTION 16180
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16180-1
15025
SECTION 16190 - SUPPORT DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
PROVISIONS
A.
Support all raceways, devices, and equipment from the building structure as required by the
N.E.C. and as described below.
B.
Support lighting fixtures as required by the IBC and as described below.
C.
Support cabling as described below.
D.
Support electrical equipment to walls or ceilings with concealed backing.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
All provisions of the contract including Division 1 apply to work specified in each section of
this Division 16.
B.
See Sections 16010, 16110, and 16500.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Complete manufacturer's data, including catalog cuts on standard equipment, and shop
drawings for all custom equipment. Submit parts replacement/ordering information as part of
O & M Manuals.
B.
All submittals shall be made in accordance with requirements of Section 16010 and Division
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PROHIBITED MATERIALS
A.
2.02
Nails, wires, perforated tape, plumber's tape, duct tape, plastic zip ties, or glue are
unacceptable for support or securing of conduits.
MATERIALS
A.
One or two hole pipe straps shall be Kindorf C-144 series or equal.
B.
Lay-in pipe hangers shall be Kindorf C-149.
C.
Trapeze or wall surface supports shall be Kindorf "bolt-hole" base galvanized steel channels
with C105 and C106 single bolt pipe straps.
D.
Galvanized steel channels and associated support rods shall be selected to accommodate
weight of associated raceway and wire.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16190-1
15025
2.03
E.
Lighting fixture supports shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. T-bar type fixtures
shall be supported from standard T-bar accessories. Comply with ASTM C636.
F.
Cable supports: Provide galvanized steel “D” rings or galvanized steel “J” hooks with Velcro
wraps to secure cables. Bridle rings are not acceptable. Minimum “J” hook width shall be
3/4”. Size hooks per quantity of communication cables.
G.
Provide surface mounted wall supports for steel strut channels and electrical attachment
accessories.
H.
Provide adjustable, galvanized steel bar hangers equivalent to RACO #920 or #922.
I.
Provide adjustable, galvanized steel, box brackets equivalent to Erico “Caddy” #TSGB.
J.
Provide backing that matches material and is compatible with building components.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers shall be as listed above.
B.
Substitutions may be considered only when submitted in conformance with Section 16010.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Individual conduits shall be secured with steel pipe straps or lay- in pipe hangers.
B.
Multiple rows of suspended conduit shall be supported from trapeze style hangers.
C.
Multiple runs of conduit on ceiling or wall surfaces shall be mounted on flush or surface steel
channels.
D.
Ceiling support wires shall not be used for support of conduits.
E.
Support lighting fixtures as recommended by the manufacturer. See additional requirements
in Section 16500. If installed in T-bar ceilings, support as required by N.E.C., and in
addition, provide (2) #12 gage slack wire hangers from the fixture housing to the structure
above. In addition, see IBC requirements.
F.
Outlet boxes in framed walls or ceilings shall be supported by horizontal box brackets
attached to two studs. Outlet boxes in suspended ceilings shall be supported by bar hangars
attached to two ceiling support channels.
G.
Communication and control cables shall be supported by “J” Hooks and “D” Rings. Supports
shall insure that the cable will not kink, sag, or distort. Supports shall be spaced at less than
60 inches apart. Group cables by system in Velcro wraps.
H.
Connect freestanding equipment to the building structure. Anchor floor-mounted equipment
to floor with appropriate fasteners.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16190-2
15025
I.
Support suspended electrical equipment from the building structure and provide sway
bracing.
END OF SECTION 16190
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16190-3
15025
SECTION 16199 – ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
GENERAL
A.
All identification shall use the room numbers assigned by the Owner. Obtain a list of room
numbers from the Owner’s Representative prior to preparing identification.
B.
Provide revised panelboard circuit directory cards if any panels have been modified or added
to.
C.
Provide arc fault flash hazard labels on all disconnect switches and panels per NEC Section
110.16.
PROVISIONS
A.
Install nameplates on all Main and Distribution Switchboards, starters, panelboards, telephone
cabinets, disconnect switches, time clocks, and miscellaneous systems junction boxes and
cabinets installed under this contract.
B.
Provide new nameplates as required for existing equipment.
C.
Install plates with engraved labels at all control switches noted on the drawings.
D.
Install printed labels on all device plates, showing circuit number.
E.
Install bakelite nameplates at each protective device in switchboard and distribution centers,
showing circuit service.
F.
Install typed circuit directory cards in all panelboards, including existing.
G.
Install printed label on cover of all junction boxes, showing system identification and/or
circuit number.
H.
All wiring in all outlet and junction boxes shall be properly identified as to cable source or
circuit number.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
All provisions of the contract including Division 1 apply to work specified in each section of
this Division 16.
B.
See Sections 16010, 16147, 16170, 16411, and 16420.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Detailed shop drawings for all custom nameplates.
B.
All submittals shall be made in accordance with requirements of Section 16010 and Division
1.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16199-1
15025
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PROHIBITED MATERIALS
A.
2.02
Dymo (or equivalent) labels shall not be utilized, unless specifically noted.
MATERIALS
A.
Nameplates:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Nameplates shall be fabricated from black bakelite, with 1/4" or 3/8" engraved white
letters.
Wherever engraved plates are noted on the drawings, such labels shall be engraved
directly into the metal or plastic plate, dead front, or other material.
Engraved letters shall be 1/4" or 3/8" high, filled with black enamel, and read as
directed.
Schedules:
1.
Provide typewritten directory for each panel, on heavy card stock, showing all circuit
numbers.
C.
Printed labels shall be matte white polypropylene with adhesive back designed for exterior
applications. Label text shall be ¾” high, black and shall be applied to the label by a thermal
transfer printer. Printed labels shall be made using a Brady ID PAL printer.
D.
A warning sign complying with NEC Article 110.16 shall be provided for all panelboards,
motor starters, disconnect switches, and lighting control panels. Arc flash signs shall be in
accordance with ANSI Standard Z535.4 requirements. Signs shall state “Warning”, “Arc
Flash Hazard”, and “Appropriate PPE Required.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Nameplates:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Panelboards: Mount inside door, on dead front, above circuit breakers, unless
panelboard is located in an utility-type room, then install nameplate on outside of
panelboard above door.
Telephone and Miscellaneous Cabinets: Mount nameplate on outside of cabinet
above door.
Disconnect Switches, Relays, Contactors, Time Clocks: Mount nameplate on outside
of cabinet, near top. Omit nameplates from disconnect switches if located adjacent to
equipment.
Control Switches: Install nameplate in location as directed near switch. Nameplate
is required unless engraved labels are specified.
Junction Boxes: Install nameplate on exterior of cover.
Schedules:
1.
Panelboards: Mount in frame under plastic cover, on back side of door. Schedule
shall show circuit service for each circuit breaker, using "Owners" room numbers.
Spares and spaces shall be written in pencil.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16199-2
15025
2.
C.
Existing Panelboards: Revise existing schedules to reflect current circuit
configuration. Retype on new schedules, showing new and existing circuits.
Device Plates:
1.
2.
Provide line voltage branch circuit identification labels on all receptacle outlet device
plates.
Provide network identification labels on all telcom work area outlets.
END OF SECTION 16199
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16199-3
15025
SECTION 16411 - EXISTING DISTRIBUTION PANELS, PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
PROVISIONS
A.
Modify and connect to existing panelboards and distribution panel as shown on the drawings.
B.
Modify existing nameplates and circuit directory cards as described below.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
All provisions of the contract including Division 1 apply to work specified in each section of
this Division 16.
B.
See Sections 16010, 16199, and 16490.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Overcurrent devices shall match existing equipment as to manufacturer, type, and minimum
short-circuit rating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Install new circuit protective devices in existing panelboards, and distribution panels in
available space. Where necessary, relocate existing active devices to make adjacent spaces
available.
B.
Schedules shown for existing panelboards/distribution panels represent the circuit breaker
configuration required by the current project. Contractor shall make site investigation and
determine the type, number, and arrangement of existing circuit breakers for each existing
panelboard/distribution panel to insure inclusion of all required devices.
C.
Install blank covers over live bus in existing panelboards/distribution panels wherever such
exposures are found.
D.
Reorganize existing panelboards/distribution panels and associated equipment to provide
space for new equipment as shown on the drawings.
E.
Revise existing panel and distribution schedules as required to reflect current circuit
configuration. Retype on new schedules showing both new and existing circuits.
END OF SECTION 16411
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16411-1
15025
SECTION 16420 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
PROVISIONS
A.
1.02
1.03
Furnish and install all lighting and power panels shown on the drawings. Panels shall be
mounted in steel cabinets arranged for flush or surface mounting as shown on the plans.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
All provisions of the contract including Division 1 apply to work specified in each section of
this Division 16.
B.
See Sections 16010 and 16199.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Complete manufacturer's data, including catalog cuts on standard equipment, and shop
drawings for all custom equipment. Submit parts replacement/ordering information as part of
O & M Manuals.
B.
Include drawing showing height, width, and depth of each panel.
C.
Include schedule showing circuit breaker size and number of poles, keyed to circuit number.
Schedule shall be arranged the same as the panel schedules included in the specifications.
D.
All submittals shall be made in accordance with requirements of Section 16010 and Division
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Cabinet and trim shall be of code gauge steel (minimum) with 4" (minimum) wiring gutter all
around. All panelboards shall be equipped with a hinged, locking door. Two keys shall be
furnished with each cabinet, and all locks on all cabinets shall be keyed alike.
B.
Where panels occur adjacent to one another, cabinets and doors for each panel shall be of the
same height.
C.
All surface mounted panels, unless noted otherwise, shall extend from the floor to the top of
the panel, with dividers, blank panels, and miscellaneous hardware as required. Entire cabinet
(less front) shall be furnished as one piece, or if not of one piece construction, shall have
factory fabricated metal skirts which are designed to provide positive alignment of top and
bottom sections. Panelboards which have sections which are not perfectly aligned will not be
accepted.
D.
All panelboards shall be painted with gray lacquer over rust preventative primer. Sides and
top of surface mounted panels shall be painted to match fronts.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16420-1
15025
E.
Panels shall be of the circuit breaker type, and shall have capacity and arrangement as shown
on the panel schedule.
F.
Branch circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type and shall be of the ambient compensated,
thermal magnetic type, which will provide inverse time delay overload, and instantaneous
short circuit protection. All branch circuit breakers shall have a minimum interrupting rating
of 10,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. Branch circuit breakers shall have one, two or three
poles as designated on the panel schedule. No circuit breakers utilizing handle ties for two or
three pole operation will be acceptable.
1.
2.02
Voltage and current ratings shall be as indicated on the drawings.
G.
Provide a typewritten directory for each panel, placed inside the panel door. The directory
shall list all rooms served by each breaker, using the "Owner's" room numbers. Directories
shall be installed in a metal directory frame and glass. Spares and spaces shall be written in
pencil.
H.
All circuit breakers which serve time clocks and other miscellaneous control devices shall be
equipped with mechanical handle locking devices.
I.
Where panels contain contactors, they shall be mounted behind a hinged, locking door.
Contactor section shall be below the circuit breaker section unless otherwise noted. Provide
all required barriers.
J.
All multi-section panels shall be equipped with a "bus rated" main circuit breaker in each
section.
K.
Each panel shall be equipped with a ground lug for feeder ground.
L.
Each panel and cabinet and the units comprising same shall bear the manufacturer's nameplate
and the U.L. label.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Panelboards shall be Square D Type #NQOD.
B.
Other Acceptable Manufacturers: G.E., Cutler-Hammer, or Siemens equipment which is the
approved equal of the above is considered acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Mount panels in locations shown, making sure that code-required clearances exist.
B.
All panels shall be mounted with top at the same height; approximately 6'-6".
C.
Where cabinets cannot be set fully flush due to shallowness of all of partition, trim protruding
sides with approved metal or hardwood molding, fastened to cabinet so as to conceal
intersection of wall and cabinet.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16420-2
15025
D.
If paint is damaged during shipping or installation, damaged portion shall be sanded smooth
and entire panel repainted.
E.
Provide (5) 3/4" conduits stubbed into accessible ceiling spaces above and below each flush
mounted panel.
F.
Utilize hydraulic actuated dies to compress the cable connecting lugs. Dies shall compress
the full circumference of the cable.
END OF SECTION 16420
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16420-3
15025
SECTION 16470 - FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
PROVISIONS
A.
1.02
1.03
Furnish and install fuses in all fusible equipment, and provide spare fuses as described herein.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
All provisions of the contract including Division 1 apply to work specified in each section of
this Division 16.
B.
See Sections 16010, 16170, and 16500.
C.
The supplier shall submit a list of fuse manufacturers and types to be used on this project for
review.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Complete manufacturer's data, including catalog cuts, time-current curves, and coordination
data as required below. Submit parts replacement/ordering information as part of O & M
Manuals.
B.
All submittals shall be made in accordance with requirements of Section 16010 and Division
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Fuses shall be high interrupting, current-limiting, U.L. approved, and shall be Bussman types
listed below:
MAIN SWITCHES
250 V
600V
600V CLASS J
0-600A
ABOVE 600A
FEEDERS
LPNRK
KRPC
LPSRK
KRPC
LPJ
KRPC
0-600A
ABOVE 600A
GENERAL PURPOSE
TRANSFORMERS (LINE SIDE)
LPNRK
KRPC
FRNR
LPNRK
LPSRK
KRPC
FRSR
LPSRK
LPJ
KRPC
LPJ
LPJ
K-RATED TRANSFORMERS (LINE
SIDE)
MOTORS
MOTORS (ABOVE 600A)
FRNR
FRSR
LPNRK
KRPC
LPSRK
KRPC
LPJ
KRPC
FLUORESCENT BALLASTS
HLR/GLR
HLR/GLR
HLR/GLR
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16470-1
15025
B.
2.02
Class RK5 fuses shall be used for safety switches and combination starters. Class RK5 fuses
shall be dual element time delay rejection-type fuse with interrupting capacity rating of
200,000 Amps. Fuses shall have 10 seconds time delay at 500% rate current. Fuses shall
clearly indicate that the fuse has blown. RK5 fuses shall be Bussman FRS-R-SPI
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers shall be as listed above.
B.
Fuses have been selected to assure system coordination and compatibility. Submit fuse curves
and equivalency charts with all proposed substitutions.
C.
Substitutions may be considered only when submitted in conformance with Section 16010.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Furnish and install fuses in all fusible equipment. Type shall be selected from the above
schedule. Ampacity shall be as shown on the drawings, or selected to match equipment rating.
B.
Provide fuse clips and adaptors as required to match fuse type to fuseholder.
C.
Install fuses in fuseholder with fuse rating visible.
D.
Provide (3) spare fuses of each different type and size used on the project.
END OF SECTION 16470
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16470-2
15025
SECTION 16490 - CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
PROVISIONS
A.
Provide molded-case, insulated case, or power circuit breaker mounted in grouped equipment.
Grouped equipment includes panelboards, distribution panels, etc.
B.
Provide new power circuit breaker devices in existing Eaton Power R Line panels as required.
C.
Become familiar with the project conditions and existing equipment prior to bid. Verify
brand, type, and AIC rating for each panel. No attempt has been made to show or otherwise
indicate existing panel brands and breaker types on the drawings or in the specifications. Only
the required amperes, poles, and voltage have been indicated on the drawings.
D.
The Contractor shall submit the following shop drawings and data for review by the Engineer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ratings: Voltage, frame size, trip rating, trip settings, interrupting capacity at rated
voltage.
Dimensions, mounting details and enclosure types.
Certification that the breakers conform to the standards required and that they are all
listed for the applications on this job.
Time-current curves.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Inspect existing panels for brand, model, and other related information before ordering.
B.
Molded case breakers shall comply with NEMA Standard AB-1-1986. They shall be thermal
magnetic trip free, non-interchangeable trip, non-adjustable trip unless otherwise noted.
C.
Circuit breakers shall be fully rated for interrupting rating. Series rated breakers are not
acceptable. Refer to the power riser diagram and panelboard schedules for required
interrupting capacity ratings (AIC) of circuit breaker devices. Where interrupting ratings are
shown that do not comply with standard ratings of the manufacturer, the next highest rating
shall be provided by the Contractor.
D.
Circuit breakers shall be ambient-compensated, thermal-magnetic, bolt-on molded-case type,
which will provide inverse time delay overload and instantaneous short circuit protection.
Branch circuit breakers shall have one, two or three poles as designate on the panelboard
schedule. Multi-pole circuit breakers shall have integral trip mechanisms. Circuit breakers
utilizing handle ties for two or three pole operation are not acceptable. Interrupting capacity
shall match the rating of the panel.
E.
Circuit breakers serving air-conditioning and refrigeration equipment shall have an “HACR”
label. Circuit breakers serving HID lighting shall have an “HID” label.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16490-1
15025
F.
All circuits breakers, which serve time clocks and other miscellaneous control devices, and
circuits which serve fire smoke dampers, shall be equipped with mechanical handle locking
devices.
G.
Power circuit breakers shall comply with NEMA Standard SG-3-1981 and shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Power circuit breakers shall use a "stored energy" mechanism in closing and tripping
the breaker. This shall consist of steel springs which shall be fully charged by the
operator prior to closing and which, when released, shall provide enough energy to
close and latch the breaker under any service conditions within the specified rating of
the breaker. When the breaker is tripped it shall be driven open by steel springs
which shall be fully charged at all times after closing to permit instantaneous tripping
upon closure if necessary. The breakers shall be trip free.
Solid state type trips shall be used consisting of current transformers, a solid state
unit to interpret the output of the current transformers, and a tripping solenoid acting
directly to trip the breaker. The current transformers shall have taps which can be
changed simply in the field to permit trip ratings to be changed in any of the
manufacturer's standard settings. Trip units shall be capable of being calibrated and
tested by a portable test set. The time delay and pickup characteristics shall also be
variable in the field. The devices shall be designed such that performance at any
setting is repeatable. A ground detection device shall be provided, it shall be an
integral part of the trip device and provide field adjustable settings.
Power circuit breakers used for motor starting shall have a position switch and
auxiliary contacts.
The manufacturer shall be capable of furnishing certified test reports for the test
required in NEMA Standard SG-3-1981.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Molded case breakers shall be firmly attached to bus and cable. Connections shall be
rechecked after the first load cycle has been applied to the breaker.
B.
Individual units in enclosure shall be mounted at 4' - 6" above the floor on walls and 3' - 6"
above floor, when strut supported at motors, etc.
END OF SECTION 16490
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16490-2
15025
SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
PROVISIONS
A.
Provide lighting fixtures in all locations shown on the drawings.
B.
Bidders shall acquaint themselves with the conditions and requirements of the building
construction, as this work is based on furnishing all materials required to entirely complete
each fixtures ready for use.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
All provisions of the contract including Division 1 apply to work specified in each section of
this Division 16.
B.
See Sections 16010, 16190, 16470, and 16561.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Complete manufacturer's data, including catalog cuts on standard equipment, and shop
drawings for all custom equipment. Submit parts replacement/ordering information as part of
O & M Manuals.
B.
If lamps are included with the fixture, provide lamp submittal data.
C.
All submittals shall be made in accordance with requirements of Section 16010 and Division
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
See schedule for listing of required lighting fixtures. Fixtures shall be complete with trim,
mounting hardware, and lamps.
B.
All fixtures shall bear the U.L. label associated with the type, location, and usage of the
individual fixture.
C.
Fixtures manufactured with pre-painted metal will not be accepted.
D.
Each ballasted fixture shall be provided with ballasts of one of the following types. Each
ballast shall be protected with a single element fuse, located within the ballast compartment.
Ballast voltage rating shall be selected to match circuit voltage.
1.
2.
3.
Fluorescent ballasts shall be program rapid start, true electronic (no hybrids) with the
following performance requirements:
Comply with Federal Efficiency Law #100-357
Comply with Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Radio Frequency Interference
(RFI) limits set by the Federal Communications Commission (CFR 47, Part 18)
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16500-1
15025
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
E.
LED Drivers
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F.
Provide transient protection that meets or exceeds IEEE 587 category A and shall
provide high frequency ground fault protection, lightning protection, brownout
protection and faulty lamp protection.
Power factor shall be 95% or greater at full light output.
Total harmonic distortion and third harmonic distortion shall be less than 10%
Ballast factor shall be greater than 0.85
Lamp current crest factor shall be less than 1.5
Operate at not less than 20kHz frequency and have no audible noise, performing
better than sound rating "A"
Provide at a minimum, normal rated lamp life as state by the lamp manufacturer
Have class P thermal protection and be U.L. listed
Certified by Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL)
Minimum Efficiency of 85%
Sound “A” rating.
Minimum power factor of 90%.
Temperature Range: -30 deg. C to 50 deg. C
Conform to electromagnetic interference standard FCC Regulation Part 15, Subpart
J.
Lamp-driver combination shall not reduce normal rated life of lamps.
All fixtures shall be complete with lamps of one of the following types:
1.
2.
3.
Fluorescent (T8, 265 ma.): Osram/Sylvania Octron "800 XPS" series, 3500K.
Fluorescent (Compact): Osram/Sylvania DULUX D/E series, 3500K.
All other lamps shall be as required by equipment or as noted on the drawings.
G.
All plastic lenses shall be K-12 virgin acrylic unless noted otherwise. All flat plastic lenses
shall be 0.125" minimum thickness.
H.
All door frames for fluorescent fixtures shall be equipped with spring-loaded latches.
I.
All louvered fixtures shall be shipped with dust covers and shall be removed after final
building vacuuming has been completed.
J.
Fixtures mounted to T-bar ceilings shall utilize standard T-bar accessories as manufactured by
the A&G Co. or equivalent.
K.
Spares: Provide spare equipment in the following quantities:
1.
2.
3.
L.
Fluorescent lamps: (1) cases of each different size and type.
Other lamps: (1) cases of each different size and type.
Lenses: 10% (or 25 lenses, whichever fewer) of each different type.
LED and Fluorescent luminaires noted or indicated as emergency units shall be complete with
an automatic battery pack assembly to operate one lamp. Assembly shall be Emergi-Lite,
Bodine or approved alternate. Luminaire shall have valid UL label with battery-pack
installed. Installation shall be done at the luminaire's manufacturer's factory. Battery pack
assemblies shall provide a minimum of 1100 lumens of light output after 1-1/2 hours of
operation. Unit may be field installed if installation does not void UL label of battery pack or
luminaires.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16500-2
15025
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers shall be as listed above and as listed in the fixture schedule on the
drawings.
B.
Substitutions may be considered only when submitted in conformance with Section 16010.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Mount fixtures securely and adequately to meet the requirements of NFPA 70, Para. 410.16
and UBC Standard 47-18. Mount in locations as indicated on the drawings as follows:
B.
Surface/Suspended
1.
2.
3.
C.
Mount stem suspended fixtures on swivel hangers which are a standard catalog item
of the same manufacture as the fixture. Provide one more hanger than the number of
fixtures in the row. Coordinate degree of swivel with the ceiling slope.
Mount cable suspended fixtures with cable and hangers which are a standard catalog
item of the same manufacture as the fixture. Cable hangers shall be adjustable for
leveling the fixtures. Provide the number of hangers as recommended by the fixture
manufacturer. Electrical feeds for cable suspended fixtures shall be with a coiled
cord.
Mount surface fixtures at two support points. Provide 1-1/2" metal spaces for
fixtures which occur on combustible ceilings. Submit spacer for approval.
Recessed
1.
2.
3.
4.
Coordinate recessed fixture locations with the acoustical tile pattern, concealed
ductwork, piping, etc.
Check ceiling type (lay-in, gypboard, etc.) before ordering fixtures.
Fixtures installed in T-bar ceilings shall be supported as required by N.E.C.
All recessed fixtures (in accessible ceilings) shall be connected by means of a flexible
conduit which is attached to a 4" square junction box. Box may serve more than one
fixture.
D.
Verify all measurements. Contractor is responsible for fixtures fitting in place in a satisfactory
and workman-like manner, to the approval of the Architect.
E.
Contractor shall verify fixture locations with the Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans, where
such plans are provided.
END OF SECTION 16500
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16500-3
15025
SECTION 16561 - LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
PROVISIONS
A.
This Section of the Specification applies to low voltage lighting controls for the project.
B.
Provide complete lighting controls for interior lighting as indicated on the plans and
specified herein. Specifications shall take precedence over the plans if discrepancies
arise.
C.
Adjust and test the lighting controls, and demonstrated operation to the Owner’s
Representative and Commissioning Agent.
D.
Instruct the Owner’s staff in operating the controls and recommended maintenance
procedures.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Drawings and the general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to work in this
section
B.
See Sections 16010, 16120, 16134, and 16131.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A.
Interior vestibules, common spaces and corridors shall have time-based controls
consisting of automatic relays and low voltage switches. Lighting installed under skylights or within daylight zones shall be provided with daylight harvesting and photocells.
B.
Interior office area lighting shall be occupancy based with dual technology occupancy
sensors, power pack relays and slave relays.
C.
Classrooms shall be provided with daylight harvesting and individual room controls
including dual technology occupancy sensors, photocells, and low voltage wall controls.
D.
Include low-voltage cabling and all other miscellaneous equipment and devices required
for a complete and operable lighting control system.
SYSTEM OPERATION
A.
Time-based controls for interior lighting shall provide automatic on/off control as
indicated.
1.
Control interior lighting by zone, with each zone incorporating a separate
override switch.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16561-1
15025
2.
3.
4.
B.
Occupancy-based controls for interior lighting shall provide automatic shut-off control as
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Time-based control zones shall include spaces in the building where no
occupancy-based controls are provided, other than areas where lighting must
remain in operation 24-hours per day, in mechanical and electrical equipment
rooms.
Each time-based control zone shall be equipped with means to manually override
the automatic lighting controls, which shall enable the lighting in that zone to
remain in operation for an adjustable time period set for no longer than 2 hours.
The manual override switch shall be located within sight of the controlled
lighting.
Interior lighting in each time-based control zone shall be enabled during normal
business hours by automatic controls which switch on and off automatically at
preprogrammed times each day. The controls shall incorporated separate
schedules for each day of the week, with automatic pre-programmed schedule
changes for holidays and special events.
Control interior lighting by room, with automatic controls functioning to turn off
the general room lighting after a time delay when no occupant is present in the
room.
Occupancy sensors shall provide complete and proper volumetric coverage of
each room.
Occupancy-based controls, except wall switch occupancy sensors, shall include
means for automatic self-adjustment. Sensors shall have adjustable sensitivity
and time-delay settings, which shall be adjusted in each room to suit the actual
room conditions. Dual-technology sensors shall also be equipped with selectable
technology logic, initially set to require actuation of both technologies to activate
the sensor and either technology to keep it activated. The occupancy sensors
shall be aimed and adjusted such that the presence of one occupant anywhere in a
room is sufficient to keep the control from automatically shutting off the lighting,
without requiring excessive activity or special movement on the part of the
occupant. Normal air movement while the room is unoccupied shall not in itself
cause the occupancy sensors to remain activated.
Wall switch occupancy sensors, shall include means for manual adjustment.
Sensors shall have adjustable sensitivity and time-delay settings, which shall be
adjusted in each room to suit the actual room conditions. The occupancy sensors
shall be adjusted such that the presence of one occupant within sight of the sensor
is sufficient to keep the controls from automatically shutting off the lighting, with
sufficient time-delay to allow an occupant to conduct any normal functions that
may be out of sight from the sensor. Normal air movement while the room is
unoccupied shall not in itself cause the occupancy sensor to remain activated.
Occupancy based controls, except wall switch occupancy sensors, shall include
auxiliary contacts for interface with the energy management system for HVAC
system control, in accordance with requirements of Division 15.
Dimming daylight harvesting controls for interior lighting shall provide automatic
dimming control as indicated.
1.
Control interior lighting in daylight zones room by room, with automatic controls
to dim the general room lighting in the daylight zone, after a time delay,
whenever the ambient illumination in the daylight zone increases or decreases
outside of the pre-set deadband beyond the setpoints for the current level.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16561-2
15025
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
1.05
Automatic lighting controls which are programmed or which are time-based shall
incorporate back-up capabilities for at least 10 hours upon interruption of power.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals Package: Submit the shop drawings, and the product data specified below at
the same time as a package.
1.
2.
3.
1.06
Increase in ambient illumination in the daylight zone shall cause the lamps to dim
proportionately, with the row closet to the window dimming more than the row
or rows farther away. Decrease in the ambient illumination in the daylight zone
shall cause the lamps to increase lumen output proportionately.
The controls shall include an automatic shut-off feature, capable of automatically
shutting off a channel when the daylight remains adequate to cause the channel to
fully dim for a pre-set interval. The controls shall include facilities to disable this
feature.
The controls shall provide separate adjustable dimming rates and time delays for
each lighting channel in each daylight zone.
In each room that is equipped with dimming day-light harvesting controls, a
manual override dimmer switch shall be provided. The manual override switch
shall permit switching between automatic control and manual control of lighting
in the daylight zone. When manual override dimmer switch is activated, the
controls shall hold the lighting at the user-designated level until the controls are
returned to automatic control.
Dimming daylight harvesting controls shall be compatible with occupancy
sensors which shall function as described above to shut off all lights in the room,
including those in the daylight zone, when the room is unoccupied. Occupancy
sensors shall shut off the lights in the room regardless of the ambient
illumination.
Shop Drawings:
a.
Composite wiring and/or schematic diagram of each control circuit as
proposed to be installed (standard diagrams will not be accepted).
b.
Scale drawing for each area showing exact location of each sensor, room
controller, and digital switch.
c.
Show coverage areas of each sensor.
Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions.
Include data for each device which:
a.
Indicates where sensor is proposed to be installed.
b.
Prove that the sensor is suitable for the proposed application.
B.
Test Reports: Record of all field test data. Submit to the Commissioning Authority with
a copy to the Architect.
C.
Training Documentation:
session.
Sign-off form and attendee sign-in sheet for the training
WARRANTY
A.
Provide a five year complete manufacturer’s warranty on all products to be free of
manufacturers’ defects.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16561-3
15025
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
LIGHTING CONTROLS
A.
Lightings Controls shall be compatible with the existing Lutron Energi Savr Node (ESN)
System with H-series Ballasts and XPS soft switch system. The ESN(s) shall be provided
with four (4) dimming circuits 0-10V with (4) relays to control the common area LED
lighting. Where only on/off control is required the ESN node with softswitch will be
used. Provide a complete and operable system with all necessary components.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
These areas are to be dimmed separately at Office 202 with multiple digital switches:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
2.
3.
F13 window pendant fixtures. After hours the Library likes to have these on to
be seen from the street. Note that one F13 fixture is mounted in Conference
Room 203A. This fixture needs to be controlled separately when the conference
room is being used. This would allow it to be shut-off without shutting off the
rest of the F13s. After hours this fixture would need to operate with the other
F13 fixtures for a night time setting.
F9 casework downlights.
F5 fixtures including F3 and F7 fixtures in Casual 201.
Conference Room 203A and 203B:
1.
2.
E.
Teens 206
Center Area 205
Teen Media 207
Tech Center 204
Casual Seating 20
Fixtures and Areas to be Individually Switched at Office 202.
1.
D.
Energi Savr Node: QSN-4T16-S
Digital Switch: QSWS2-5BRLI-WH
Wireless Sensor Module: QSM2-4W-C
Daylight Sensor: EC-DIR-WH
Ceiling Dual Technology Sensor: LOS-CDT-2000-WH
Din Rail Power Supply: QSPS-DH-1-75
Raise/Lower/On/Off switch: PX-2BRL-GWH-Io1/CW-1-WH
Programming Interface: QSE-CI-AP-D
Integration to XPS: QSE-IO
These rooms can act as one room or separately depending on when the operable
wall is closed.
F13 fixture to be shut-off independently from rest of F13 fixtures.
Areas where fixtures will be controlled by local room controls.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Maker’s Space 208
Wet Storage 208A
Dry Storage 208B
IT Room 211
Community Board Room 210
Storage 212
Primary AV 216
Elec 216A
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16561-4
15025
9.
F.
Storage 213A
Areas needing Special Control
1.
2.
Large Meeting Room 213
a.
This room will be controlled by a dimming control panel. iLumin
SC120-UN-3P-ML-20. See drawing for dimming circuits.
Serve and Prep 217
a.
Provide local digital switch to control this area for demonstrations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Attend a pre-install meeting with the owner, electrical contractor, and lighting controls
contractor to discuss the lighting functions of the facility.
B.
Provide detailed point to point wiring diagrams for every termination. Provide wire
specifications and wire colors to simplify contactor termination requirements. Provide
shop drawings.
C.
Install the work of this Section in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions
unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivity to guarantee proper detection of occupants
and energy savings.
1.
E.
Provide written or computer-generated documentation on the commissioning of the
system including room by room description including:
1.
2.
3.
F.
3.02
Adjust time delay so that controlled area remains lighted for 5 minutes after
occupant leaves area.
Sensor parameters, time delays, sensitivities, and daylighting setpoints.
Sequence of operation, (e.g. manual ON, Auto OFF. etc.)
Load Parameters (e.g. blink warning, etc.)
Re-commissioning – After 30 days from occupancy re-calibrate all sensor time delays
and sensitivities to meet the Owner’s Project Requirements. Provide a detailed report to
the Architect / Owner of re-commissioning activity.
FACTORY COMMISSIONING
A.
Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be commissioned by the
manufacturer's factory authorized representative who will verify a complete fully
functional system.
B.
The electrical contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the electrical engineer
with ten working days written notice of the system startup and adjustment date.
C.
Upon completion of the system commissioning the factory-authorized technician shall
provide the proper training to the owner's personnel on the adjustment and maintenance
of the system.
D.
Training shall be video recorded if required by end user.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16561-5
15025
PART 4 - EXECUTION
4.01
4.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
B.
XPS control system cable/wiring to wall stations, sensors, modules, etc must be daisychained. T-taps, star, or other wiring topologies are not allowed. Refer to installation
instructions.
C.
Provide complete installation of system in accordance with Contract Documents.
D.
Provide equipment at locations and in quantities indicated on Drawings. Provide any
additional equipment required to provide control and design intent.
SERVICE AND SUPPORT
A.
Startup and Programming
1.
2.
3.
B.
Technical Support
1.
2.
C.
2.
3.
4.
Provide minimum eight (8) hours end-user training upon completion of startup
and programming.
Arrange training time/date with end user at least two (2) weeks prior to startup
and programming.
Provide sign up list with names and titles.
Training shall be video recorded if required by end user.
CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A.
4.04
Provide factory direct technical support hotline 24 hours per day, 7 days per
week.
Provide local support through manufacturer’s representative:
a.
Ambient Lighting of Spokane, WA.
Training
1.
4.03
Provide system start-up and programming upon completion of installation:
Contractor must obtain, fill out, and return the Lutron pre-startup checklist
documentation prior to startup and programming.
Contractor shall obtain from end user required time clock schedule(s), scenes,
event schedule(s), and related end-user input information prior to startup.
Provide O&M Manual documentation, startup reports, and related information as
required by the specifications.
MAINTENANCE
A.
Capable of providing on-site service support within 24 hours anywhere in continental
United States and within 72 hours worldwide except where special visas are required.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16561-6
15025
B.
Offer renewable service contract on yearly basis, to include parts, factory labor, and
annual training visits. Make service contracts available up to ten years after date of
system startup.
END OF SECTION 15651
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16561-7
15025
SECTION 16720 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide an extension of the existing Silent Knight Farenhyt IFP-2000 fire alarm control
system to include the new devices indicated on the drawing. This section includes the
extension and testing of the existing intelligent reporting fire alarm system.
B.
The contractor shall furnish and install a complete 24 VDC, electrically supervised,
analog addressable fire alarm system as specified herein and indicated on the drawings.
The system shall include but not be limited to all control panels, power supplies,
initiating devices, audible and visual notification appliances, alarm devices, and all
accessories required to provide a complete operating fire alarm system.
C.
The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard 72 for
Protected Premises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by this
specification. The system shall be electrically supervised and monitor the integrity of all
conductors.
D.
The installing company shall employ NICET (minimum Level II Fire Alarm Technology)
technicians on site to guide the final checkout and to ensure the systems integrity.
SCOPE
A.
An extension to the intelligent reporting, microprocessor controlled fire detection system
shall be installed in accordance to the project specifications and drawings.
B.
Basic Performance
1.
Alarm
a.
When a device indicates any alarm condition the control panel must
respond within 10 seconds. The General Alarm or Supervisory Alarm
LED on the annunciator(s) should light and the LCD should prompt the
user as to the number of current events. The alarm information must be
stored in event memory for later review. Event memory must be
available at the main and all remote annunciators.
b.
When the alarmed device is restored to normal, the control panel shall be
required to be manually reset to clear the alarm condition, except that the
alarms may be silenced as programmed.
c.
An alarm shall be silenced by a code at the main or remote annunciators.
When silenced, this shall not prevent the resounding of subsequent
events if another event should occur (subsequent alarm feature). When
alarms are silenced the silenced LED on the control panel, and on any
remote annunciators shall remain lit, until the alarmed device is returned
to normal
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16720-1
15025
2.
3.
1.03
Troubles
a.
When a device indicates a trouble condition, the control panel System
Trouble LED should light and the LCD should prompt the user as to the
number of current events. The trouble information must be stored in
event memory for later review. Event memory must be available at the
main and all remote annunciators.
b.
When the device in trouble is restored to normal, the control panel shall
be automatically reset, The trouble restore information must be stored in
event memory for later review. Event memory must be available at the
main and all remote annunciators. A trouble shall be silenced by a code
or at the main or remote annunciators. When silenced, this shall not
prevent the resounding of subsequent events if another event should
occur.
Supervision methods
a.
Each SLC loop shall be electrically supervised for opens and ground
faults in the circuit wiring, and shall be so arranged that a fault condition
on any loop will not cause an alarm to sound. Additionally, every
addressable device connected to the SLC will be supervised and
individually identified if in a fault condition. The occurrence of any fault
will light a trouble LED and sound the system trouble sounder, but will
not interfere with the proper operation of any circuit which does not have
a fault condition.
b.
Each indicating appliance circuit shall be electrically supervised for
opens, grounds and short circuit faults, on the circuit wiring, and shall be
so arranged that a fault condition on any indicating appliance circuit or
group of circuits will not cause an alarm to sound. The occurrence of any
fault will light the trouble LED and sound the system trouble sounder,
but will not interfere with the proper operation of any circuit which does
not have a fault condition.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General:
1.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Three copies of all submittals shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for
review.
Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine
compliance with drawings and specifications.
Include manufacturer's name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements,
equipment layout, device arrangement, complete wiring point-to-point diagrams,
battery calculations and conduit layouts.
Show annunciator layout, configurations, and terminations.
Submit shop drawings, cut sheets and calculations to the AHJ for approval.
Manuals:
1.
2.
Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete operating and
maintenance manuals listing the manufacturer's name(s), including technical data
sheets.
Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each device and the
interconnections between the items of equipment.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16720-2
15025
3.
D.
Software Modifications
1.
2.
E.
1.05
Provide the services of a factory trained and authorized technician to perform all
system software modifications, upgrades or changes. Response time of the
technician to the site shall not exceed 4 hours.
Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary
to modify the fire alarm system on site. Modification includes addition and
deletion of devices, circuits, zones and changes to system operation and custom
label changes for devices or zones. The system structure and software shall place
no limit on the type or extent of software modifications on-site.
Certifications:
1.
1.04
Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the
information required to properly operate the equipment and system.
Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major
equipment manufacturer indicating that the proposed supervisor of the
installation and the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized
representative of the major equipment manufacturer. Include names and
addresses in the certification.
GUARANTY
A.
Warranty all materials, installation and workmanship for a three (3) year period, unless
otherwise specified. A copy of the manufacturer warranty shall be provided with the
close out documentation.
B.
The full cost of maintenance, labor and materials required to correct any defect during
this warranty period shall be included in the submittal bid.
POST CONTRACT MAINTENANCE
A.
Complete maintenance and repair service for the fire alarm system shall be available
from a factory trained authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major
equipment for a period of five (5) years after expiration of the guaranty.
B.
As part of the bid/proposal, include a quote for a maintenance contract to provide all
maintenance, tests, and repairs described below. Include also a quote for unscheduled
maintenance/repairs, including hourly rates for technicians trained on this equipment, and
response travel costs for each year of the maintenance period. Submittals that do not
identify all post contract maintenance costs will not be accepted. Rates and costs shall be
valid for the period of five (5) years after expiration of the guaranty.
C.
Maintenance and testing shall be on a semiannual basis or as required by the AHJ. A
preventive maintenance schedule shall be provided by the contractor describing the
protocol for preventive maintenance. The schedule shall include:
1.
2.
3.
Systematic examination, adjustment and cleaning of all detectors, manual fire
alarm stations, control panels, power supplies, relays, waterflow switches and all
accessories of the fire alarm system.
Each circuit in the fire alarm system shall be tested semiannually.
Each smoke detector shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of
NFPA 72 Chapter 7.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16720-3
15025
1.06
APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A.
The specifications and standards listed below form a part of this specification. The
system shall fully comply with the latest issue of these standards, if applicable.
B.
National Electric Code, Article 760
C.
National Fire Protection Association Standards:
1.
2.
3.
National Electrical Code
National Fire Alarm Code
Life Safety Code
D.
Local and State Building Codes
E.
Local Authorities Having Jurisdiction
F.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
G.
All equipment shall be approved by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for it’s
intended purpose, listed as power limited by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., for
the following standards as applicable:
UL 864 UOJZ Control units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
a.
Local Signaling Unit
b.
Central Station Signaling Protected Premises Unit
c.
Remote Signaling Protected Premises Unit
d.
Water Deluge Releasing Unit
UL 268
Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling systems.
UL 268A
Smoke Detectors for duct applications
UL 217
Smoke Detectors for Single Stations
UL 521
Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling systems.
UL 228
Door Holders for Fire Protective Signaling systems.
UL 464
Audible Signaling appliances
UL 1638
Visual Signaling appliances
UL 38
Manually Activated Signaling Boxes
UL 346
Waterflow indicators for Fire Protective Signaling systems.
UL 1481
Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling systems.
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
1.
1.07
NFPA 70
NFPA 72
NFPA 101
All visual Notification appliances and manual pull stations shall comply with the
requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act.
APPROVALS
A.
All fire alarm system equipment shall be listed for it’s intended purpose and be
compatibility listed to assure the integrity of the complete system.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16720-4
15025
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL, GENERAL:
A.
All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model. The
materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally
recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protective signaling system, meeting the
National Fire Alarm Code.
B.
All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers'
recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring
diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system
installation.
C.
All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held
firmly in place (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings).
Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load.
MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL OR NETWORK NODE:
A.
Control Panel
1.
The existing fire alarm control panel (FACP) is a Silent Knight IFP-2000 analog
addressable control panel.
B.
The Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) and Data Communication Bus (S-BUS) shall be wired
with standard NEC 760 compliant wiring, no twisted, shielded or mid capacitance wiring
is required for standard installations. All FACP screw terminals shall be capable of
accepting 12-18 AWG wire. All system wiring shall be in accordance with the
requirements of NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code (NEC) and also comply with
article 760 of the NEC.
C.
Signaling Line Circuits
1.
D.
Each SLC shall be capable of a wiring distance of 10,000 feet from the SLC
driver module (5815XL) and be capable of supporting 159 detectors and 159
addressable module devices. The communication protocol to SLC devices must
be digital. Any SLC loop device, which goes into alarm, must interrupt the
polling cycle for priority response from the FACP. The FACP must respond
consistently to a device that goes into alarm on an SLC in under 10 seconds. The
auxiliary 5815XL SLC loop module must be capable of being located up to 6000
feet from the FACP on an RS-485 bus, which is separate from the SLC bus. The
SLC shall be capable of functioning in a class A or class B configuration.
SLC loop devices
1.
Devices supported must include analog photoelectric, ionization smoke detectors,
analog heat detectors, addressable input modules, relay output modules or
addressable notification modules. There is to be no limit to the number of any
particular device type up to the maximum of 159 detectors and 159 addressable
modules that can be connected to the SLC.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16720-5
15025
E.
Analog detector functions
1.
F.
Sensitivity function
1.
G.
The FACP shall support eight programmable Flexput circuits that are capable of
being programmed as supervised reverse polarity notification circuits or
supervised auxiliary power circuits that can be programmed as continuous,
resettable or door holder power. The circuits shall also be programmable as input
circuits in class A or B configurations to support dry contact or compatible two
wire smoke detectors.
Addressable Notification Module
1.
I.
The FACP shall have the ability to set three different sensitivity levels. A zone
can be programmed to a day and a night sensitivity value. The day/night
schedule shall allow for 16 holiday dates that are user programmable to allow the
FACP to respond at the night level on those days.
Programmable Flexputs
1.
H.
The products of combustion detectors must communicate analog values using a
digital protocol to the control panel for the following functions:
a.
Automatic compliance with NFPA 72 standards for detector sensitivity
testing
b.
Drift compensation to assure detector is operating correctly
c.
Maintenance alert when a detector nears the trouble condition
d.
Trouble alert when a detector is out of tolerance
e.
Alert control panel of analog values that indicate fire.
The contractor shall furnish and install where indicated on the plans, addressable
notification modules, Silent Knight model IDP-Control. The modules shall be
U.L. listed compatible with Silent Knight’s IFP-2000 fire alarm control panel.
The notification module must provide one class A (Style Z) or class B (Style Y)
notification output with one auxiliary power input. The notification module must
be suitable for mounting in a standard 4 square electrical box and must include a
plastic cover plate. The notification module must provide an LED that is visible
from the outside of the cover plate. The notification module must be fully
programmable for such applications as required by the installation. The IDPControl shall reside on the SLC loop and can be placed up to 10,000ft. from the
control or 5815XL SLC loop module.
Annunciators
1.
The main control must have a built in annunciator with an 160-character LCD
display and feature LED’s for General alarm, Supervisory, System trouble,
System Silence and Power. When in the normal condition the LCD shall display
time and date based on a 200 year clock which is capable of automatic daylight
savings time adjustments. All controls and programming keys are silicone
mechanical type with tactile and audible feedback. Keys have a travel of .040
in.. No membrane style buttons will be permissible. The annunciator must be
able to silence and reset alarms through the use of a keypad entered code. The
annunciators must have twenty levels of user codes that will allow the limitation
of operating system programming to authorized individuals.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16720-6
15025
J.
Remote Annunciators
1.
2.
K.
I/O LED Driver Module
1.
L.
The fire system shall be able to support a minimum of eight I/O modules
(SK5880) that shall be used to drive remote LED graphic style displays and
accommodate up to eight dry contact type switch inputs. The I/O modules shall
each drive up to 40 LEDs without requiring external power connections. The I/O
module inputs shall be supervised and be suitable for alarm and trouble circuits
as well as reset and silence switches. The system shall also support up to 40
LED drivers that reside on the two-wire SLC loop. These driver boards shall
contain 80 LED outputs that are powered by an external power source.
Serial/Parallel Interface
1.
M.
The fire system shall be capable of supporting a minimum of eight remote
annunciators. LCD Remote annunciator Model RA-2000 shall have the same
control and display layout so that they match identically the built in annunciator.
Remote annunciators shall have the same functionality and operation as the built
in annunciator. All annunciators must have 160-character LCD displays and must
feature five LED’s for general alarm, supervisory, system trouble, system silence,
and system power. All controls and programming keys are silicone mechanical
type with tactical and audible feedback. Keys shall have a travel of .040 inches.
No membrane style buttons will be permitted.
The annunciator must be able to silence and reset alarms through the use of a
code entered on the annunciator keypad. The annunciator must have twenty
levels of user codes that will limit the operating system programming to
authorized individuals. The control panel must allow all annunciators to
accommodate multiple users input simultaneously. Remote annunciators shall be
capable of operating at a distance of 6000 feet from the main control panel on
unshielded non-twisted cable.
The fire system shall be capable of supporting up to two serial / parallel
interfaces (SK5824) that are capable of driving standard computer style printers.
The interface shall be programmable as to what information is sent to it and shall
include the ability to print out Detector Status by point, Event History by point
and System Programming.
Distributed Power Module
1.
The contractor shall supply a power module RPS-1000 compatible with the IFP2000 fire alarm control panel. The power module must have 6 amps of output
power, six flexput circuits rated at 3 amps each, and two form C relay circuits
rated at 2.5 amps at 24 volts DC. The fire system shall be capable of supporting a
minimum of eight (8) RPS-1000 power modules. The six flexput circuits shall
have the same functionality as the flexput circuits on the main panel. The
Distributed Power Supply shall be capable of being connected via an RS-485
system bus (SBUS) at a maximum distance of 6000ft. from the main control
panel. The power module shall contain an additional RS-485 bus that is
completely compatible with all IFP-2000 add on modules; including 5815XL
SLC expanders, RA-2000, 5865, 5880 annunciators, 5824 serial/parallel module
and addressable devices. The power module will also act as a bus repeater so that
additional RS-485 (modules) devices can be connected at a maximum distance of
6000ft. from the power module.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16720-7
15025
2.
N.
Digital Communicator
1.
2.
O.
A ground fault detection circuit, to detect positive and negative grounds on all
field wiring. The ground fault detector shall operate the general trouble devices
as specified but shall not cause an alarm to be sounded. Ground fault will not
interfere with the normal operation, such as alarm, or other trouble conditions.
Over current Protection
1.
R.
The FACP will have three form “C” dry contacts, one will be dedicated to
trouble conditions, the other two will be programmable for alarm, trouble,
sprinkler supervisory, notification, pre-alarm, waterflow, manual pull, aux. 1 or
aux. 2. The trouble contact shall be normal in an electrically energized state so
that any total power loss (AC and Backup) will cause a trouble condition. In the
event that the Microprocessor on the FACP fails the trouble contacts shall also
indicate a trouble condition.
Ground Fault Detection
1.
Q.
The digital communicator must be an integral part of the control panel and be
capable of reporting all zones or points of alarm, supervisory, and trouble as well
as all system status information such as loss of AC, low battery, ground fault,
loss of supervision to any remote devices with individual and distinct messages
to a central station or remote station. The communicator must also be capable of
up/downloading of all system programming options, Event history and
Sensitivity compliance information to a PC on site or at a remote location.
The communicator shall have an answering machine bypass feature that will
allow the panel to respond to communication even on phone lines that have other
communication equipment present. The communicator must be capable of
reporting via SIA and Contact ID formats. The communicator shall have a
delayed AC loss report function which will provide a programmable report delay.
No controls that use External modems for remote programming and diagnostics
shall be accepted.
Dry Contacts
1.
P.
The power module’s RS-485 bus shall be electrically isolated providing ground
loop isolation and transient protection.
All low voltage circuits will be protected by microprocessor controlled power
limiting or have a self restoring polyswitches for the following: smoke detector
power, main power supply, indicating appliance circuits, battery standby power
and auxiliary output.
Test Functions
1.
2.
A “Lamp Test” or “Indicator Test” mode shall be a standard feature of the fire
alarm control panel and shall test all LED’s and the LCD display on the main
panel and remote annunciators.
A “Walk Test” mode shall be a standard feature of the fire alarm control panel.
The walk
test feature shall function so that each alarm input tested will
operate the associated notification appliance for two seconds. The FACP will
then automatically perform a reset
and confirm normal device operation.
The event memory shall contain the information on
the point tested. the
zone tripped, the zone restore and the individual points return to normal.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16720-8
15025
3.
4.
S.
Remote Input Capabilities
1.
T.
All notification circuits and modules shall be programmable via a mapping
structure that allows for a maximum of 999 output groups. Each of these groups
shall have the ability to be triggered by any of the panels 999 Zones. A zone may
trigger from groups individually, or may contain a global trigger for manual pull
stations, fire drills and two different system alarms. Additionally each Zone will
individually control the cadence pattern of each of the Groups that it is “Mapped”
to so that sounders can indicate a variety of conditions. The Zone shall be
capable of issuing a different cadence pattern for each of the Groups under it’s
control. The mapping structure must also allow a group to be designated to
“ignore cadence” for use with strobes and other continuous input devices. Zones
shall have eight different output categories; Detector alarm, Trouble,
Supervisory, Pre-alarm, Waterflow, Manual pull, Zone Auxiliary one and Zone
Auxiliary two. The patterns are; March code, ANSI 3.41, Single Stroke Bell
Temporal, California code, Zone 1 coded, Zone 2 coded, Zone 3 coded, Zone 4
coded, Zone 5 coded, Zone 6 coded, Zone 7 coded, Zone 8 coded, Custom output
pattern 1, Custom output pattern 2, Custom output pattern 3, Custom output
pattern 4, and Constant. Each NAC circuit can also be configured to produce one
of four synchronization patterns: AMSECO synchronization, Gentex
synchronization, System Sensor synchronization, and Wheelock synchronization.
This mapping/cadence pattern shall be supported by all system power supplies
and Notification Expander Modules. This mapping/cadence pattern shall be
supported by all system power supplies and Notification Expander Modules.
Downloading Software
1.
V.
The control panel shall have provisions for supervised switch inputs for the
purpose of Alarm reset and Alarm and trouble restore.
Notification Appliance Mapping Structure
1.
U.
A “Fire Drill” mode shall allow the manual testing of the fire alarm system
notification circuits. The “Fire Drill” shall be capable of being controlled at the
main annunciator, remote annunciators and via a remote contact input.
A “Bypass Mode” shall allow for any point or NAC circuit to be bypassed
without effecting the operation of the total fire system.
The fire alarm control panel must support up/downloading of system
programming from a Windows based PC. The FACP must also be able to
download the detector sensitivity test results and a 1000 event system event
buffer to the PC. Communication shall take place over a direct connection to the
PC and/or via the same telephone lines as the built in digital communicator and
shall not require an external modem to be connected to the panel. The
downloading software shall contain a code that will block unauthorized persons
from accessing the panel via direct connection or over the phone lines.
English language descriptions
1.
The FACP shall provide the ability to have a text description of each system
device, input zone and output group on the system. The use of individual lights
to provide descriptions will not be acceptable.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16720-9
15025
2.03
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A.
Power Supply and Charger:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.04
2.05
The entire system shall operate on 24 VDC, filtered switch mode power supply
with the rated current available of 9 Amps. The FACP must have a battery
charging circuit capable of complying with the following requirements:
a.
Sixty (60) hours of battery standby with five (5) minutes of alarm
signaling at the end of this sixty (60) hour period (as required per NFPA
72 remote station signaling requirements) using rechargeable batteries
with automatic charger to maintain standby gel-cell batteries in a fully
charged condition.
The power supply shall comply with U.L. Standard 864 for power limiting.
The FACP will indicate a trouble condition if there is a loss of AC power or if
the batteries are missing or of insufficient capacity to support proper system
operation in the event of AC failure. A “Battery Test” will be performed
automatically every minute to check the integrity of the batteries. The test must
disconnect the batteries from the charging circuit and place a load on the battery
to verify the battery condition.
In the event that it is necessary to provide additional power one or more of the
model RPS-1000 Distributed Power Modules shall be used to accomplish this
purpose. Alternatively, additional IFP-2000 control panels can be networked to
provide additional power.
Connections and Circuits
A.
Connections to the light and power service shall be on a dedicated branch circuit in
accordance with the National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 72, National Electrical Code
(NEC) NFPA 70, and the local authority having jurisdiction (AHJ).
B.
The circuit and connections shall be mechanically protected.
C.
A circuit disconnecting means shall be accessible only to authorized personnel and shall
be clearly marked “FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT CONTROL”.
ACCESSORY COMPONENTS
A.
The FACP shall support a the following devices on the RS-485 data bus:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
5815XL
5824
RA-2000
5865-3
5865-4
5880
RPS-1000
5495
5496
5499
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
Signaling Line Circuit Expander (SLC) Module
Printer Interface Module
LCD Remote Annunciator
LED Remote Annunciator
LED Remote Annunciator with reset and silence switches
LED I/O module
Intelligent Distributed Power Module
Remote Power Supply 6.0
Remote Addressable Power Supply 6.0 Amp
Remote Power Supply 9.0 Amp
16720-10
15025
B.
The FACP shall support the operation of 159 detectors and 159 addressable module total
devices per SLC loop without regard to device type. The following devices shall be
supported:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
C.
The FACP shall support these other Silent Knight devices via addressable input,
addressable Notification, or Addressable Output Modules.
1.
2.
2.06
IDP-Photo
Addressable Photoelectric Smoke Sensor
IDP-Photo-T
Addressable Photoelectric Smoke Sensor with Thermal
IDP-Ion
Addressable Ionization Sensor
IDP-Heat
Addressable Heat Sensor
IDP-Heat-ROR
Addressable Heat with Rate of Rise
IDP-Heat-HT
Addressable Heat High Temp 190°
IDP-Acclimate
Addressable Multi Criteria Smoke Sensor with Thermal
SSDNR
Addressable Photoelectric Duct Detector Does Not
Include Head
SSDCOIL
required on the DNR (Older Than Date Code 0013) if
Remote Test Switch is Used
IDP-6AB
6” Detector Base
IDP-Relay
Addressable Relay Module
IDP-Relay-6
Addressable Multi Relay Module
IDP-Monitor
Addressable Input Module (Class A or B)
IDP-Minimon
Mini Input Module
IDP-Monitor-2
Addressable Dual Input Module
IDP-Monitor-10
Addressable Multi Input Module (10)
IDP-Control
Addressable Notification Module
IDP-Control-6
Addressable Notification Multi Module (6)
IDP-Zone
Two Wire Smoke Detector Module
IDP-Zone-6
6 Multi Smoke Detector Module
IDP-Iso
Isolation Module
IDP-Beam
Addressable Beam Detector
IDP-Beam-T
Addressable Beam Detector with Test feature
SSB224RB
Detector Relay Base
SSB501BHT
Detector Sounder Base
SSRTS151KEY
Key Activated Remote Test Switch For Photoelectric
Duct Detector
SSRTS151
Magnet Remote Test Switch
IDP-Pull-SA
Addressable Single Action Pull Station
IDP-Pull-DA
Addressable Dual Action Pull Station
PS-SATK
PS-DATK
Single Action Manual Pull Station – Key Reset
Dual action Manual Pull Station – Key Reset
Furnish and install, where shown on the drawings, the following devices
A.
Manual Fire Alarm Stations
1.
Manual Fire Alarm Stations shall be non-coded, break glass, single or double
action type, with a key operated test-reset lock in order that they may be tested,
and so designed that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to
normal except by use of a key. The reset key shall be so designed that it will reset
manual station and open FACP without use of another key. An operated station
shall automatically condition itself so as to be visually detected, as operated, at a
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16720-11
15025
minimum distance of fifty feet, front or side. Manual stations shall be constructed
of die cast metal with clearly visible operating instructions on the front of the
stations in raised letters. Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting on
matching backbox, or semi-flush mounting on a standard single-gang box, and
shall be installed within the limits defined by the Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA) dependent on manual station accessibility or per local requirements.
Manual stations shall be Model IDP-Pull. If using conventional pull stations they
must be installed in conjunction with an Addressable Input Module (IDPMonitor) or Mini Input Module (IDP-Minimon) used with the manual stations.
Shall be Silent Knight Model PS-DATK, PS-SATK, PS-DA or PS-SA and
Underwriters Laboratories listed when used with addressable modules.
B.
Remote Power Supplies
1.
2.
C.
Notification Devices
1.
D.
The Remote Power Supplies for Notification appliances shall be the Silent
Knight Model RPS-1000. The Model RPS-1000 Intelligent Power Supply shall
hang on the main S-Bus and be programmed through the IFP-2000 control. It will
support 6 amps of 24 volt DC power, with 6 Flexput circuits, rated at 3 amps
each. Two additional 5815XL SLC loop expanders shall be capable to be
installed in the cabinet. The power supply will also regenerate the S-Bus for an
additional 6000’.
The remote power supply model 5499 or 5495 may also be used on the system.
These power supplies are activated by the IDP-Control module and support
24VDC power, with 4 notification circuits, rated at 3 amps each. The total power
on a 5495 is 6 amps. The total power on a 5499 is 9 amps. These power
boosters may also be activated from another notification circuit from either the
fire alarm control, a distributed power supply (RPS-1000).
The visual and audio/visual signaling devices shall be compatible with the IFP2000, RPS-2000, 5495, 5496, 5499, or RPS-1000 as stated in the installation
manuals and be Listed with Underwriters Laboratories Inc. per UL 1971 and/or
1638. Each indicating appliance circuit shall be electrically supervised for opens,
grounds and short circuit faults, on the circuit wiring, and shall be so arranged
that a fault condition on any indicating appliance circuit or group of circuits will
not cause an alarm to sound. The occurrence of any fault will light the trouble
LED and sound the system trouble sounder, but will not interfere with the proper
operation of any circuit which does not have a fault condition. The notification
appliance (combination audio/visual units only) shall produce a peak sound
output of 90dba or greater as measured in an anechoic chamber. The appliance
shall be capable of meeting the candela requirements of the blueprints presented
by the Engineer and ADA. The appliance shall be polarized to allow for
electrical supervision of the system wiring. The unit shall be provided with
terminals with barriers for input/output wiring and be able to mount a single gang
or double gang box or double workbox with the use of an adapter plate. The unit
shall have an input voltage range of 19-30 volts.
Smoke Detectors
1.
Smoke detectors shall be Silent Knight model IDP-Photo ceiling mounted,
Analog/Addressable photoelectric smoke detectors. The combination detector
head and twist lock base shall be U.L. listed compatible with the Silent Knight
IFP-2000 fire alarm control panel.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16720-12
15025
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Heat Detectors
1.
2.
3.
F.
Furnish and install analog/addressable heat detectors, Silent Knight model IDPHeat. The combination heat detector and twist lock base shall be U.L. listed
compatible with the Silent Knight IFP-2000 fire alarm control panel.
The base shall permit direct interchange with the Silent Knight IDP- Ionization
smoke detector and the IDP-Photo photoelectric smoke detector. The base shall
be appropriate twist lock base IDP-6AB.
The heat detector shall have a flashing status LED for visual supervision. When
the detector is actuated, the flashing LED will latch on steady at full brilliance.
The detector may be reset by actuating the control panel’s reset switch. The
vandal security-locking feature shall be used in those areas as indicated on the
drawings. Electronics of the unit shall be shielded to protect against false alarms
from E.M.I. and R.F.I.
Duct Detectors
1.
2.07
The base shall permit direct interchange with Silent Knight’s IDP-Ion ionization
smoke detector or the IDP-Heat detector. The base shall be the appropriate twist
lock base IDP-6AB
The smoke detector shall have a flashing status LED for visual supervision.
When the detector is actuated, the flashing LED will latch on steady at full
brilliance. The detector may be reset by actuating the control panel’s reset switch.
The sensitivity of the detector shall be capable of being selected and measured by
the control panel without the need for external test equipment.
The vandal security-locking feature shall be used in those areas as indicated on
the drawing. The locking feature shall be field selectable when required. It shall
be possible to perform a sensitivity test of the detector without the need of
generating smoke. The test method shall simulate the effects of products of
combustion in the chamber to ensure testing of the detector circuits.
Detectors shall have completely closed back to restrict entry of dust and air
turbulence and have a 30 mesh insect screen. Electronics of the unit shall be
shielded to protect against false alarms from E.M.I. and R.F.I.
Duct Detector shall be Silent Knight SSDNR with an IDP-Photo smoke head.
WIRING
A.
Installer’s Responsibilities
1.
2.
3.
B.
The installer shall coordinate the installation of the fire alarm equipment.
All conductors and wiring shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
It shall be the installer’s responsibility to coordinate with the supplier, regarding
the correct wiring procedures before installing any conduits or conductors.
Installation of System Components
1.
2.
System components shall be installed in accordance with the latest revisions of
the appropriate NFPA pamphlets, the requirements contained herein, National
Electrical Code, local and state regulations, the requirements of the fire
department and other applicable authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ).
All wire used on the fire alarm system shall be U.L. Listed as fire alarm
protection signaling circuit cable per National Electrical Code, Articles 760.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16720-13
15025
2.08
WARRANTY AND FINAL TEST
A.
General
1.
B.
Final Test
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
The contractor shall warrant all equipment and wiring free from inherent
mechanical and electrical defects for one year (365 days) from the date of final
acceptance.
Before the installation shall be considered completed and acceptable by the
awarding authority, a test of the system shall be performed as follows:
The contractor’s job foreman, a representative of the owner, and the fire
department shall operate every building fire alarm device to ensure proper
operation and correct annunciation at the control panel.
At least one half of all tests shall be performed on battery standby power.
Where application of heat would destroy any detector, it may be manually
activated.
The communication loops and the indicating appliance circuits shall be opened in
at least two (2) locations per circuit to check for the presence of correct
supervision circuitry.
When the testing has been completed to the satisfaction of both the contractor’s
job foreman and owner, a notarized letter cosigned by each attesting to the
satisfactory completion of said testing shall be forwarded to the owner and the
fire department.
The contractor shall leave the fire alarm system in proper working order, and,
without additional expense to the owner, shall replace any defective materials or
equipment provided by him under this contract within one year (365 days) from
the date of final acceptance by the awarding authority.
Prior to final test the fire department must be notified in accordance with local
requirements.
As Built Drawings, Testing, and Maintenance Instructions
1.
2.
As Built Drawings
a.
A complete set of reproducible “as-built” drawings showing installed
wiring, color coding, and wire tag notations for exact locations of all
installed equipment, specific interconnections between all equipment,
and internal wiring of the equipment shall be delivered to the owner upon
completion of system.
Operating and Instruction Manuals
a.
Operating and instruction manuals shall be submitted prior to testing of
the system. Three (3) complete sets of operating and instruction manuals
shall be delivered to the owner upon completion. User operating
instructions shall be provided prominently displayed on a separate sheet
located next to the control unit in accordance with U.L. Standard 864.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, local and state codes, as
shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16720-14
15025
3.02
B.
All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished
areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installed
prior to the system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this
period, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination and
physical damage.
C.
All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators shall
be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when
located in unfinished areas.
D.
Manual fire alarm boxes shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi-flush mounting as
shown on the plans, and shall be installed not less than 42 inches (1067 mm), nor more
than 48 inches (122 mm) above the finished floor.
TEST
A.
The service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the
manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment shall be provided to technically supervise and
participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. All testing shall be in
accordance with NFPA 72, Chapter 7.
B.
Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short
circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.
C.
Close each sprinkler system flow valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at the FACP.
D.
Verify activation of all waterflow switches.
E.
Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
F.
Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
G.
Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.
H.
Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
I.
Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices.
J.
Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors using the
walk test.
K.
Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on
the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP
and the correct activation of the control points.
L.
When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual shall be
consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such
items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices,
sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16720-15
15025
3.03
FINAL INSPECTION
A.
3.04
At the final inspection, a factory-trained representative of the manufacturer of the major
equipment shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect.
INSTRUCTION
A.
Instruction shall be provided as required for operating the system. Hands-on
demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire system including
program changes and functions shall be provided.
B.
The contractor and/or the systems manufacturer's representatives shall provide a
typewritten "Sequence of Operation."
END OF SECTION 16720
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16720-16
15025
SECTION 16727 – DOOR SECURITY SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide an extension to the existing DMP XR500 security detection and alerting system
as indicated. System shall provide digital alarm and trouble transmission to a central
reporting agency of the Owner’s choice. The unit shall be UL listed for Commercial
Burglary applications.
B.
System shall support the future addition and expansion.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
All provisions of the contract including Division 1 apply to work specified in each
section of this Division 16.
B.
See Sections 16010, 16110, 16120, 16134, 16199 and 16751.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide vendor information for each type of security device installed on
the project.
B.
Shop Drawings: Provide floor plan wiring diagrams indicating equipment locations and
wiring configuration. Include riser diagrams, rough-in diagrams, instructions for
installation, and operation and maintenance instructions. All drawings shall be machine
produced on AUTOCAD 2010 or later release.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
The system areas and zones shall be programmable, and the system shall store, log,
display, and transmit specific custom designations for system areas, zones, and user
names.
B.
To ensure continued, one-call support, the system shall be constructed of sensing
components provided directly by the system manufacturer, such as power supplies,
motion detectors, door and window position switches, glass break detectors, or other
sensing devices that the manufacturer offers.
C.
The system controller, user interfaces, zone input devices, relay output devices, and the
system signal receiving equipment shall be engineered, manufactured, assembled, and
must be distributed from a location within the United States of America.
D.
The system shall support user interaction by way of a keypad, web browser, system
software, key switch, or radio frequency wireless control, using integrated or auxiliary
devices provided by the system manufacturer.
E.
The system shall support controller zone input connections, system keypads, system zone
expansion modules, and wireless zone input modules, and must support zone input
connections by way of at least two competitive products. The system shall offer a
seamless integrated compatibility with hard-wire and/ or wireless zone expansion
equipment for at least 200 wireless zones and/ or a maximum of 574 hardwired zones.
F.
The system shall be capable of offering at least five zone expansion buses, each of which
can support the connection of up to 15,000 feet of four-wire cable. Zone expansion and
keypad data buses that exceed 2,500 feet of cable must include splitter/repeater modules
to boost data voltage and maintain data integrity.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16727-1
15025
1.05
1.06
G.
The system shall provide a seamless capability to provide a minimum of 500 addressable
relays, which can be located at any connection location upon a zone expansion bus.
H.
System relay outputs shall have the capability of being triggered as a result of a command
from the user interface, changes in system status, changes in zone status, or by a
programmable schedule.
I.
System relay output states shall be programmable for momentary, maintained, pulsed, or
must follow the state of an associated system zone input.
J.
The system shall be completely programmable either locally from a keypad or remotely
through a standard dial-up, and network connections by way of a LAN, WAN, and/or by
way of the Internet.
K.
The control unit shall be completely programmable remotely using remote annunciators,
and/ or using upload/ download software that communicates using SDLC 300 baud, 2400
baud, or IP Addressed data network. On-site programming from a personal computer
shall also be permitted.
L.
The control unit shall be equipped with an anti-reversing circuit breaker to prevent
damage due to accidental reversal of battery leads.
SYSTEM OPERATION
A.
This system shall be capable of monitoring a maximum of 574 individual zones and
controlling a maximum of 502 output relays.
B.
The control panel shall have, as an integral part of the assembly, 2 SPDT Form C relays
rated at 1 Amp at 30 VDC and four open collector 12 VDC outputs rated at 50mA each.
It shall also have the capacity of a maximum of 125 output expander modules with 500
switched ground, open collector outputs, 50mA maximum and 502 auxiliary relays (Form
C rated at 1.0 Amp at 30 VDC).
C.
The panel shall also provide 100 programmable output schedules, and include an integral
bell alarm circuit providing at least 1.5 Amps of steady, pulsed, or temporal bell output.
Output type shall be programmable by zone type. Relays and voltage outputs shall be
capable of being independently programmed to turn on and/or off at selected times each
day.
SYSTEM FEATURES
A.
Control Panel Capability
1.
The basic control panel shall provide:
a.
Expansion to a total of at least 10,000 user codes with 99 user profile
definitions.
b.
Sixteen (16) independent door/keypad addresses, each with four zones.
c.
Twenty (20) Holiday Dates for custom holiday scheduling by area.
d.
A total door access granted event buffer of at least 10,000 events.
e.
Anti-passback access control selectable by area and user.
f.
Four (4) shift schedules per area.
g.
A total of at least 100 programmable output relay schedules.
h.
Thirty-two (32) individual reporting areas.
i.
Built-in bell and telephone line supervision.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16727-2
15025
PART 2 - EQUIPMENT
2.01
2.02
MATERIALS
A.
Control Panel: Existing DMP XR500 Series Access/Burglary/Fire 574-Zone Command
Processor Panel
B.
Keypads: DMP Thinline LCD Keypads LT7073
C.
Proximity Card Reader: Assa Abloy HID ProxPro Reader Hu5355
D.
Zone Expansion Module: DMP LT714-16
E.
PIR Motion Sensors: Optex RX-40 PI Wall Mount
F.
360 Degree PIR Motion Sensor: Optex FX-360
G.
Hinged Door Contacts: Equivalent to Sentrol #1378 Series magnetic flush-mounted
contacts and magnets. Each contact shall be hermetically sealed for long term 10,000,000
cycle operation. Switch contacts shall be of the reed blade type with rhodium plating
eliminating cold-welding; sticking and resistance build-up. All switches shall be 100%
factory tested prior to installation.
H.
Overhead Door Contacts: Same features as specified for Hinged Door Contacts, except
designed to monitor vertically moving doors.
I.
Power Supplies: DMP LT 505 Series
COMPILED DETECTION EQUIPMENT LISTING
A.
Hard-wired
1.
Hard-wired detection equipment shall communicate to the system by way of the
control panel loop expansion bus. The equipment shall have a three (3) year
warranty as stated in the current DMP Product Catalog and meet or exceed
features offered in the following products:
a.
Motion Detector – DMP Model 6155LX (wall mount with built-in zone
expander)
b.
Motion Detector – DMP Model AP669 (ceiling mount 360’ – requires
DMP zone expander)
c.
Glass Break Detector – DMP Model 5845LX (includes built-in zone
expander)
d.
Door Contact – DMP Model SD70 (concealed applications – requires
DMP zone expander)
e.
Bus Splitter/Repeater Module – DMP Model 710
f.
Door Contact – DMP Model SM20WG (surface applications – requires
DMP zone expander)
g.
Output Expansion Module - DMP Model 716
h.
Graphic Annunciator Module - DMP Model 717
i.
Other product types shall connect directly to zone expansion modules
such as:
1)
Manual Fire Alarms – DMP Models 850S, 850D
2)
Smoke/Smoke Heat Detectors – NS6-100 and SLR-835 or SLR835H
3)
Smoke/Smoke Heat Detectors – SLR-835B, SLR-835BH
4)
Addressable - DMP Model 711
5)
Addressable - DMP Models 714, 714-8, 714-16
6)
Addressable - DMP Models 712-8
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16727-3
15025
7)
8)
9)
B.
Wireless
1.
C.
Wireless detection equipment shall communicate to the system by way of a
compatible 900MHz receiver utilizing two way communications, capable of
receiving up to 500 wireless zones. The wireless system shall be programmed
directly from the control panel, and shall not require a separate device
programmer. The wireless detection equipment shall have a one (1) year
warranty. It shall be capable of sending transmitter and battery status to the
control panel’s compatible receiver up to once every 60 seconds and must meet
or exceed the following products:
a.
Input transmitter – DMP Model 1101, 1102
b.
Pendant Panic Transmitter – DMP Model 1147, 1146, 1145
c.
Smoke Detector Transmitter – DMP Model 1161, 1162
d.
Motion Detector – DMP Model 1121 or DMP Model 1125
e.
Glass Break Detector – DMP Model 1129
f.
Bill Trap – DMP Model 1139
g.
Panic Transmitter – DMP Model 1142
h.
Wireless Receiver – DMP Model 1100X, 1100XI, 1100XH
i.
Recessed Contact – DMP Model 1131-W
Notification Devices
1.
D.
Addressable - DMP Models 715, 715-8, 715-16
Addressable - DMP Models 521LX, 521LXT, 850S/711,
850D/711
Non-Addressable - DMP Models 521B, 850S, 850D
Notification equipment shall be control panel activated by way of the supervised
bell output module. The equipment shall have a three (3) year warranty as stated
in the current DMP Product Catalog and meet or exceed features offered in the
following products:
a.
Bells – Wheelock Model MB-G6-12, MB-G10-12, MB-G6-24, MBG10-24
b.
Horns – Wheelock Model MT-12/24, NH-12/24, MIZ-24, AH-24, AH24WP
c.
Strobe – Wheelock Model RSS-121575W, RSS-24MCW
d.
Horn Strobe – Wheelock Model MTWP=2475W, NS-121575W, NS24MCW, AS-24MCW
e.
Notification Modules – DMP Models 865, 866, 867,
f.
Notification/Synchronization Modules – DMP Models 831, 832
Power Supplies and Transformers
1.
Power supply, transformer, and battery devices shall maintain system operation.
The batteries shall be checked and replaced every three to five years. The
equipment shall have a three (3) year warranty as stated in the current DMP
Product Catalog and meet or exceed features offered in the following products:
a.
Power Supply – DMP Model 505-12, 115 VAC, 12 VDC
b.
Power Supply – DMP Model 505-12LX, 115 VAC, 12 VDC
c.
Transformer - DMP Model 327, 16.5 VAC 50 VA, Plug-in
d.
Transformer - DMP Model 322, 16.5 VAC 56 VA, Wire-in
e.
Transformer - DMP Model 323, 16.5 VAC 56 VA, Wire-in
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16727-4
15025
E.
Access Control Equipment
1.
Access control equipment shall provide access control functions between the
panel and controller door access points. The equipment shall have a three (3)
year warranty as stated in the current DMP Product Catalog and meet or exceed
features offered in the following products:
a.
Interface Module – DMP Model 734, Wiegand
b.
Egress Module – DMP Model PB-2 REX Button
c.
Reader – DMP Model PP-6005B Proxpoint Plus©
d.
Reader – DMP Model MP-5365 Miniprox©
e.
Reader – DMP Model MX-5375 Maxi-Prox™
f.
Reader – DMP Model TL-5395 Thinkline II™
g.
Door Controller – DMP Model 1306P Prox Patch™
h.
Door Controller – DMP Model 1306PW Prox Patch™
i.
Access Card – DMP Model 1351 ProxPass© Card
j.
Access Card – DMP Model 1326 Proxcard II© Card
k.
Access Device – DMP Model 1346 Proxkey II™ Keyfob, 1386 Isoprox
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.01
3.02
3.03
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Installers shall be qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on
projects with low-voltage electronic systems installation work similar to that required for
the project.
B.
Any person installing this equipment and wiring must hold valid State of Idaho electrical
licenses. Installers shall also possess any licenses required by local jurisdictions.
C.
Substitutions may be considered only when submitted in conformance with Section
16010.
INSTALLERS
A.
System shall be installed under the direct-supervision of a qualified installer
B.
Substitutions may be considered only when submitted in conformance with Section
16010.
INSTALLATION
A.
Wiring shall be installed in raceway and shall be arranged as indicated on the Drawings
and the shop drawings.
B.
Any wiring and conduit arrangement shown on the drawings for the security alarm/access
system is illustrative only in nature and shall not be construed as “an installation design”
to be rigidly followed. The installing contractor is responsible to arrange conduit and
wiring in accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s requirements, the general
requirements of the building’s construction, and comply with all applicable electrical
codes. All wire installed must be approved for burglar alarm and access control use
under Article 760, of the National Electrical Code.
C.
Final connections between system equipment and the wiring system shall be made under
the direct supervision of a representative of the Installer. No power shall be applied to
the alarm equipment until all connections between the equipment and the wiring system
have been approved and checked for grounds, shorts, opens or other wiring defects, by a
representative of the equipment supplier.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16727-5
15025
3.04
D.
The equipment subcontractor must provide a complete installation. They must perform
final trim of all devices, test and program the entire system, and provide proper training
on the system to the owner’s representatives. This shall include programming of the
dialer to report to a UL listed Remote Station.
E.
Door contacts shall be flush mounted in doors and door frames.
F.
Motion detectors shall be installed on stainless steel device plates covering flush mounted
outlet boxes.
G.
Keypads shall be surface mounted over flush mounted outlet boxes.
OPERATION AND TESTING
A.
The installing contractor and equipment supplier shall be jointly responsible to assure that
a complete functional test of all equipment is performed prior to the system operation
being demonstrated to the Owner’s representative.
B.
Program control panel using building area descriptions provided by the Owner.
C.
Program digital communicator after installation and programming is complete.
Demonstrate the operation of each alarm device and the digital communicator to the
Owner.
D.
Two weeks after initial operation, reprogram control panel and digital communicator as
directed by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 16727
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16727-6
15025
SECTION 16751 – COMMUNICATIONS STRUCTURED CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
All provisions of the contract including Division 01 apply to work specified in each section of
this Division 16.
B.
See Sections: 16010, 16110, 16120, 16160, 16131, 16132, 16134, and 16147.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Furnish, install, test and place into satisfactory and successful operation all equipment,
materials, devices, and necessary appurtenances to provide a complete ANSI/TIA/EIA,
NECA/NEIS and ISO/IEC compliant communications CAT-6 Structured Cabling System
(SCS) as hereinafter specified and/or shown on the Contract Documents. The system is
intended to be capable of integrating voice, data, and video signals onto a common media, and
shall be tested for and capable of Gigabit Ethernet operation as specified in IEEE 802.3z.
B.
Work shall include all materials, equipment and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein
or noted on the plans but which are necessary to make a complete working ANSI/TIA/EIA
and ISO/IEC compliant SCS.
C.
Provide all telecom racks, patch panels, patch cords, punch-down blocks, cabling, fiber optic
cable, outlet boxes, pull boxes, plates and jacks.
D.
Provide testing of all terminated cables.
E.
Provide a fiber optic patch panel in basement MDF room and in the new IT closet on the
second floor. Route a 12 strand fiber with SC connectors on each end.
F.
Provide all data outlet boxes, pull boxes, plates and jacks. Jacks shall be RJ-45 Category 6.
G.
Route a 25 pair Telecom Cable from the basement MDF room to the new IT closet on the
second floor. Terminate on both ends on patch panels.
H.
Route a communications cable to each camera location.
PREMISE WIRING CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Contractor shall be trained and certified by the Manufacturers to install, test, and maintain the
SCS and be certified by the SCS Manufacturers to provide the SCS Manufacturers
Warranties.
B.
Contractor shall employ a minimum of one Registered Communications Distribution Designer
(RCDD) certified by and in current good standing with BICSI. The RCDD shall be a direct
full time employee of the Contractor (i.e. an RCDD consultant/sub-contractor to the
Contractor is not acceptable). Contractor shall continue to employ a minimum of one RCDD
throughout the duration of the project.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16751-1
15025
1.04
C.
Contractor shall have successfully completed no less than five similar projects (in terms of
size and construction cost) under the Contractor’s current business name within the past three
years.
D.
The Contractor shall be thoroughly knowledgeable in TIA/EIA 568 standards of Category 3,
5, and 6 installations. The requirements of these standards shall be met whether a particular
item is specified or not. The specifications assume that the contractor shall provide all
miscellaneous components, hardware, etc., in a manner compliant with these standards.
REFERENCES
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Communications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
1.05
National Electrical Code (NEC)
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act (WISHA)
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
ANSI/TIA/EIA – 455: Fiber Optic Test Standards
ANSI/TIA/EIA – 526: Optical Fiber Systems Test Procedures
ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568-B Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard
ANSI/EIA/TIA – 569:Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication
Pathways and Spaces
ANSI/TIA/EIA – 606: The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications
Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings
ANSI/TIA/EIA – 607: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements
for Telecommunications
ANSI/TIA/EIA – TSB67: Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing
of Unshielded Twisted Pair Cabling Systems
ANSI/TIA/EIA – TSB75: Additional Horizontal Cabling Practices for Open Offices
NECA/FOA 301-1997: Standard for Installing Commercial Building
Telecommunications Systems
IEEE 802.3 (series): Local Area Network Ethernet Standard, including the IEEE
802.3z Gigabit Ethernet Standard
ISO/IEC IS 11801: Generic Cabling for Customer Premises
BICSI: BICSI Telecommunications Cabling Installation Manual
BICSI: BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM)
DEFINITIONS
A.
“SCS” shall mean Structured Cabling System. The SCS is defined as all required equipment
and materials including (but not limited to) ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B and ISO/IEC 11801
compliant copper station cable (Category 3, Category 5E, Category 6, etc.) and fiber optic
cable (multimode and singlemode), patch cables, stations and staion connectors, termination
blocks, patch panels, racks/enclosures (such as EIA standard equipment racks, enclosures, and
vertical and horizontal cable management hardware), pathway/raceway materials (such as
conduit, sleeves, D-rings, surface raceway, ladder rack, cable tray, etc.), and other incidental
and miscellaneous equipment and materials as required for a fully operational, tested,
certified, and warranted system, compliant with all applicable codes and standards.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16751-2
15025
1.06
B.
“TMGB” shall mean Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar. There is typically one
TMGB per building, located in the main telecommunications room. This busbar is directly
bonded to the electrical service ground.
C.
“TGB” shall mean Telecommunications Grounding Busbar. There is typically on TGB per
telecommunications room. The TGB is connected both to the TMGB and to building
structural steel or other permanent metallic systems.
D.
“TBB” shall mean Telecommunications Bonding Backbone. The TBB is a conductor used to
connect TMGBs to TGBs.
E.
“UTP” shall mean Unshielded Twisted Pair Cable.
SUBMITTAL INFORMATION
A.
Submit the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
1.07
Product Detailed Specifications
Product Data Sheets
Manufacturer’s Instructions
Product Catalog Literature
Product (Shop) Drawings
Third party performance verification certificates (upon request where applicable)
Provide submittals on all Category 6 Cabling, Indoor/Outdoor Fiber Optic Cabling, copper
patch panels, fiber patch panels, jacks, D-rings and J-hooks.
WARRANTY
A.
Contractor Warranty
1.
B.
Provide a Contractor-endorsed two-year service warranty against defects in materials
and workmanship.
a.
Provide al labor attributable to the fulfillment of this warranty at no
additional cost to the Owner.
1)
The Contractor warranty period shall commence upon Owner
acceptance of the work.
SCS Manufacturer Warranties:
1.
2.
The SCS Manufacturer Warranties shall be provided by the selected SCS
Manufacturers and shall be:
a.
16-year System Warranty.
1)
Provide a copy of the warranty registration document to the Owner
at the time of submittal.
b.
16-year System Warranty.
1)
Provide a copy of the warranty registration document to the Owner
at the time of submittal.
The SCS Manufacturer Warranty period shall commence upon a Warranty Certificate
being issued by the manufacturer. The Warranty Certificates shall be issued no later
than three months after Owner acceptance of the work.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16751-3
15025
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Provide CommScope, AVAYA, Systimax for copper-related products and fiber optic related
products. Components shall not be intermixed between different manufacturers unless the
manufacturer of the SCS has listed (in writing) another manufacturer’s component as an
“Approved Alternative Product” and will warrant the “Approved Alternative Product” as part
of the SCS Manufacturer Warranty (see PART 1 – WARRANTY).
B.
All copper-related components shall be part of the copper SCS product line and all fiber
optic-related components shall be part of the fiber optic SCS product line – components shall
not be intermixed between manufacturers’ SCS product lines. The SCS product lines shall be
engineered “end-to-end” – the system and all components shall be engineered to function
together as a single, continuous transmission path.
1.
C.
Racks, rack cable distribution hardware, and other rack and distribution components shall be
manufactured by a single manufacturer unless stated otherwise in this Specification or in the
Contract Documents. Do not intermix equipment and components between different
manufacturers.
1.
2.
D.
2.02
The SCS Product Line shall be the following, per manufacturer.
a.
For Category 6 Copper Distribution : CommScope, AVAYA, Systimax
Racks/Distribution Equipment: Chatsworth Products, INC. (CPI)
B-line
Provide all incidental and/or miscellaneous hardware not explicitly specified or shown on the
Contract Documents that is required for a fully operational, tested, certified, and warranted
system.
PATHWAYS AND CABLE SUPPORTS
A.
Raceways, boxes, etc., shall be provided under this contract. Conduits shall be metallic, and
shall be of the size shown on the drawings. If not indicated, minimum 3/4”. See Sections
16110, 16134, and 16132,
B.
Sleeves: Provide sleeves where required for cable pass-thru. Provide core drilling where
required for sleeve installation. Sleeves shall be EMT conduit and shall be provided with
insulated throat bushings for each end. Sleeve sizing shall be as noted on the Drawings.
Where not noted, sleeve sizing shall be determined by the type and quantity of cable to be
routed through the sleeve per TIA/EIA 569 cable capacity standards, plus an additional 100%
for future expansion.
C.
All backboards in the communications room shall be 3/4 inch A-C non-fire retardant plywood
backboards, void free, 8 ft high. All Backboards shall be capable of supporting attached
equipment, and painted with a minimum of two coats (over primer) of fire retardant, nonconductive paint, and one coat of white colored semi gloss top coat paint. Mount A-C
plywood backboards with the “A” side exposed.
D.
D-Rings:
1.
Metallic: CPI 10941, 10942, 10943
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16751-4
15025
E.
Cable Supports (J-Hooks, Straps): Complete with incidental materials and assemblies required
for mounting.
1.
2.
F.
Innerduct:
1.
2.
G.
2.03
Pull Strings: Plastic or nylon with a minimum test rating of 200 lb.
Firestopping material: Conform to both Flame (F) and Temperature (T) ratings as required by
local building codes and as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E814 or UL
1479 fire test in a configuration that is representative of the actual field conditions.
Manufactured by:
1.
Rack– free standing
1.
Design and performance requirements
a.
Free standing communications racks shall be a floor-mounted
formed/welded steel construction or aluminum channel construction, with
powder coating.
Racks shall be suitable for equipment rooms,
telecommunications rooms, entrance facilities and data centers.
b.
Racks shall have a full assortment of vertical and horizontal cable
management accessories available.
c.
Racks shall accommodate expansion of cable capacity and added volume for
augmented category 6 cabling.
GROUNDING AND BONDING
A.
2.06
Specified Tech. Inc. (or approved equal).
EQUIPMENT RACKS/ENCLOSURES
A.
2.05
Indoor: 1 1/14” Outside Diameter, bright orange in color. Provide innerduct for fiber
optic cables from termination points within buildings to outside conduit entrances.
Innerduct installed in plenum rated ceilings shall be plenum rated.
Outdoor: Innerduct shall be rated for outdoor duct installation. Innerduct shall be
corrugated, bright orange, and installed in quantities and sizes as shown on the
Drawings. Innerduct shall be provided in the following sizes.
a.
1-1/2” Diameter
b.
1” Diameter
FIRESTOPPING
A.
2.04
CADDY CableCat wide Base Cable Supports (J-Hooks):
a.
CAT12 (up to 16 4-pair/2-strand UTP/fiber cables)
b.
CAT21 (up to 50 4-pair/2-strand UTP/fiber cables)
c.
CAT32 (up to 80 4-pair/2-strand UTP/fiber cables)
CADDY CableCat Adjustable Cable Supports (Straps):
a.
CAT425 (up to 425 4-pair/2-strand UTP/fiber cables)
As specified under Division 16 Section – 16160 Grounding
PATCH PANELS
A.
Rack Mounted Copper Patch Panel:
1.
Category 6 component performance requirements.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16751-5
15025
2.
3.
2.07
CONNECTORS
A.
Copper Connectors (modular jacks): 8-position/8-conductor, insulation displacement
connection (IDC), non-keyed, and shall accept modular 8-position/8-conductor plugs,
complete with multicolored identification labels/icons for identification, and with universally
color-coded wiring pattern for both T568A and T568B. Copper connectors shall be
manufactured by the selected SCS Manufacturer.
1.
2.08
Copper Termination Blocks – For Outside Plant Copper Cabling
1.
2.
Copper Termination Blocks: UL listed and exceed ANSI/TIA EIA 568-B Category
5e specifications for performance. Include connecting blocks, designation, strips,
and labels for each 25-pair strip. Label colors per ANSI/TIA/EIA standards.
Termination blocks shall be manufactured by the selected SCS Manufacturer.
a.
Cable - CommScope
1)
Blocks: 110 Connect
2)
IDC Connecting Blocks (5-pair markings)
3)
Designation Strips
4)
Labels (white)
Copper Termination Blocks Cable Management: Vertical and horizontal cable
management for jumper/patch cables between termination blocks shall consist of a
single unit with separate horizontal and vertical pathways and shall be capable of
mounting 110Connect wiring blocks.
STATIONS
A.
Each communications outlet shall consist of the following components:
1.
2.
3.
2.10
Horizontal Distribution: Shall meet or exceed Category 6 transmission requirements
for connecting hardware, as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B and ISO/IEC 11801,
and shall be part of the UL LAN Certification and Follow-up Program:
a.
Sistemax GIGASPEED XL CATEGORY 6
COPPER TERMINATION BLOCKS
A.
2.09
Ports may be individually replaced.
Wiring T568B.
4-port outlet
Category 6 jacks shall be TIA/EIA, 568 B configuration, eight pin, non-keyed.
Provide as indicated per outlet.
Identification icons, labels, cable tape/markers, etc. as specified
CABLE
A.
General: Cables shall be manufactured by the selected SCS Manufacturer.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16751-6
15025
B.
Copper Cable:
1.
2.
2.11
For the Horizontal Distribution: 4-pair, UTP 24 AWG, with solid copper conductors
and shall be part of the UL LAN Certification and Follow-up Program.
a.
Category 6: Shall exceed Category 6 transmission requirements as specified
in ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B and ISO/IEC 11801:
1)
CommScope Plenum rated
b.
For Termination Block Connections (back-side): Unshielded, non-plenum
multi-pair copper cable.
c.
Multi-pair Copper Cable: 24-AWG, solid copper conductor, and insulated
with color coded PVC, UL Verified to ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B for Category 6
performance. Cable shall be manufactured by the selected SCS
Manufacturer:
1)
CommScope or approved equal
Provide Category 6 plenum rated cable continuous from each communication jack to
the communications room and patch panel. When cable termination is made, label
within 6" of jacket end using Panduit LS4H Heat Shrink Marking System or other
approved heat shrink label products on both ends of each cable. Label jack
faceplates using Brother P-Touch or Panduit LS4M or Panduit LS5 marking systems
or approved equal for each modular jack port and with same equipment label.
Completely label all patch panels with circuit identification numbers. In addition, the
modular jacks at both patch panels and workstation shall be labeled with circuit
identification numbers as described above.
CABLE ASSEMBLIES (PATCH CORDS) AND CROSS-CONNECTS
A.
Velcro Cable Managers: Reusable (Velcro based) hook and loop style, adjustable tension, roll
or spool dispensed.
B.
Copper Patch Cables: Pre-manufactured (factory-terminated), stranded unshielded twisted
pair (UTP), with 8-pin modular plugs and/or termination block-style patch plugs. Patch
cables shall be manufactured by the selected SCS Manufacturer.
1.
Category 6: Shall exceed Category 6 Transmission as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA
568-B and ISO/IEC 11801. Modular plugs shall be complete with snagless boots.
C.
Fiber Patch Cables: Pre-manufactured (factory-terminated) with a UL rating of OFNR. Fiber
patch cables shall be manufactured by the selected SCS Manufacturer.
D.
Copper Jumper Wire: Category 6 (for cross connects):
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16751-7
15025
2.12
LABELING AND ADMINISTRATION
A.
Labels:
1.
As recommended in ANSI/TIA/EIA 606. Permanent (i.e. not subject to fading or
erasure), permanently affixed, and created by a hand-carried label maker or a
computer/software-based label making system. Handwritten labels are not
acceptable. Labels for outside plant cables shall be permanently affixed on plastic
tags. Labels shall be provided for all components of the cabling system including but
not limited to, cables, splice enclosures, BETs, patch panels, and grounding/bonding
cables.
a.
For station Cable:
1)
Brady: Bradymaker Wire Marking Labels WML-511-292 (or
approved equal)
2)
Labels for outside plant cables shall be:
a)
Panduit Marker Tie (or approved equal).
3)
Hand-carried label maker shall be Brady ID Pro Plus (or approved
equal)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
GENERAL
A.
All work shall comply with the standards, references and codes listed in Part 1 –
REFERENCES above. Where questions arise regarding which standards, references, or
codes apply, the more stringent shall prevail.
B.
All work shall comply with the requirements and recommendations of the product
manufacturers. Where questions arise regarding which requirements and recommendations
apply, the more stringent shall prevail.
RACEWAY
A.
Backboards: Provide backboards as shown on Contract Documents. Backboards shall be
capable of supporting attached equipment, and painted with a minimum of two coats (over
primer) of fire retardant non-conductive paint, and one coat of white colored semi-gloss top
coat paint. Mount A-C plywood backboards with the “a” side exposed.
B.
Sleeves: Provide sleeves where required for cable pass-thru through building structures
and/or fire rated barriers. Provide roto-hammering or core drilling where required for sleeve
installation. Seal (and if a fire rated barrier, firestop) between sleeve and building structure
and/or barrier. Size sleeves:
1.
Where not noted, size sleeves a minimum of 2 inches in diameter or by the type and
quantity of cable to be routed through the sleeve per ANSI/TIA/EIA 569 cable
capacity standards plus an additional 100% for future expansion – whichever is
greater.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16751-8
15025
C.
D-Rings: Provide D-Rings as necessary to route exposed cables in telecommunications rooms
and on backboards and for raceway for routing cable in non-exposed open access
environments. D-Rings may be affixed to wall/ceiling structures or other supports, but not
attached to a ceiling support system. In telecommunication rooms, mount D-Rings at 12 inch
intervals. Mound D-Rings used for raceway in open access environments at 4 foot intervals.
1.
3.03
D.
Cable Supports (J-Hooks, Straps): Provide cable supports for routing cable in non-exposed
open access environments. Cable supports may be affixed to wall/ceiling structures or other
supports, but not attached to a ceiling support system. Mount cable supports at 4 foot
intervals. Do not use cable supports for more cables than they were designed to support.
Provide multiple cable supports where the total cable count exceeds the maximum cable count
for which the support was designed. Size according to the type and quantity of cable to be
routed through the ring per ANSI/TIA/EIA 569 cable capacity standards, plus an additional
50% for future expansion.
E.
Innerduct: Provide bright orange innerduct as a pathway for Fiber cabling.
F.
Pull Strings: Provide a pull string in new conduits that have new cable installed under this
project.
FIRESTOPPING
A.
Only employees trained/certified by the firestopping manufacturer shall apply firestopping
materials.
B.
Maintain fire rating of penetrated fire barriers. Fire stop and seal penetrations made during
construction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.04
Size D-Rings according to the type and quantity of cable to be routed through the
ring per TIA/EIA 569 cable capacity standards, plus an additional 100% for future
expansion, but not less than a minimum of 2 inches in diameter.
Provide firestopping material for through and membrane penetrations of fire-rated
barriers.
Install firestops in strict accordance with manufacturer’s detailed installation
procedures.
Install firestops in accordance with fire test reports, fire resistance requirements,
acceptable sample installations, manufacturer’s recommendations, local fire and
building authorities, and applicable codes and standards referenced in PART 1REFERENCES. Apply sealing material in a manner acceptable to the local fire and
building authorities.
For demolition work, apply firestopping to open penetrations in fire rated barriers
where cable is removed. Apply firestopping regardless of whether or not the
penetrations are used for new cable or left empty after construction is complete.
Fire stopping material used to seal open penetrations through which cable passes
shall be re-usable/re-enterable.
EQUIPMENT RACKS/ENCLOSURES
A.
Provide EIA racks/cabinets and all associated hardware according to location, elevations, and
plan views as shown in the Contract Documents.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16751-9
15025
3.05
GROUNDING AND BONDING
A.
Grounding and bonding work shall comply with the International Building Code,
International Fire Code, WAC, National Electrical Code, and UL467, ANSI/TIA/EIA
standards and references listed in PART 1- REFERENCES above, as well as local codes
which may specify additional grounding and/or bonding requirements.
1.
2.
3.06
PATCH PANELS
A.
Provide patch panels and horizontal wire management according to locations, elevations, and
plan views as shown on the Contract Documents and stated in the specifications.
1.
2.
3.
3.07
Fiber: Size and install rack-mountable patch panels as shown on the Contract
Documents. Use fiber patch panels to terminate multimode fiber entrance cables.
Copper: Size and install rack-mountable patch panels to terminate horizontal data
cabling.
Horizontal Wire Management: Provide horizontal wire management between patch
panels.
CONNECTORS
A.
Copper Connectors (modular jacks):
1.
3.08
Provide a minimum of one wall mountable telecommunications ground bus bar per
telecommunications room.
Grounding conductor shall be installed to bond all non-current carrying metal
telecommunications equipment and materials to the nearest TMGB.
a.
Ensure that bonding breaks through paint to bare metallic surface of all
painted metallic hardware,
b.
Provide ladder rack grounding kits to bond each section of ladder rack and
bond ladder rack to tacks/cabinets where ladder racks are connected.
Horizontal Distribution:
a.
Provide connectors and install using T568B wiring pattern.
b.
Mount connectors at 90-degrees (i.e. straight, not angled)
c.
Provide 10% spare blue connectors and 10% spare black connectors to
Owner.
COPPER TERMINATION BLOCKS
A.
Provide vertical and horizontal cable management for jumper/patch cables between
termination blocks. Provide termination blocks and (jumper troughs) with legs:
1.
2.
3.
Mounting on Backboards: Provide termination blocks, jumper troughs, and
distribution rings with legs. Use jumper troughs above and below each termination
block in a column.
Route Entrance cable horizontally along base of backboard until it reaches the
termination block column on which it is to terminate and then route vertically to the
termination block.
Punch down cable using only the selected SCS Manufacturer approved impact tool.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16751-10
15025
3.09
STATIONS
A.
Faceplates: Provide faceplates for stations in the locations and gang counts shown on the
Contract Documents. Faceplates shall completely conceal outlet boxes, reducer plates, etc.
Faceplates shall provide a snug and sure fit for connectors – loose connectors are not
acceptable.
1.
3.10
Flush-mount connectors on faceplates.
a.
Unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents, mount voice connector
in top port location (blue jack), middle port location shall be blank, mount
data connector in bottom port location (black jack).
CABLE
A.
General: Provide plenum rated cable for all locations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
For Horizontal Distribution: Provide station cables in types, sizes, and quantities as
defined by the Symbol Schedule and as shown on the Contract Documents. Install
cable between station and the telecommunications room. Provide one cable per each
connector at the station. Provide cables of the same type in the same color – multiple
colors of the same cable type are not acceptable.
Install cable in compliance with ANSI/TIA/EIA and ISO/IEC 11801 requirements
and BICSI TCIM practices.
Adhere to the bending radius and pull strength requirements as detailed in the
ANSI/TIA/EIA standards and the manufacturer’s installation recommendations
during cable handling and installation.
a.
Pull all cables simultaneously where more than one cable is being installed
in the same raceway.
b.
Use pulling compound or lubricant where necessary. Use compounds that
will not damage conductor or insulation (Polywater, or approved equal).
c.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave
wire/cable grips that will not damage media or raceway. Repair or replace
conduit bushings that become damaged during cabling installation.
Install cable in a continuous (non-spliced) manner unless otherwise indicated.
Install exposed cable parallel to and perpendicular to surfaces on exposed structural
members and follow surface contours where possible.
Tie or clamp cabling. Attaching cables to pipes, electrical conduit, mechanical items,
existing cables, or the ceiling support system (grids, hanger wires, etc – with the
exception of ceiling support anchors) is not acceptable. Install tie-wraps in
conformance with the SCS manufacturer’s installation recommendations. Do not
over-tighten tie wraps or cause cross-sectional deformation of cabling.
Cabling at the backboards:
a.
Lay and dress cables to allow other cables to enter raceway (conduit or
otherwise) without difficulty at a later time by maintaining a working
distance from these openings.
b.
Route cable as close as possible to the ceiling floor, sides, or corners to
insure that adequate wall or backboard space is available for current and
future equipment and for cable terminations.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16751-11
15025
c.
8.
9.
B.
Copper Cable: Terminate all pairs within a cable. Un-terminated cable pairs are not
acceptable.
1.
C.
2.
3.
3.12
For horizontal distribution: Provide station cable in the locations shown on the
Contract Documents. Provide service loops with a minimum length of 12 inches in
outlet boxes and no less than 10 feet in the telecommunication room.
a.
Route station cable that is exposed (not in conduit) to comply with
ANSI/TIA/EIA-569 rules for avoiding potential EMI sources.
Fiber Cable: Terminate all fiber strands with a fiber cable. The installation of “dark fiber” is
not acceptable.
1.
3.11
Lay cable via the shortest route directly to the nearest edge of the backboard
from mounted equipment or blocks. Support cables so as not to create a load
on the equipment upon which the cables are terminated. Tie-wrap similarly
routed and similar cables together and attach to D-Rings vertically and/or
horizontally, then route over a path that will offer minimum obstruction to
future installations of equipment, backboards or other cables.
Cable in the telecommunications rooms:
a.
For telecommunications rooms with ladder rack, lay cable neatly in ladder
rack in even bundles and loosely secure cabling to the ladder rack at regular
intervals with tie-wraps or Velcro straps.
Cable terminating on patch panels located on racks:
a.
Route cables in telecommunications rooms to patch panels on racks by
routing across ladder rack across top of rack and then down vertical ladder
rack to patch panel.
Test fiber optic cable on the reel upon delivery to the job site, and again prior to
installation. Permanently affix the test results to the reel and submit a copy to the
Owner prior to installation. Do not install cables that fail the on-reel test. Replace
any cables that fail the on-reel test at no additional expense to the Owner.
For shielded cable, bond both ends of the metallic shield member to the nearest TGB.
Provide a 10 foot service loop at each termination point.
CABLE ASSEMBLIES (PATCH CORDS) AND CROSS-CONNECTS
A.
Furnish copper patch cables for modular copper cross-connects.
B.
Furnish fiber patch cables for fiber cross connects.
LABELING AND ADMINISTRATION
A.
General: Labeling and administration shall comply with AMSI/TIA/EIA 606 and standard
industry practices.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16751-12
15025
B.
Color Coding: Apply industry standard color coding to cable termination fields. Always
apply the same color at both ends of any given cable. Cross-connections are generally made
between termination fields of different colors. The color may be applied to the backboard
behind the termination equipment, may be the color of a cover on the termination equipment,
or may be the actual color of the insert label on the termination equipment Use the following
color code:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
Telecommunications Rooms: Affix a permanent label to the door of each telecommunications
room. Where telecommunications room names are required in other labels, use the
telecommunications room name shown on the Contract Documents.
D.
Racks: Affix label centered across top cross-member of rack.
E.
Grounding/Bonding Conductors:
Label bonding conductors: “WARNING!
TELECOMMUNICATIONS BONDING CONDUCTOR. DO NOT REMOVE OR
DISCONNECT!”
F.
Cables:
1.
2.
3.
3.13
Orange: Identification of the telecommunication service (telephone company)
demarcation point.
Green: Identification of network connections on the customer side of the
demarcation point.
White: Identification of first-level backbone in the building containing the main
cross-connect, or may be used to identify the second-level backbone in the buildings
not containing the main cross-connect.
Gray: Identification of the second-level backbone in the building containing the
main cross-connect.
Blue: Identification of the horizontal distribution (station) cables. A blue color
coding is only required at the telecommunications room end of the cable no at the
station end of the cable.
Brown: Identification of inter-building backbone cables.
Yellow: Identification of auxiliary circuits, alarms, maintenance, security, and other
miscellaneous circuits.
Red: Identification of key telephone systems.
Label location: Affix at each end of the cable.
Station cables: Label station cables with the same label as the station connector that
terminates the cable at the station location. Include a clear vinyl adhesive wrapping
applied over the label in order to permanently affix the label to the cable. Using
transparent tape to affix labels to cables is not acceptable.
Provide labels at each end of each cable within 24” of telecommunications room
entrance and again within 24” of termination point.
INSTALLATION
A.
All cables shall be run through walls in conduit stub-ups of 3/4 inch from each outlet location
to a 90 degree sweep in suspended ceiling area. Provide bushings on all conduits to protect
cables. Cables shall be run in free air through suspended ceiling areas above tile grid routed
in bridal D-rings.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16751-13
15025
B.
LAN and other system cables above ceilings shall be supported from the building structure.
Cables shall be loosely bundled (where grouped) and supported as required to prevent sharp
bends or kinking. Support shall be adequate for the cable weight. Utilize wall or ceiling
suspended J- hooks and or D-rings. Cable supports shall be as required by standard industry
practice and building conditions.
C.
Communication cables shall be separated from other systems cables to minimize cross talk
interference. Communication cables in cable tray are to be installed in one side of the divided
cable tray and not mixed in with other systems wiring.
D.
Systems cables shall not be attached to power conduits. Cables running parallel to power
conduits shall have a minimum separation of 6 inches.
E.
Minimum separation from fluorescent light fixtures is to be 12". Minimum separation from
motors or transformers is to be 40".
F.
Bond all systems stub-ups and raceways per NEC requirements.
G.
Sleeves are to be provided in fire walls above ceilings to provide paths wherever cables are
being routed. At fire walls provide 2" rigid steel conduit threaded nipples with bushings
(both sides) or EMT fitted with threaded, nylon throated end connectors. Provide fire seal as
necessary wherever passage through any type of fire wall is required. Unused sleeves are to
be provided with metal end caps on both sides.
H.
The data (communication) system CAT5 enhanced shall be installed in a star topology. A
dedicated cable shall run between each jack and the patch panel in the communications room.
The maximum length of each cable shall not exceed 295' (90 meters). Route cables between
jack and patch panel using the shortest distance possible. Each cable shall be terminated on
CAT5 enhanced patch panel 568B with 110 punchdowns to RJ45 nonkeyed ports.
I.
All cables must be terminated using a compression connection tool. An additional eight feet
of cable shall be left on or near the network backboards for future cable re-termination. An
additional 18" to 24" of each cable shall be left at or near each outlet box/jack for future cable
re-termination. No microbends shall be permitted less than 2" bend radius for the entire cable
run. Cable runs must be continuous full length - no splices are allowed between patch panel
and work station jacks.
J.
All communication cables shall be installed using Category 5 enhanced standards as follows:
Wire pair twists must be maintained to within 1/2" of IDC contacts on each jack, jacketing
must be undamaged for the full length of the cable run and must continue to within two
inches of IDC contacts on each jack, each end of each cable must be secured to the jack
module with a plastic cable tie. All plastic cable ties must be trimmed with a flush-cut tool to
ensure that no sharp edges result. Any cables damaged during pulling shall be the
responsibility of the cable installer. Any failing tests (see above) shall be re-terminated, rerouted, re-tested, etc., until no further alternatives exist, at which time it will be assumed that
a bad cable run (too much twisting of the cable, compression of jacketing and wire pairs, etc.)
has resulted (at the discretion of the LAN tester) and the pulling party/parties will have to bear
the responsibility of re-pulling new cable to replace it.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16751-14
15025
K.
Documentation: The vendor shall provide each of the following to the Owner at the system
demonstration:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.14
Final Record Drawings: Provide As-Built network drawings and/or diagrams
indicating the cabling distribution system from outlet faceplate to distribution frame
(patch panel), for each and every drop. These drawings and/or diagrams are to be
included in the As-Built drawings, or the O&M manuals and hub binders. They shall
be draft quality. Markups, hand drawings, etc., will be rejected.
Materials and components listing for each item. Manufacture, part number and
distributor. Include in O&M manuals.
Patching Map: Provide a drafted illustration of each patch panel which shows device
and cable identification connected to each port position.
Hub Reference Binders: For each hub, provide a three-ring binder which includes
the test reports, patching map, network diagrams and/or reduced size drawings for the
backbone and portion of the networking system served by that hub.
TESTING
A.
Provide test records on a form approved by the Owner and Engineer/Designer. Include the
test results for each cable in the system. Submit the test results for each cable tested with
identification as discussed under LABELING and ADMINISTRATION above. Include the
cable identifier, outcome of test, indication of errors found, cable length, retest results, and
name and signature of technician completing the tests. Provide test results to the Owner and
Engineer/Designer for review and acceptance within two weeks of Substantial Completion.
1.
B.
Print test records for each cable within the system directly from the tester and submit
in paper form (in a binder) and in electronic form (on CDROM) to the Owner and
Engineer/Designer for review. Handwritten results will not be accepted.
Test the SCS after installation for compliance to all applicable standards as follows:
1.
Copper:
a.
For Horizontal Distribution: Test all pairs of each copper station cable, for
conformance to ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B Category 5E, and ANSI/TIA/EIA
568-B standards. To the extent possible, perform tests with building
electrical system fully powered on (i.e. Lights, HVAC, etc).
1)
Test each end-to-end link (the entire channel from the connector at
the station to the connector or termination in the
telecommunications room) utilizing sweep tests, for continuity,
shorts, polarity, near-end cross talk (NEXT), far-end cross talk
(FEXT), attenuation, installed length, transposition (wire map),
mutual capacitance, characteristic impedance, resistance, ACR, and
presence of AC voltage. Use the Power Sum method to test NEXT
and FEXT. Test each cable in both directions.
2)
Use a TIA/EIA Level III testing instrument, re-calibrated within the
manufacturer’s recommended calibration period, with the most
current software revision based upon the most current
ANSI/TIA/EIA testing guidelines, capable of storing and printing
test records for each cable within the system and equipped with the
current Category 5e test adapters.
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16751-15
15025
3)
In addition to the above, perform tests both recommended and
mandated by AMP. Tests shall confirm/guarantee compliance to
AMP Ethernet Category 5e applications based on the data contained
in the AMP Performance Specifications. Volume 1, May 2001 or
latest edition.
C.
Cables and equipment which do not pass shall be identified to the Owner and Engineer. The
source of the non-compliance shall be determined, replaced or corrected and the cable or
equipment re-tested at no additional expense to the Owner. Provide new test results to the
Owner and Engineer on the same form as above. LABELING
D.
Identification and labeling shall follow the guidelines of ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A. Mandatory
minimum labeling shall include pathways, TR’s, ER’s, EF’s, cable ends behind panels and
wall outlets, wall outlet ports, patch panels and ports, fire stops, and grounding/bonding
locations.
E.
Labels shall be permanent, with machine-generated identification codes according to
specification. Tape with hand-written identifiers is prohibited.
END OF SECTION 16751
Lewiston Library
Second Floor Remodel Project
16751-16
15025